JP2021154010A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To solve the problem that an interest in a game may decrease when a jackpot relatively disadvantageous to a player occurs as a result of a game performance while interest in a game is increased when a game performance having high jackpot reliability is executed in a game machine, where a plurality of jackpots are available as jackpots, namely jackpots relatively advantageous to a player and jackpots relatively disadvantageous to a player, a plurality of game performances having different execution modes are available as game performances (ready-to-win performances, character performances, and the like), and different jackpot reliability is shown depending on a game performance to be executed.SOLUTION: A game machine capable of executing a game performance for increasing interest in a game is provided in the game machine having various game performances.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 62

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine, and can be particularly applied to a pachinko gaming machine or the like.

In a conventional gaming machine, a hit / fail judgment is made with a predetermined jackpot probability based on the ball entering the starting port, and the symbol is displayed in a variable manner. There was one that performed a jackpot game that opened the winning opening. In addition, a game effect (reach effect, character effect, etc.) is executed along with the variable display of the symbol, and there is a possibility that the result of the hit / fail judgment may be a big hit depending on the execution mode of the game effect, that is, the symbol is stopped and displayed as a big hit symbol. (For example, Patent Document 1).

In addition, as a jackpot, there were a plurality of jackpots, a jackpot that was relatively advantageous to the player and a jackpot that was relatively disadvantageous. Further, as a game effect (reach effect, character effect, etc.), a plurality of game effects having different execution modes are provided, and the jackpot reliability differs depending on the game effect to be executed. As a result, the player's game interest is enhanced when the game production with high jackpot reliability is executed, and the game interest is further enhanced when the jackpot is advantageous.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 10-57583

In a gaming machine as described above, when a game production with high jackpot reliability is executed, the game interest is enhanced, while when the jackpot is relatively disadvantageous to the player as a result of the game production, the game is played. There was a risk that the interest would decline.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and provides a gaming machine capable of executing a gaming effect that enhances the entertainment of the gaming.

The gaming machine of the first invention for solving the above-mentioned problems is
A symbol display means that displays a plurality of symbol arrays composed of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and stops and displays the symbols selected from the plurality of symbol arrays in a predetermined stop mode.
It is provided with a privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege when the symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop mode.
A plurality of specific symbols are included as the symbols constituting the symbol arrangement, and the plurality of specific symbols are symbols that show common information and have different display modes.
As the specific stop mode,
A first specific stop mode in which the stop mode is composed of a plurality of the specific symbols and the specific symbols constituting the stop mode are composed of the specific symbols having the same display mode.
A second specification in which the stop mode is composed of a plurality of the specific symbols, and at least one of the specific symbols constituting the stop mode is composed of the specific symbol having a display mode different from the display mode of the other specific symbols. Has a stop mode and
It is characterized in that different benefits are given depending on whether the first specific stop mode displays a stop display or the second specific stop mode displays a stop display.

According to such a gaming machine, a stop mode is configured by a plurality of symbols, and a plurality of symbol arrangements are variably displayed according to the number of symbols constituting the stop mode. Further, a plurality of specific symbols are included in one symbol array, and the plurality of specific symbols display common information, although at least a part of the display mode is different from each other. Further, when the stop mode of the symbol becomes the specific stop mode, a predetermined privilege is given, and the first specific stop mode is composed of the specific symbols having the same display mode as the symbols constituting the stop mode. In the second specific stop mode, at least one of the symbols constituting the stop mode is composed of a specific symbol having a display mode different from the others. Then, different benefits are granted depending on whether the stop mode of the symbol is the first specific stop mode or the second specific stop mode. As a result, if a plurality of specific symbols existing in each symbol array are in the specific stop mode, the privilege is given even if the display mode is different, so that the player feels that the possibility of granting the privilege has increased, and the game Increase the interest.

Further, the gaming machine of the second invention is the gaming machine of the first invention.
Equipped with a game production execution means capable of executing a predetermined game production,
As the game production
A first stop effect indicating whether or not the stop mode is a stop mode that can constitute the first specific stop mode, and
A second stop effect indicating whether or not the stop mode is a stop mode that can constitute the second specific stop mode, and
A continuous stop effect in which the first stop effect and the second stop effect are sequentially executed in a predetermined order while maintaining the stop display of at least one of the specific symbols constituting the stop mode.
It is characterized by having.

According to such a gaming machine, as the game effect, is there a first stop effect indicating whether or not the first specific stop mode can be configured and a stop mode that can configure the second specific stop mode? It has a first stop effect indicating whether or not, and a continuous stop effect in which the first stop effect and the second stop effect are executed in a predetermined order while maintaining at least one specific symbol. As a result, when the continuous stop effect is executed, even when the stop mode that can configure the first specific stop mode (or the second specific stop mode) that can give the privilege is not obtained, the privilege is subsequently given. Since the effect of whether or not the stop mode can form the second specific stop mode (or the first specific stop mode) is executed, it is possible to maintain the expectation for the privilege grant for a long period of time. ..

Further, the gaming machine of the third invention is the gaming machine of the second invention.
The continuous stop effect is characterized in that, of the first stop effect and the second stop effect, the stop effect executed first does not have a specific stop mode, and the next stop effect is executed. be.

According to such a gaming machine, the continuous stop effect is the stop effect (first stop effect or second stop effect) of the first stop effect and the second stop effect that are executed in order, whichever is executed first. ) Does not result in the specific stop mode (first specific stop mode or second specific stop mode), and the next stop effect (second stop effect or first stop effect) is executed. As a result, when the continuous stop effect is executed, there are a plurality of opportunities for the specific stop mode to be obtained, so that the player can maintain the expectation for the privilege grant for a long period of time.

Further, the gaming machine of the fourth invention is the gaming machine of the second invention or the third invention.
Equipped with a pass / fail judgment means that executes a pass / fail judgment based on the establishment of a predetermined condition,
The game effect includes a first game effect and a second game effect that suggests a higher possibility than the first game effect as a possibility that the result of the hit / fail determination will be a hit.
It has a second specific symbol that is not included in the symbol array,
It is characterized in that the specific symbol is changed to the second specific symbol at a predetermined timing after the start of the variation display of the symbol, and the second game effect is executed.

According to such a gaming machine, the gaming effects include a first gaming effect and a second gaming effect that suggests a higher hit possibility than the first gaming effect. Then, at a predetermined timing during the variable display, the specific symbol included in the symbol array is changed to the second specific symbol not included in the symbol array, and the second game effect is executed. As a result, it is possible to increase the possibility of hitting when the specific symbol is changed to the second specific symbol, and to enhance the interest of the game. Further, since a plurality of specific symbols that can be changed to the second specific symbol are included in the symbol arrangement, the expectation that the second game effect is executed is raised, and the game interest is enhanced.

Further, the gaming machine of the fifth invention is the gaming machine of the fourth invention.
When the specific symbol is changed to the second specific symbol and the second game effect is executed, and the result of the hit / fail determination is different, the second specific symbol is returned to the specific symbol and the said. It is characterized in that the stop display is performed in an out-of-stop mode including a specific symbol.

According to such a gaming machine, when the specific symbol is changed to the second specific symbol and the second game effect is executed, and the hit / fail determination result is incorrect, after the second game effect is executed. , The second specific symbol is returned to the specific symbol, and the stop display is performed in the detached stop mode including the specific symbol. As a result, the player can surely recognize which specific symbol becomes the second specific symbol and the second game effect is executed. Further, this makes it possible to re-recognize that the specific symbol is an opportunity to execute the second game effect, and to raise the expectation for the specific symbol.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that executes a game effect that enhances the interest of the game.

It is a front view of the gaming machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a back view of the gaming machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board of the Example of this invention. It is an enlarged view of the main display shown in FIG. 3, and is the figure which shows the display which the game machine includes. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the game machine. It is a table showing the correspondence between the type of winning and the opening pattern of the big winning opening. It is a table which shows various random numbers acquired by the game control microcomputer. (A) is a jackpot judgment table, (B) is a jackpot type judgment table, (C) is a reach judgment table, (D) is a normal symbol hit judgment table, and (E) is a normal symbol variation. It is a pattern selection table. It is a fluctuation pattern table. It is a flowchart of a main control main process. It is a flowchart of interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of a start port sensor detection process. It is a flowchart of a normal figure operation process. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol hit / miss judgment process. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol random number shift process. It is a flowchart of a process during a normal symbol change. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol determination process. It is a flowchart of ordinary electric accessory processing. It is a flowchart of a special figure operation process. It is a flowchart of a special symbol standby process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart of a pass / fail determination process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart of a variation pattern selection process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart of a variation pattern selection process. Special Figure 2 It is a flowchart of a random number shift process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart of a pass / fail determination process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart of a variation pattern selection process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart of a variation pattern selection process. Special Figure 1 It is a flowchart of a random number shift process. It is a flowchart of the process during special symbol change. It is a flowchart of a special symbol determination process. It is a flowchart of special electric accessory processing 1 (big hit game). It is a flowchart of a game state setting process. It is a flowchart of special electric accessory processing 2 (small hit game). It is a flowchart of a specific area sensor detection process. It is a flowchart of the reserved ball number processing. It is a flowchart of power-off monitoring processing. It is a flowchart of a sub-control main process. It is a flowchart of reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of 2ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of 10ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of the received command analysis process. It is a flowchart of the received command analysis process. It is a flowchart of the production start processing at the time of entering a ball. It is a flowchart of the variation effect start processing. It is a flowchart of the setting process such as a notice effect. It is a flowchart of the setting process such as a notice effect. It is a flowchart of execution processing such as a rehearsal effect. It is a flowchart of the variation production end processing. It is a flowchart of a special game production selection process. It is a flowchart of an ending effect selection process. It is a table which shows the notice decision table for a low load state. It is a table which shows the notice decision table for a high load state. It is a flowchart of the setting process such as the advance notice effect of Example 2. It is a flowchart of the setting process such as the advance notice effect of Example 2. It is a table which shows the advance notice determination table for the high load state of the gaming machine which concerns on Example 2. It is a flowchart of the special game effect selection process of Example 3. It is a flowchart of the ending effect selection process of Example 3. It is a flowchart of the variation effect start processing of Example 4. It is a table which shows the advance notice determination table for the high load state of another aspect 1. It is a table which shows the advance notice determination table for the high load state of another aspect 2. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement of the effect symbol of Example 5. It is a figure which shows an example of the change mode of the symbol arrangement of the effect symbol of Example 5. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution mode of the game effect of Example 5. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution mode of the game effect of Example 5. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution mode of the game effect of Example 5. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution mode of the game effect of Example 5. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution mode of the game effect of Example 5. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution mode of the game effect of Example 5. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution mode of the game effect of Example 5. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution mode of the game effect of Example 5. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution mode of the game effect of Example 5. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution mode of the game effect of Example 5. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution mode of the game effect of Example 5. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution mode of the game effect of Example 5. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution mode of the game effect of Example 5. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution mode of the game effect of Example 5. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution mode of the game effect of Example 5. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution mode of the game effect of Example 5. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution mode of the game effect of Example 5. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution mode of the game effect of Example 5. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution mode of the game effect of Example 5. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution mode of the game effect of Example 5.

Next, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to examples. In the following, when the winning symbol is stopped and displayed with the end of the variable display of the symbol, the pachinko gaming machine capable of executing the winning game capable of giving a predetermined amount of game profit (for example, a prize ball) to the player. , An example to which the present invention is applied will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment includes a gaming machine frame 50 and a gaming board 2 mounted in the gaming machine frame 50, and the gaming board 2 is a game. It is detachably configured from the machine frame 50. FIG. 3 shows a state in which the game board 2 is removed from the game machine frame 50. The game machine frame 50 includes a front frame 51 having a decorative surface, a main body frame 52 for attaching a game board 2 and the like, and an outer frame 53 for attaching the pachinko game machine 1 to the island equipment of the hall. The front frame 51, the main body frame 52, and the outer frame 53 are pivotally supported on one side end side and are configured to be openable and closable, respectively.

Further, the front frame 51 can supply a launch handle 60 for launching a game ball with a firing intensity according to a player's operation amount (rotation angle), and a game ball that stores and stores the game ball to the launcher side. A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) 61 and a surplus ball saucer (lower plate) 62 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hit ball supply plate 61 are provided. Further, the front frame 51 includes a first effect button 63a and a second effect button 63b (collectively, these two effect buttons) that can be operated by the player during execution of a game effect that is executed as the game progresses. (It is also simply referred to as "directing button 63"). As for the plurality of effect buttons, the effect buttons to be used can be used properly according to the type of game effect. Further, the front frame 51 is provided with a decorative frame lamp 66 and a speaker 67. The configuration of the effect button 63 is not limited to the embodiment of the first embodiment, and any input detecting means (for example,) that can detect the input from the player or that the player directly contacts the button portion to input the effect button 63. , Appearance type, touch sensor type, etc.), or non-contact type input detection means (photoelectric type, etc.) that detects that a part of the player's body is in close proximity and inputs. good.

The game board 2 is formed with a game area 3 in which a game ball launched by the operation of the launch handle 60 flows down, surrounded by a rail member 4. Further, the game board 2 is provided with a board surface lamp 5 for decoration. A plurality of game nails 16 for guiding a game ball are projected in the game area 3. Further, a ball return prevention piece 6 is provided at the tip of the rail member 4, and it is possible to prevent the game ball once guided to the game area from returning to the launching device side. An image display device 7 composed of a liquid crystal display device is provided near the center of the game area 3. The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is provided with an effect symbol display area 7b (also referred to as an “effect symbol display unit”) on which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R (also simply referred to as “effect symbol 8”) are displayed. The effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, which will be described later. The effect symbol display area 7b is composed of, for example, three symbol display areas of "left", "middle", and "right". The left effect symbol 8L is displayed in the left symbol display area, and the middle effect is displayed in the middle symbol display area. The symbol 8C is displayed, and the right effect symbol 8R is displayed in the symbol display area on the right.

Further, each of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is composed of a plurality of symbols (identification information) representing numbers from "1" to "9", for example. The left, middle, and right effect symbols that are stopped and displayed in the effect symbol display area 7b are displayed on the first special symbol display 41a (also referred to as "first special symbol display unit") described later (see FIG. 4). The result of the variation display of the first special symbol and the result of the variation display of the second special symbol displayed on the second special symbol display 41b (also referred to as the "second special symbol display unit") (that is, the determination of whether or not the special symbol is correct). (Simply referred to as "win / fail judgment") is displayed so that the player can easily recognize it. It should be noted that any of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the effect symbol may be simply referred to as "design", "identification information", or "identification symbol". For example, when the result of the special symbol hit / fail determination is a big hit, it is possible to stop and display the effect symbol with the same three-digit doublet (also referred to as “hit effect symbol”) such as “777”.

In addition, in the case of a small hit, it is possible to stop and display the production symbol with a preset chance symbol such as "135" or a special symbol such as "3 ★ 3" (also referred to as a "small hit production symbol"). Is. In addition, in the case of deviation, at least one of the three symbols such as "637" and "373" may be stopped and displayed with a different pattern (also referred to as "off effect symbol"). It is possible. As a result, the player can easily grasp the progress of the game by looking at the stopped display of the effect symbol. That is, in general, the player does not directly grasp the result of the special symbol winning / failing determination by looking at the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 41a or the second special symbol display 41b, but rather directs the result. The effect symbol displayed in the symbol display area 7b is observed and grasped. It is not necessary to separately provide the positions of the left, middle, and right symbol display areas, and the left, middle, and right effect symbol display areas may be used as the entire symbol display area (effect symbol display area 7b). .. Further, as a mode of variable display of the effect symbol, for example, there is a mode of scrolling display in the up / down, left / right, diagonal directions, and the like. In addition, a control unit that controls the variable display of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, or the effect symbol, and a display unit that displays the first special symbol, the second special symbol, or the effect symbol are referred to as an "identification information display unit". Also called.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, in addition to displaying a game effect using the above-mentioned effect symbol (effect symbol game effect), a hit game effect executed in association with the hit game, and a waiting for customers Demonstration effects etc. are displayed. In addition, in the production pattern game production, the winning game production, and the demonstration production, in addition to the production symbols such as numbers, the production images other than the production symbols such as the background image and the character image are also displayed. Further, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a first effect hold display area 9c (first effect hold display unit) for displaying the first effect hold 9a according to the number of storages of the first special figure hold, which will be described later, is displayed. There is a second effect hold display area 9d (second effect hold display unit) that displays the second effect hold 9b according to the number of storages of the second special figure hold, which will be described later. Depending on the display mode (number of displays) of the first effect hold or the second effect hold, the number of stored first special figure hold and the second feature displayed on the first special figure hold indicator 43a (see FIG. 4) described later. The number of memories of the second special figure hold displayed on the figure hold indicator 43b can be shown to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

A center decorative body 10 is provided near the center of the game area 3 and in front of the image display device 7 so as to surround the effect symbol display area 7b. At the lower part of the center decorative body 10, a stage portion 11 having a game ball rolling surface on which the game ball can roll is provided. A hollow warp portion 12 is provided on the left portion of the center decoration body 10. The warp portion 12 is provided with a warp inlet and a warp outlet, receives a game ball flowing down the game area 3 from the warp inlet, discharges the game ball from the warp outlet, and guides the game ball to the stage portion 11. The game ball guided to the rolling surface of the stage portion 11 has a higher possibility than the game ball not guided to the stage portion 11, and can enter the first starting port 20 described later. Further, above the center decorative body 10, an illuminated member (board lamp 5) such as an LED is provided and can be turned on according to the game state, and a decorative member 13 in the shape of characters, figures, or the like is arranged. There is.

Further, a movable decorative member 14 that is above the center decorative body 10 and behind the decorative member 13 is provided so as to be able to move along with the game effect. In FIG. 3, only a part of the movable decorative member 14 is visible, but for example, the movable decorative member falls downward with the execution of the game effect having a relatively high possibility of hitting, and the movable decoration The member covers the front surface of the display screen 7a, and most of the member becomes visible. As a result, the player will have a higher expectation for hitting. Below the image display device 7 in the game area 3, a fixed winning device 19 provided with a non-variable first starting port 20 in which the ease of entering the game ball does not change is provided. Based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, a random number for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct is acquired, and when a predetermined predetermined condition is satisfied, the determination of whether or not the first special symbol is correct (first special symbol is correct or not). Judgment) is executed, and the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and is stopped and displayed based on the result of the hit / fail judgment.

Below the first starting port 20, a variable winning device 22 (also referred to as a “variable starting port”) including a variable second starting port 21 that changes the ease of entering the game ball is provided. .. Based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, a random number for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not is acquired, and when a predetermined predetermined condition is satisfied, the accuracy of the second special symbol is determined (the second special symbol is determined to be correct or not). ) Is executed, the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and is stopped and displayed based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. The variable winning device 22 includes a movable member 23, and opens and closes the second starting port 21 by the operation of the movable member 23. By this opening / closing operation, the second starting port 21 can be changed from the first mode (closed state) to the second mode (open state) in which the possibility of entering the game ball is higher than that of the first mode. be. The movable member 23 is driven by the second starting port solenoid 24 (see FIG. 5). In the first embodiment, the second starting port 21 is capable of entering the game ball only when the movable member 23 is in the open state, and is unable to enter the game ball when the movable member 23 is in the closed state. There is. The second starting port 21 is perfect when the movable member 23 is in the closed state, as long as the game ball is more difficult to enter when the movable member 23 is in the closed state than when the game ball is in the open state. It does not have to be the one that makes it impossible to enter the ball.

On the right side of the first start opening 20 in the game area 3, a first big winning device 31 (also referred to as a “first variable ball entrance”) provided with a first big winning opening 30 is provided. The first prize-winning device 31 includes an opening / closing member 32, and opens and closes the first prize-winning opening 30 by the operation of the opening / closing member 32. The opening / closing member 32 is driven by the first large winning opening solenoid 33 (see FIG. 5). The first large winning opening 30 allows a game ball to enter only when the opening / closing member 32 is in the open state. That is, the first variable entry port 31 is in a state in which the game ball cannot enter (closed state) and a state in which the game ball can enter (open state) due to the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 32. It can be changed to.

Further, in the game area 3, above the first large winning opening 30, and at the lower right of the center decoration 10, the second large winning device 36 provided with the second large winning opening 35 (“the second variable entry opening”). ") Is provided. The second special winning device 36 includes an opening / closing member (blade member) 37, and opens and closes the second special winning opening 35 by the operation of the opening / closing member 37. The opening / closing member 37 is driven by the second large winning opening solenoid 38 (see FIG. 5). The second large winning opening 35 allows a game ball to enter only when the opening / closing member 37 is in the open state.

That is, the second variable entry port 36 is in a state in which the game ball cannot enter (closed state) and a state in which the game ball can enter (open state) due to the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 37. It can be changed to. The second special winning device 36 is formed with a specific area 39 through which a game ball that has entered the second big winning opening 35 can pass. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the high probability state described later is generated based on the detection that the gaming ball that has entered the second major winning opening 35 has passed through the specific area 39. That is, the specific area 39 is a probability variation operation port. Such a specific area 39 is not provided in the first large winning device 31.

A gate 28 (game ball passage port) through which the game ball can pass is provided in the right side area of the center decoration body 10 in the game area 3. Based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28, a random number for determining whether or not the normal symbol is correct is acquired, and when a predetermined predetermined condition is satisfied, it is normally determined whether or not to open the second starting port 21. As the symbol winning / failing determination is executed, the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and is stopped and displayed based on the result of the normal symbol winning / failing determination. When the hit normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the second starting port 21 is opened. Further, a plurality of general entrances 27 are provided in the lower part of the game area 3.

The game area 3 in which various entrances and the like are arranged is divided into a left game area (first game area) 3A on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and a right game area (second game area) 3B on the right side. Can be divided into. The method of launching the game ball so that the game ball flows down in the left game area 3A is called left-handed, and the method of launching the game ball so that the game ball flows down in the right game area 3B is called right-handed. .. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the game is started, a left-handed hit is aimed at entering the first starting port 20. On the other hand, when the game state changes due to a hit in the hit / fail judgment based on the entry into the first start opening 20, the gate 28, the second start opening 21, the first big winning opening 30, and the second start opening 20 are hit right. The aim is to enter the large winning opening 35. Then, when a game ball enters the first start opening, the second start opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening, and the general entry opening, each entry opening is predetermined. A number of game balls (also called "prize balls") are paid out.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, a main display 40 is arranged at the lower right of the game board 2. On the main display 40, the first special symbol display 41a (first special symbol display unit) for variable display and stop display of the first special symbol, and the second special symbol display for variable display and stop display of the second special symbol are displayed. A device 41b (second special symbol display unit) and a normal symbol display 42 (ordinary symbol display unit) that displays a variable display and a stop display of a normal symbol are included. Further, the main display 40 includes a first special symbol hold indicator 43a for displaying the number of stored numbers of the hit / fail determination information (first special symbol hold) related to the first special symbol, and a hit / fail determination information (first) related to the second special symbol. Includes a second special figure hold indicator 43b that displays the number of stored items of 2 special figure hold), and a normal figure hold indicator 44 that displays the number of stored operation hold (normal figure hold) of the normal symbol display 42. ing.

Further, the main display 40 has a hit indicator 48 indicating that the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment or the second special symbol hit / fail judgment has been hit, and the first special symbol hit / miss judgment or the second special symbol hit / miss judgment. When the result is a hit, the round indicator 45 that shows the number of rounds of the winning game to be executed, the game state indicator 46 that shows that the probability fluctuation function is activated, and the launch direction of the game ball, that is, right-handed A launch direction indicator 47 is included to indicate whether the state should be left-handed or should be left-handed. The various indicators included in the main indicator 40 are displayed and controlled by the main control unit described later.

The variation display of the first special symbol is performed when the game ball enters the first starting port 20. The variation display of the second special symbol is performed when the game ball enters the second starting port 21. In the following description, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol. Further, the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b may be collectively referred to as a special symbol display unit 41. Further, the first special figure holding display 43a and the second special figure holding display 43b may be collectively referred to as a special figure holding display unit 43.

In the special symbol display unit 41, the special symbol (identification information) is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined time, then stopped and displayed, and the ball enters the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 by the stopped displayed special symbol (stop symbol). The result of the lottery based on (special symbol winning / failing judgment, big hit lottery) is notified. The special symbol that is stopped and displayed is one special symbol selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by the judgment of whether or not the special symbol is correct. When the stop symbol is a predetermined special special symbol (specific identification information) (that is, when it is a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol), the open pattern corresponding to the type of the specific special symbol displayed as stopped is used. A special game (big hit game, small hit game) that opens the 1st big winning opening 30 or the 2nd big winning opening 35 is performed. The opening pattern of the large winning openings (first large winning opening 30 and second large winning opening 35) in the special game will be described later.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the first special symbol display 41a is composed of eight LEDs indicated by "ip", and a special symbol corresponding to the result of the first special symbol hit / fail determination is displayed. indicate. For example, when the result of the first special symbol winning / failing determination is the first big hit (15R big hit), the three LEDs of "ijn" are turned on and the rest are turned off. When the second big hit (2R big hit) is reached, the four LEDs of "jnkl" are turned on and the rest are turned off. When a small hit occurs, the four "mnop" LEDs are turned on and the rest are turned off. In addition, when it comes off, the two LEDs of "lo" can be turned on and the rest can be turned off. Further, the second special symbol display 41b is composed of eight LEDs indicated by "a to h", and displays a special symbol according to the result of the second special symbol hit / miss determination. Similar to the first special symbol display 41b, the stop display mode is defined as a different display mode depending on the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination. Further, before the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed over a predetermined fluctuation time, and the mode of the fluctuation display is, for example, the light repeatedly flows from left to right in a predetermined order. Each LED can be turned on as described above.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when a game ball enters the first start port 20 or the second start port 21, various information (“acquisition information”” such as a random number for determining whether or not a special symbol is correct is based on the entry of the game ball. The acquired information (also referred to as) is acquired, and the acquired various information is temporarily stored in the special figure holding storage unit 85 formed in the RAM of the main control unit. Specifically, if the ball enters the first start port 20, it is stored in the first special figure hold storage unit 85a as the first special figure hold, and if the ball enters the second start port 21, the second special figure is reserved. It is stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b as a hold. An upper limit is set for the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage unit 85, and the upper limit value in the first embodiment is four each. The first special figure reservation storage unit 85a and the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b are also referred to as "first acquisition information storage means" and "second acquisition information storage means", respectively, and are also generally referred to as "acquisition information storage means". ..

The special figure hold stored in the special figure hold storage unit 85 is digested when the variable display of the special symbol based on the special figure hold becomes possible. The digestion of the special symbol hold means to determine the random number for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not corresponding to the special symbol hold, and to execute the variable display of the special symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variation display of the special symbol based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 cannot be immediately executed at the time of the entry, that is, the variation of the special symbol. Even when the display is being executed or the special game is being executed, the right to determine whether or not the special symbol is correct for the incoming ball can be reserved up to a predetermined number.

The number of such special figure hold indicators is displayed on the first special figure hold indicator 43a and the second special figure hold indicator 43b. Specifically, the first special figure holding indicator 43a is composed of two LEDs of "uv", and by controlling the display of the LEDs according to the number of the first special figure holding, the first special figure is held. It displays the number of holds. For example, when the number of holds is 0, both LEDs are turned off, such as "u □ v □" (for example, □: off, ●: red, ▲: green), and the number of holds is 1. In the case of, the display mode can be such that the LED of u is turned off and the LED of v is turned on in red, such as “u □ v ●”. Further, when the number of holds is 2, the display mode can be such that the LED of u is turned on in red and the LED of v is turned off, such as “u ● v □”. Further, when the number of holds is 3, the display mode can be such that both LEDs are lit in red, such as "u ● v ●".

Further, when the number of holdings is 4 (upper limit number), both LEDs can be turned on in green as in "u ▲ v ▲" to set the display mode. Further, the second special figure hold indicator 43b is composed of two LEDs of "wx", and by controlling the display of the LEDs according to the number of the second special figure hold, the second special figure hold is held. It displays a number. For example, when the number of holds is 0, the display mode is such that both LEDs are turned off, such as "w □ x □" (for example, □: off, ●: red on, ▲: green on), and the number of holds 1 to 1. No. 4 is also defined in the same manner as the first special figure holding indicator 43a.

The variable display of the normal symbol is performed when the game ball passes through the gate 28. In the normal symbol display 42, after displaying the normal symbol fluctuatingly for a predetermined time, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, and the result of the normal symbol hit / fail determination based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 is determined by the stopped display normal symbol (stop symbol). Notify. The normal symbol that is stopped and displayed is one normal symbol selected from a plurality of types of normal symbols by the judgment of whether or not the normal symbol is correct. When the stop-displayed normal symbol is a predetermined specific normal symbol (hit normal symbol), an auxiliary game is performed in which the second starting port 21 is opened in an opening pattern according to the current game state. The opening pattern of the second starting port 21 will be described later.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the normal symbol display 42 is composed of two LEDs of "st", and displays a normal symbol according to the result of the normal symbol hit / fail judgment depending on the lighting mode. Is. For example, when the determination result is a hit, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed when both LEDs are lit, such as "s ■ t ■" (for example, ■: lit, □: turned off). If the determination result is out of order, an out-of-order normal symbol in a mode in which only the t LED is lit, such as "s □ t ■", is displayed. It should be noted that the off-normal symbol is not a specific ordinary symbol. Before the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is executed for a predetermined fluctuation time, and the fluctuation display mode is, for example, a mode in which both LEDs are alternately turned on and off. be.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when a game ball passes through the gate 28, various information (also referred to as “acquired information”) such as a random number for determining whether or not a normal symbol is correct is acquired based on the passage, and various acquired information is acquired. Is temporarily stored as a normal figure hold in the normal figure hold storage unit 86 formed in the RAM of the main control unit. An upper limit is set for the number of normal figure reservations that can be stored in the normal figure reservation storage unit 86, and the upper limit value in the first embodiment is four.

The normal figure hold stored in the normal figure hold storage unit 86 is digested when the variable display of the normal symbol based on the normal figure hold becomes possible. The digestion of the normal symbol hold means to determine the random number for determining whether the normal symbol is correct or not corresponding to the normal symbol hold, and to execute the variable display of the ordinary symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variation display of the normal symbol based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 cannot be executed immediately at the time of the passage, that is, when the variation display of the normal symbol is being executed or the auxiliary game is being executed. Even so, it is possible to reserve the right to judge whether or not a normal symbol is correct for the passage of a predetermined number up to a predetermined number.

Then, the number of such a normal figure hold is displayed on the normal figure hold indicator 44. Specifically, the normal figure hold indicator 44 is composed of two LEDs of "qr", and displays the number of normal figure hold by turning on the LEDs according to the number of normal figure hold. be. For example, when the number of holds is 0, the display mode is such that both LEDs are turned off, such as "q □ r □" (for example, □: turn off, ●: turn on red, ▲: turn on green), and the number of holds is 1. In the case of, the display mode can be such that the LED of q is turned off and the LED of r is turned on in red, such as “q □ r ●”. Further, the number of hold numbers 2 to 4 is also defined in the same manner as in the first special figure hold indicator 43a.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 5. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment is a main control board 80 (also referred to as a “main control unit”, which is also referred to as a “game control unit”) that controls game profits such as a special symbol winning / failing determination, a normal symbol winning / failing determination, and a transition of a game state. ”), Sub-control board 90 (also referred to as“ sub-control unit ”and also referred to as“ effect control unit ”) that controls the effect to be executed as the game progresses, and payout control that controls the payout of the game ball. Board 110 (also referred to as "payout control unit"), effect symbol 8 displayed on the image display device 7, symbol displayed on the effect display 102, effect 1 special figure hold indicator 103a, and effect 2 special figure. It includes an image control board 100 (image control unit) and the like that control the display of the hold display 103b and the like.

Further, as shown in FIG. 2, a main control board storage case for storing the main control board 80 is provided in a substantially central portion on the rear surface side (back surface side) of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and above the main control board case. Is provided with a storage case for an image control board or the like that houses the voice control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the image control board 100, and the sub control board that houses the sub control board 90 is stored on the storage case for the image control board or the like. A case is provided. Further, a payout control board case for accommodating the payout control board is provided on the lower left side of the main control board case, and a power supply board case for accommodating the power supply board 109 is provided on the right side thereof.

On the main control board 80, a game control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter, “game control microcomputer”) 81 that controls the progress of the game of the pachinko game machine 1 according to a program is mounted. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a ROM that stores a program for controlling the progress of the game, a RAM that is used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes a program stored in the ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits / receives data (information) to / from another board or the like via the input / output circuit 87 (I / O port unit). The input / output circuit 87 may be built in the game control microcomputer 81. Further, the ROM may be externally attached. The RAM of the game control microcomputer 81 is provided with the above-described special figure holding storage unit 85 (first special figure holding storage unit 85a and second special figure holding storage unit 85b) and the normal drawing holding storage unit 86. ..

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via the relay board 88. Therefore, a signal is input to the main control board 80 from each sensor, and a signal is output to each solenoid from the main control board 80. Specifically, the sensors include a first starting port sensor 20a, a second starting port sensor 21a, a gate sensor 28a, a first winning opening sensor 30a, a second winning opening sensor 35a, a specific area sensor 39a, and general sensors. The entry sensor 27a is connected. These various sensors are also referred to as "detection means".

The first start port sensor 20a is provided in the first start port 20 and detects a game ball that has entered the first start port 20. The second starting port sensor 21a is provided in the second starting port 21 and detects a game ball that has entered the second starting port 21. The gate sensor 28a is provided in the gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28. The first large winning opening sensor 30a is provided in the first large winning opening 30 and detects a game ball that has entered the first large winning opening 30. The second large winning opening sensor 35a is provided in the second large winning opening 35 and detects a game ball that has entered the second large winning opening 35. The specific area sensor 39a is provided in the specific area 39 in the second large winning opening 35, and detects a game ball that has passed through the specific area 39. The general ball entry sensor 27a is provided in each general ball entry port 27 and detects a game ball that has entered the general ball entry port 27.

Further, as the solenoids, the second starting port solenoid 24, the first winning opening solenoid 33, and the second winning opening solenoid 38 are connected. The second starting port solenoid 24 is for driving the movable member 23 of the variable winning device 22. The first prize-winning port solenoid 33 is for driving the opening / closing member 32 of the first prize-winning device 31. The second prize-winning port solenoid 38 is for driving the opening / closing member 37 of the second prize-winning device 36.

Further, the main control board 80 includes a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special symbol hold indicator 43a, a second special symbol hold indicator 43b, and a normal diagram. A hold indicator 44, a round indicator 45, a game status indicator 46, a launch direction indicator 47, and a hit indicator 48 are connected. That is, the display control of these main indicators 40 is performed by the game control microcomputer 81.

Further, the main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives a signal from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring. The payout control board 110 is stored in a payout device 120 for paying out prize balls and rental balls, and a card unit 135 (a prepaid card (game value storage medium) installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 and inserted). (A device that enables ball lending based on the information provided) is connected, and the launch device 112 is connected via a launch control board 111 (also referred to as a “launch control unit”). The launcher 112 includes a launch handle 60 (see FIG. 1).

The payout control board 110 is mounted with a payout control one-chip microcomputer 116 (also referred to as a “payout control microcomputer”) that controls payout of game balls of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program. The payout control microcomputer 116 includes a ROM that stores a program for controlling the payout of game balls, a RAM that is used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes a program stored in the ROM. The payout control microcomputer 116 uses the payout motor 121 of the payout device 120 based on the signal from the game control microcomputer 81 and the signal from the card unit 135 connected to the pachinko gaming machine 1 via the input / output circuit 117. Drive to pay out prize balls and pay out rental balls. The game balls to be paid out are detected by the payout sensors 122 and 123 for counting. When the player operates the handle 60 of the launch device 112 (see FIG. 1), the touch switch 114 detects the player's contact with the launch handle 60, and the launch volume 115 rotates the launch handle 60. Detect the amount. Then, the launch motor 113 is driven and controlled so that the game ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the launch volume 115.

Further, the main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90 is a unidirectional communication connection capable of only transmitting a signal from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90. That is, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) (not shown) as a communication direction regulating means is interposed between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90.

Further, as shown in FIG. 5, a one-chip microcomputer 91 for effect control (“microcomputer for effect control”) that controls the effect of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the sub control board 90. The effect control microcomputer 91 includes a ROM that stores a program for controlling the game effect as the game progresses, a RAM that is used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes a program stored in the ROM. There is. The effect control microcomputer 91 transmits / receives data to / from another board or the like via the input / output circuit 95. The input / output circuit 95 may be built in the effect control microcomputer 91. Further, the ROM may be externally attached.

An image control board 100, a voice control board 106, and a lamp control board 107 are connected to the sub control board 90. The effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub control board 90 displays an image on the CPU of the image control one-chip microcomputer 101 (“image control microcomputer”) of the image control board 100 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The display control of the device 7, the effect display 102, the effect 1 special figure hold display 103a, and the effect 2 hold display 103b is performed. The RAM of the image control board 100 is a memory for developing image data. The ROM of the image control board 100 contains still image data and moving image data displayed on the image display device 7, specifically, characters, items, figures, characters, numbers, symbols, etc. (including effect symbols, hold symbols, etc.). And image data such as background images are stored. The CPU of the image control board 100 reads image data from the ROM based on a command from the effect control microcomputer 91. Then, the display control is executed based on the read image data.

The effect display 102 is composed of two LEDs, performs variable display and stop display in accordance with the variable display and stop display of the effect symbol 8, and turns on / off the two LEDs or combines colors to produce the effect symbol. Stop display is performed in a display mode showing the display result of 8 (result of the special symbol winning / failing determination). Further, the effect 1 special figure hold indicator 103a and the effect 2 hold indicator 103b are also composed of two LEDs in the same manner. Then, by turning on / off the two LEDs or combining colors, the effect 1st special figure hold indicator 103a is displayed on the 1st effect hold display area 9c by the number of holds and the 1st special figure hold indicator 43a. The display is controlled in a display mode showing the same number of holds as the number of holds to be displayed. Further, the effect second special figure hold indicator 103b is displayed in a display mode showing the same number of holds as the number of holds displayed in the second effect hold display area 9d and the number of holds displayed by the second special figure hold indicator 43b. Be controlled. In this method, the character symbol is displayed on substantially the entire display screen 7a (effect symbol display unit), or the movable decorative member 14 is operated to display the character symbol on substantially the entire effect symbol display area 7b (effect symbol display unit) on the display screen 7a. By covering the effect symbol, the first effect hold display unit, or a part or all of the second effect hold display unit may not be visible, such a display is provided. .. A VDP (Video Display Processor) may be provided in place of or in addition to the image control one-chip microcomputer 101 of the image control board 100.

Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 outputs voice, music, sound effects, and the like from the speaker 67 via the voice control board 106 based on the command received from the main control board 80. Acoustic data such as audio output from the speaker 67 is stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90. A CPU may be mounted on the voice control board 106, and in that case, the CPU may execute voice control. Further, in this case, the ROM may be mounted on the voice control board 106, or the acoustic data may be stored in the ROM. Further, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100, and the CPU of the image control board 100 may execute voice control. Further, in this case, the acoustic data may be stored in the ROM of the image control board 100.

Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines the light emission pattern data (data for determining lighting / extinguishing, light emitting color, etc.) of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The lamp data) is determined from the data stored in the ROM, and the lighting of the lamps (LEDs) such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 is controlled via the lamp control board 107.

Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 operates the movable decorative member 14 connected to the lamp control board 107 via the relay board 108 based on the command received from the main control board 80. Although only a part of the movable decorative member 14 is visible in FIG. 1, it is a movable so-called gimmick provided in the center decorative body 10. The effect control microcomputer 91 determines operation pattern data (also referred to as “drive data”) for operating the movable decorative member 14 in a predetermined operation mode from the data stored in the ROM of the sub control board 90. The operation of the movable decorative member 14 is controlled based on the determined operation pattern data. A CPU may be mounted on the lamp control board 107, and in that case, the CPU may execute lamp lighting control and operation control of the movable decorative member 14. Further, in this case, the ROM may be mounted on the lamp control board 107, and the data related to the light emission pattern and the operation pattern may be stored in the ROM.

Further, on the sub-control board 90, the first effect button detection switch 63c and the second effect button detection switch 63c for detecting that the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b (see FIG. 1) is operated (pushed, rotated, pulled, etc.) are performed. The effect button detection switch 63d is connected. Therefore, when the player performs a predetermined input operation on the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b, a signal is output to the sub-control board 90 such as the corresponding effect button detection switch.

Next, the control related to the hit / fail determination in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment will be described. As a result of the special symbol winning / failing judgment, there are "big hit", "small hit", and "missing". At the time of "big hit", the "big hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display unit 41. Further, in the case of "small hit", the "small hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display unit 41. Further, in the case of "off", the "off symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display unit 41. When it is determined to be a big hit or a small hit, a "special game" is executed in which the first big winning opening 30 or the second big winning opening 35 is opened with an opening pattern according to the type of the special symbol displayed as stopped. .. A special game executed as a big hit is called a "big hit game", and a special game executed as a small hit is called a "small hit game".

There are multiple types of hits. As shown in FIG. 6, the types of hits include "15R (round) first big hit", "15R second big hit", "2R third big hit", and "15R fourth big hit". In "15R 1st jackpot" and "15R 4th jackpot", the number of times (the number of rounds) of opening the big winning opening (1st big winning opening 30 or 2nd big winning opening 35) is 15 times, and the first round In the second round, it is a big hit that opens the second big winning opening 35 in a manner that allows the game ball to pass through the specific area 39 (easily). The round aiming at the passage of the game ball to the specific area 39 can be called a chance round or a challenge round. "15R 2nd big hit" is the first round, which is the above-mentioned chance round, although the number of times (the number of rounds) of opening the big winning opening (1st big winning opening 30 or 2nd big winning opening 35) is 15 times. The opening time of the second round is extremely short (opening and closing for a moment), and it is a big hit that makes it difficult (or even impossible) for the game ball to pass through the specific area 39. That is, it can be said that this "15R second big hit" is a big hit that does not open the second big winning device 36 in a manner in which the game ball can pass through (easily) the specific area 39. In "2R 3rd big hit", the number of times (the number of rounds) of opening the big winning opening (1st big winning opening 30 or 2nd big winning opening 35) is 2 times, and the 1st round and the 2nd round which are chance rounds. This is a big hit that opens the second big winning device 36 in such a manner that the game ball can pass through the specific area 39. However, since the opening time of the second big winning opening 35 is 1.8 seconds even if the first round and the second round are combined, the possibility that the game ball passes through the specific area is lower than that of the 15R first big hit. It has become.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, based on the passage of the game ball to the specific area 39 during the jackpot game, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game is shifted to the high probability state described later. Therefore, when the result of the special symbol hit / fail determination is the above-mentioned 15R 1st jackpot, 2R 3rd jackpot, or 15R 4th jackpot, the possibility of the game ball passing through the specific area is relatively high. Since the second round and the second chance round are executed, the game state after the big hit game can be shifted to the high probability state by passing the game ball to the specific area 39 during the execution of the big hit game. .. On the other hand, in the case of the 15R second big hit, the opening time of each of the first round and the second round chance round is 0.1 second, so the game ball is put into the second big winning opening. Since it is very difficult to make the game ball pass through the specific area 39 during the execution of the jackpot game, the gaming state after the jackpot game is the normal state (low probability state) described later. It is very likely that it will be (it can be said that it will be in a low probability state).

On the other hand, the small hit is a hit that opens the big winning opening (the second big winning opening 35) in the same opening pattern as the 2R third big hit. That is, in the small hit, the second big winning device 36 is opened in such a manner that the game ball can pass through the specific area 39. However, even if the game ball passes through the specific area 39 during the execution of the small hit game, the game state after the execution of the small hit game is not changed from that before the execution of the small hit game. Therefore, if the gaming state before the execution of the small hit game is the normal state (low probability state), the gaming state after the execution of the small hit game is also the normal state. From the player's point of view, the above 2R third big hit and small hit cannot be distinguished from each other even by looking at the opening pattern of the big winning opening (second big winning opening 35). That is, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether the result of the special symbol winning / failing determination is the 2R third big hit or the small hit. Therefore, even if the game ball is passed to the specific area 39 during the special game as the 2R third big hit, it is difficult to recognize whether or not the subsequent game state has shifted to the high probability state. Further, even if the game ball is passed to the specific area 39 during the special game as a small hit, it is difficult to recognize whether the subsequent game state remains in the normal state or shifts to the high probability state. Is. As a result, in the case of a small hit or a 2R third big hit, it is possible to proceed with the game with the expectation that it may be in a high probability state, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game. can. In the case of small hits, the number of times the big winning opening is opened is not called the number of rounds, but simply the number of times it is opened.

More specifically, the opening pattern of the big winning opening when each big hit and small hit in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment is as shown in FIG. That is, when the 15R first jackpot is reached (when the 15R first jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41a), and when the 15R fourth jackpot is reached (on the second special symbol display 41b). (When the 15R 4th big hit symbol is stopped and displayed), the 2nd big winning opening 35 is opened for a maximum of 28 seconds from 1R to 2R, and the 1st big winning opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 28 seconds from 3R to 15R. .. In this case, since the opening time of the second big winning opening 35 in the 1st R and the 2nd R is 28 seconds each, it is easy to pass the game ball to the specific area 39 during the round.

In addition, when the 15R second big hit is reached (when the 15R second big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41a), the second big winning opening 35 is 0.1 at maximum from 1R to 2R. Open for a maximum of 28 seconds from the first big winning opening 30 from 3R to 15R. In this case, the opening time of the second big winning opening 35 in the 1st and 2nd rounds is set to a maximum of 0.1 seconds, which is an extremely short time (opening and closing for a moment), so that the game ball goes to the specific area 39 during the round. It is almost impossible to pass through.

That is, the opening pattern for the 15R second jackpot is different from the opening pattern for the 15R first jackpot in the opening modes of the first round and the second round. That is, in the 15R first big hit, since the second big winning opening 35 opens for 28 seconds in the first and second rounds, the game ball easily enters the second big winning opening 35. Then, the game ball that has entered the second special winning opening 35 will pass through the specific area 39 with high possibility. On the other hand, in the 15R second big hit, the second big winning opening 35 opens only 0.1 seconds in the first and second rounds. Therefore, it is very difficult for the game ball to enter the second large winning opening 35. Therefore, the possibility that the game ball passes through the specific area 39 during the execution of the 15R second jackpot is considerably lower than that of the 15R first jackpot. Further, since the possibility that the game ball passes through the specific area 39 is infinitely close to 0, it may be said that the game ball does not pass through.

Further, as shown in FIG. 6, when the 2R 3rd jackpot is won (when the 2R 3rd jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the 1st special symbol display 41a), the 2nd jackpot 35 from 1R to 2R Is released for up to 0.9 seconds. In this case, since the opening time of the second big winning opening 35 in the 1st and 2nd rounds is 1.8 seconds in total, it is possible to pass the game ball to the specific area 39 during the round. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, one gaming ball is launched in about 0.6 seconds. Therefore, if the opening time of the second large winning opening 35 is 1.8 seconds, it is sufficiently possible to insert the game ball into the second large winning opening 35. In addition, since the total opening time of the 2nd big prize opening is as short as 1.8 seconds in this 2R 3rd big hit, it is not possible to expect as many prize balls (game profit) as other 15R big hits. That is, it is a big hit that can hardly get a prize ball compared to other big hits.

In addition, when it becomes the first small hit (when the first small hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41a) and when it becomes the second small hit (the second special symbol display 41b). When the second small hit symbol is stopped and displayed), the second large winning opening 35 is opened twice for a maximum of 0.9 seconds. That is, the big winning opening is opened in the same opening pattern as the 2R 3rd big hit. Even in this small hit, since the opening time of the second large winning opening 35 is 1.8 seconds in total, it is possible to pass the game ball to the specific area 39. However, as described above, there is no change in the game state before and after the small hit game even if the specific area 39 is passed. In addition, since the total opening time of the big winning opening is as short as 1.8 seconds for this small hit, it is not possible to expect as many prize balls as the 2R third big hit. That is, the small hit has almost no privilege for the player (only the prize ball by entering the ball) in terms of the transition of the game state and the prize ball.
That is, in this embodiment, as the opening pattern of the second winning opening 35, the first opening pattern in which the game ball can pass through the specific area 39 (easy to pass) and (15 first jackpot, 15R fourth jackpot). A second open pattern in which the game ball is difficult to pass through the specific area 39 (impossible to pass) (15R second jackpot), and a second open pattern in which the game ball can pass through the specific area and is less likely to pass than the first open pattern. It can have 3 open patterns and (2R 3rd jackpot). Further, as an opening pattern for small hits, it is assumed that the game ball has a fourth opening pattern that allows the game ball to pass through the specific area 39 but does not give a privilege (does not generate a high probability state) even if the game ball passes through the specific area 39. can do. As another aspect, the fourth opening pattern may be an opening pattern that cannot pass through the specific region 39.

The probability of distribution to each jackpot in the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is 40% for the 15R first jackpot, 50% for the 15R second jackpot, and 10% for the 2R third jackpot. There is. On the other hand, the big hits in the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol (special figure 2) are all 15R fourth big hits. That is, when a big hit is made based on the hit / fail judgment based on the entry into the second starting port 21, which is easy to enter due to the operation of the opening extension function (occurrence of a high base state) described later, the 15R fourth jackpot is always made. It becomes. In this way, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game is played in the second starting port 21 rather than being a big hit in the hit / fail judgment (big hit lottery of the first special symbol) performed when the game ball enters the first starting port 20. It is set so that it is more likely that the player will be advantageous if the ball hits the ball in the winning / failing judgment (the big hit lottery of the second special symbol). That is, the player plays the game in anticipation of entering the second starting port 21. This is particularly remarkable during the operation of the opening extension function in which the frequency of entering the second starting port 21 increases.

Here, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, the determination of whether it is a big hit, a small hit, or a miss is performed based on a "special symbol hit / miss judgment random number (also referred to as" hit / miss judgment information ")", and when it becomes a big hit. The determination of the type of jackpot is performed based on the "random number for determining the jackpot type (also referred to as" random number for determining symbol "and" information for determining symbol ")". As shown in FIG. 7A, the random number for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct takes a value in the range of 0 to 629. The random number for determining the jackpot type takes a value in the range of 0 to 99. The random numbers (acquisition information) acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 include "reach random numbers" in addition to the special symbol hit / fail determination random numbers and the jackpot type determination random numbers. (Also referred to as "reach information") "and" variable pattern random numbers (also referred to as "variable pattern information") ".

The reach random number is a random number that determines whether or not to generate a reach in a game effect (effect symbol game effect) that indicates the result by using the effect symbol when the result of the special symbol hit / miss determination is wrong. Reach means, for example, a state in which two left and right effect symbols 8R and 8L are stopped (temporarily stopped) at the same symbol, and the remaining one medium effect symbol 8C is changing (“7 ↓ 7”). Status). Then, if the changing medium effect symbol 8C stops at the same symbol as the stopped effect symbols 8R and 8L, the three effect symbols stop at the same symbol, which is a hit. The stop (temporary stop) of the effect symbol in this case also includes a display (sway fluctuation) that seems to be slightly shaken in the effect symbol display area 7b. This reach random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 126.

Further, the fluctuation pattern random number is a random number for determining the fluctuation pattern including the fluctuation time. The variation pattern random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 198. Further, the random numbers acquired based on the passage of the gate 28 include the random numbers for determining whether or not the normal symbol is correct as shown in FIG. 7 (B). The random number for determining whether or not the normal symbol is correct is a random number for determining whether or not to perform an auxiliary game for opening the second starting port 21 (ordinary symbol lottery). Ordinary symbol random numbers take a value in the range of 0 to 240.

Next, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 has a plurality of gaming states by a combination in which each of the functions of the probability fluctuation function, the fluctuation time shortening function, and the opening extension function for the special symbol and the normal symbol is in the operating state or the non-operating state. .. For special symbols (1st special symbol and 2nd special symbol), the state in which the probability fluctuation function is operating is called a "high probability state", and the state in which it is not operating is called a "normal state (also called a" low probability state "). ". In the high probability state, the probability of being judged as a big hit in the special symbol winning / failing judgment is higher than in the normal state. That is, in the normal state, the hit / fail judgment is performed using the jackpot judgment table for the normal state, but in the high probability state, the jackpot judgment table for the high probability state in which the value of the special symbol hit / fail judgment random number judged as the jackpot is large is used. It is used to determine whether or not it is correct (see FIG. 8 (A)). That is, when the probability variation function of the special symbol is activated, the probability that the result of the variation display of the special symbol will be a big hit (the stop symbol will be the jackpot symbol) will be higher than when it is not activated.

Further, for the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol), the state in which the fluctuation time shortening function is operating is referred to as a "time saving state", and the state in which the special symbol is not operating is referred to as a "non-time saving state". In the time saving state, the average value of the fluctuation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of the fluctuation display to the confirmation display time) is shorter than the average value of the fluctuation time of the special symbol in the non-time saving state. That is, in the time saving state, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the fluctuation pattern table defined so that the fluctuation pattern having the short fluctuation time is selected more often than in the non-time saving state (see FIG. 9). As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace of digestion of the special figure hold becomes faster, and effective entry into the starting port (entry ball that can be stored as special figure hold) is likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to aim for a big hit under the smooth progress of the game.

The probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function for the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) may be operated at the same time, or only one of them may be operated. Then, the probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function for the normal symbol operate in synchronization with the fluctuation time shortening function for the special symbol. That is, the probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function of the normal symbol operate in the time saving state of the special symbol, and do not operate in the non-time saving state. Therefore, in the time-saving state, the hit probability in the normal symbol winning / failing determination is higher than in the non-time-saving state. That is, the normal symbol hit / fail judgment (judgment of the normal symbol) is performed using the normal symbol hit judgment table in which the value of the normal symbol random number (hit random number) judged to be a hit is larger than the normal symbol hit judgment table used in the non-time saving state. (See FIG. 8 (D)). That is, when the probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol display 42 is activated, the probability that the result of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol will be a hit (the stop symbol will be a normal hit symbol) will be higher than when it is not activated. ..

Also, in the time-saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter than in the non-time-saving state. In the first embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 30 seconds in the non-time saving state, but is 1 second in the time saving state (see FIG. 8 (E)). Further, in the time saving state, the opening time of the second starting port 21 in the auxiliary game is longer than in the non-time saving state. That is, the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 is operating. In addition, in the time saving state, the number of times the second starting port 21 is opened in the auxiliary game is larger than in the non-time saving state. That is, the function of increasing the number of times the variable winning device 22 is opened is operating. Specifically, when the result of the normal symbol winning / failing determination is successful in the non-time saving state, the opening / closing member 37 of the variable winning device 22 performs the opening operation once for 0.2 seconds, and the second starting port is opened during that period. Become. Further, when the result of the normal symbol winning / failing determination is successful in the time saving state, the opening / closing member 37 of the variable winning device 22 is assumed to perform the opening operation for 2.0 seconds three times.

In the situation where the probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function for the normal symbol, and the opening time extending function and the opening number increasing function of the variable winning device 22 are operating, compared with the case where these functions are not operating. Therefore, the second starting port 21 is frequently opened, and the frequency of entering the game ball into the second starting port 21 is increased (also referred to as “high frequency state”). As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of launched balls, becomes high. Therefore, the state in which these functions are operating is referred to as a "high base state", and the state in which these functions are not operating is referred to as a "low base state". In the high base state, you can aim for a big hit without significantly reducing the number of game balls you have.

The high base state (high frequency state) does not have to activate all the above functions. That is, by operating at least one of the probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function for the normal symbol, and the opening time extending function and the opening number increasing function of the variable winning device 22, the function is not activated. However, it is sufficient that the second starting port is easily opened (the frequency of entering the ball is high). Further, the high base state may be controlled independently without being accompanied by the time saving state of the special symbol. A function that generates such a high base state can also be called a "high base generation function".

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, the gaming state after the special game in the case of the 15R first big hit is a high probability state of the special symbol if the specific area 39 is passed during the special game. In addition, the special symbol is in a time-saving state and a high base state (see FIG. 6). This gaming state is particularly referred to as a "high accuracy and high base state". The high-accuracy high-base state ends when the variable display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times, or when the jackpot is executed and the jackpot game is executed.

Further, in the game state after the special game in the case of the 15R second big hit, it is extremely difficult to pass through the specific area 39 during the special game. Moreover, it becomes a high base state (see FIG. 6). This gaming state is particularly referred to as a "low accuracy and high base state". The low-accuracy high-base state ends when a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) of variable display of a special symbol is executed, or when a big hit is won and the big hit game is executed. The possibility is extremely low, but if it passes through the specific area 39, it will be in a “high accuracy and high base state”.

Further, in the normal state (low probability low base state), the game state after the special game when the 2R third big hit is made is the height of the special symbol if the specific area 39 is passed during the special game. It becomes a probabilistic state, a non-time saving state of a special symbol, and a low base state (see FIG. 6). This gaming state is particularly referred to as a "high accuracy and low base state". The high-accuracy-low-base state ends when the variable display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times, or when the jackpot is executed and the jackpot game is executed.

This high-probability low-base state is a state in which the high-probability state is latent, that is, the high-probability state is difficult for the player to recognize. That is, the high probability low base state is a so-called "latent probability change state (also referred to as" probability non-notification state ")". On the other hand, the above-mentioned high-accuracy high-base state is a state in which it is clear to the player that it is a high-probability state. That is, the high-accuracy high-base state is the so-called "probability-changing game state".

Further, in the high base state, the game state after the special game when the 2R third big hit is made is a high probability state of the special symbol and the special symbol if the specific area 39 is passed during the special game. It becomes a time saving state and a high base state (see FIG. 6). That is, the time saving function and the base state of the special symbol are the same as the state before the execution of the special game.

When playing the pachinko gaming machine 1 for the first time, the gaming state after the power is turned on is a normal state of the special symbol, a non-time saving state of the special symbol, and a low base state. This gaming state is particularly referred to as a "low probability low base state".

In a high base state such as a high accuracy high base state or a low accuracy high base state, it is advantageous to allow the game ball to enter the right game area 3B by right-handed striking. Further, in the high base state, the second starting port 21 is easier to open than in the low base state, and it is easier to enter the ball into the second starting port 21 than to enter the ball into the first starting port 20. Because it has become. Therefore, while passing the game ball through the gate 28, which normally triggers the determination of whether or not the symbol is correct, a right-handed hit is made to allow the game ball to enter the second starting port 21. As a result, it is possible to obtain a large number of starting balls (opportunities for determining whether or not a special symbol is correct) rather than hitting left. In this state, the launch direction indicator 47 is lit and controlled in a predetermined manner to notify the right gaming area that the launch should be performed.

On the other hand, in a low base state such as a high accuracy low base state or a low accuracy low base state, it is more advantageous to allow the game ball to enter the left game area 3A by hitting the left side. Further, in the low base state, the second starting port 21 is less likely to be opened than in the high base state, and it is easier to enter the ball into the first starting port 20 than to enter the ball into the second starting port 21. Because it has become. Therefore, a left-handed hit is made to allow the game ball to enter the first starting port 20. As a result, it is possible to obtain a large number of starting balls (opportunity for determining whether or not a special symbol is correct) rather than hitting right. In this state, the firing direction indicator 47 is lit (display controlled) in a predetermined manner to notify that the firing direction indicator 47 should be fired to the left game area.

Specifically, the launch direction indicator 47 is composed of two LEDs of "yz", and indicates the launch direction by turning on the LEDs according to the game state. For example, in the low base state, it is possible to notify that the left game area should be fired as a display mode in which both LEDs are turned off, such as "y □ z □" (for example, □: off, ■: on). can. Further, in the high base state, it is possible to notify that the right game area should be fired as a display mode in which both LEDs are turned on, such as "y ■ z ■" (for example, □: off, ■: on). can.

[Main control main processing]
Next, the operation (control processing by the main control unit) of the game control microcomputer 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 38. The counters, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. that appear in the operation description of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the RAM of the main control board 80. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 reads and executes the main control main processing program shown in FIG. 10 from the ROM of the main control board 80. .. As shown in the figure, in the main control main process, the initial setting is first performed (S101). In the initial settings, for example, stack settings, constant settings, interrupt time settings, CPU settings of the main control board 80, SIO, PIO, CTC (interrupt time controller) settings, and various flags, status, and counter resets. And so on. The initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". The initial setting (S101) is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed after that. In Example 1 and the drawings, the normal symbol is "general diagram", the special symbol is "special symbol", the first special symbol is "special diagram 1" and "first special symbol", and the second special symbol is "special symbol". It may be called "2" or "second special drawing".

Following the initial setting (S101), interrupts are disabled (S102), and normal symbol / special symbol main random number update processing (S103) is executed. In this normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103), the values of the various random number counters shown in FIG. 7 are updated by one. When the value of each random number counter reaches the upper limit, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" or may be randomly changed. The updated random number counter values are sequentially stored in a predetermined updated value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the main control board 80.

When the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103) is completed, interrupts are enabled (S104). While interrupts are enabled, interrupt processing (S105) can be executed. This interrupt processing (S105) is executed based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the CPU of the main control board 80, for example, at a cycle of 4 ms. Then, between the end of the interrupt process (S105) and the start of the next interrupt process (S105), the update process of various counter values by the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103) is repeated. Will be executed. If an interrupt pulse is input to the CPU in the interrupt disabled state, the interrupt processing (S105) is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is enabled (S104).

[Interrupt processing]
Next, interrupt processing (S105) will be described. As shown in FIG. 11, in the interrupt processing (S105), the output processing (S201) is first executed. In the output process (S201), commands (control signals) set in the output buffer provided in the RAM of the main control board 80 in each process described below are output to the sub control board 90, the payout control board 110, and the like. do. Examples of the command and the like output here include information on the game state, the result of the special symbol winning / failing determination, the symbol as the jackpot type, the fluctuation pattern, and the like. The command consists of, for example, 2 bytes of information. The upper 1 byte is information about the type of command, and the lower 1 byte is information about the content of the command.

In the input process (S202) performed after the output process (S201), various sensors (first start port sensor 20a, second start port sensor 21a, first large winning port sensor) mainly attached to the pachinko gaming machine 1 are used. The detection signal detected by the 30a, the second large winning opening sensor 35a, the general entry opening sensor 27a, etc. (see FIG. 5) is read and stored in the output buffer of the RAM as the winning ball information. Further, the detection signal from the lower plate full switch that detects the fullness of the lower plate 62 is also taken in and stored in the output buffer of the RAM 84 as the lower plate full data.

The normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S203) performed next is the same as the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103) performed in the main control main process of FIG. That is, the update processing of the various random number counter values (including the normal symbol random number counter value) shown in FIG. 7 is performed after the execution period of the timer interrupt processing (S105) and the other periods (after the end of the interrupt processing (S105)). It is performed both in the period until the next interrupt processing (S105) is started).

Following the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S203), the start port sensor detection process (S204), the normal symbol operation process (S205), the special symbol operation process (S206), and the specific area sensor detection process (S207), which will be described later. , Hold ball number processing (S208), and power failure monitoring processing (S209) are executed. After that, other processing (S210) not deeply related to the present invention is executed to end the interrupt processing (S105). Then, until the next interrupt pulse is input to the CPU of the main control board 80, the main control main processes S102 to S104 are repeatedly executed (see FIG. 10), and when the interrupt pulse is input (after about 4 msec). ), Interrupt processing (S105) is executed again. In the output process (S201) of the interrupt process (S105) executed again, the command or the like set in the output buffer of the RAM in the previous interrupt process (S105) is output.

[Starting port sensor detection process]
As shown in FIG. 12, in the start port sensor detection process (S204), first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate 28, that is, whether or not the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 28a (S301). .. If the game ball has passed through the gate 28 (YES in S301), the number of normal symbol hold balls (the number of normal symbol hold, specifically, the value of the counter that counts the number of normal figure hold provided in the RAM) It is determined whether or not the number is 4 or more (S302), and if the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (NO in S301), the process proceeds to S305.

If the number of normal symbol reserved balls is 4 or more (YES in S302), proceed to S305. On the other hand, if the number of normal symbol reserved balls is not 4 or more (NO in S302), "1" is added to the number of normal symbol reserved balls (S303), and the normal symbol random number acquisition process (S304) is performed. In the normal symbol random number acquisition process (S304), the value (label-TRND-H, FIG. 7B) of the normal symbol hit / miss determination random number counter stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM is acquired. Then, the acquired random number value (acquired information) is stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of ordinary symbol holding balls in the normal symbol holding storage unit provided in the RAM of the main control board 80.

In S305, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the second starting port 21, that is, whether or not the game ball is detected by the second starting port sensor 21a (S305). If the game ball does not enter the second starting port 21 (NO in S305), the process proceeds to S309, but if the game ball enters the second starting port 21 (YES in S305), the special figure 2 The number of reserved balls (the number of 2nd special figure hold, specifically, the numerical value of the counter for counting the number of 2nd special figure hold provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80) has reached 4 (upper limit number). Whether or not it is determined (S306). Then, when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 has reached four (YES in S306), the process proceeds to S309, but when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is less than four (NO in S306), Special figure 2 Add 1 to the number of reserved balls (S307).

Subsequently, the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S308) is performed. In the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S308), the value (label-TRND-A) of the random number counter for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not, which is stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM, and the random number for determining the jackpot type. The value of the counter (label-TRND-AS), the value of the reach random number counter (label-TRND-RC), and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (label-TRND-T1) are acquired (that is, the random numbers shown in FIG. 7 (A)). The acquired random number values (acquired information) are stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of reserved balls in the second special figure 2 in the second special figure reserved storage unit 85b.

Subsequently, in the start port sensor detection process (S204), it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the first start port 20, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the first start port sensor 20a (S309). ). If the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 (NO in S309), the process ends, but if the game ball enters the first starting port 20 (YES in S309), the special figure The number of 1 reserved balls (the number of 1st special figure hold, specifically, the numerical value of the counter for counting the number of 1st special figure hold provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80) has reached 4 (upper limit number). Whether or not it is determined (S310). Then, when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 reaches four (YES in S310), the process ends, but when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is less than four (NO in S310), Special figure 1 Add "1" to the number of reserved balls (S311).

Subsequently, the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S312) is performed. In the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S312), the value of the special symbol hit / miss determination counter stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM is the same as in the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S308). (Label-TRND-A), value of random number counter for determining jackpot type (label-TRND-AS), value of reach random number counter (label-TRND-RC), value of fluctuation pattern random number counter (label-TRND-T1) (That is, the random number values shown in FIG. 7A are acquired), and the acquired random number values are stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of reserved balls in the first special figure 1 in the first special figure reserved storage unit 85a. ..

[Public map operation processing]
The game control microcomputer 81 performs the normal drawing operation process (S205) shown in FIG. 13 after the start port sensor detection process (S204). In the normal figure operation process (S205), the process related to the normal symbol display 42 and the variable winning device 22 is divided into four stages, and "normal figure operation status 1, 2, 3, 4" is assigned to each stage. .. Then, when the "normal figure operation status" is "1" (YES in S401), the normal symbol standby process (S402) is performed, and when the "normal figure operation status" is "2" (S401). NO, YES for S403), normal symbol fluctuation processing (S404) is performed, and if the "normal symbol operation status" is "3" (NO for both S401 and S403, YES for S405), the normal symbol is confirmed. The process (S406) is performed, and when the "normal figure operation status" is "4" (all of S401, S403, and S405 are NO), the normal electric accessory process (S407) is performed. The operation status of the normal diagram is "1" by default.

[Normal symbol standby processing]
As shown in FIG. 14, in the normal symbol standby process (S402), first, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is "0" (S501), and if it is "0" (YES in S501). This process is finished. On the other hand, if it is not "0" (NO in S501), the normal symbol hit / miss determination process described later is performed (S502). Further, after the normal symbol hit / miss determination process (S502), the normal symbol variation pattern selection process is performed (S503). In the normal symbol variation pattern selection process, the normal symbol variation pattern selection table shown in FIG. 8 (E) is referred to, and if the game state is a time saving state, a normal symbol variation pattern having a variation time of 1 second is selected. do. On the other hand, if the gaming state is a non-time saving state, a normal symbol variation pattern having a normal symbol variation time of 30 seconds is selected. Further, after the normal symbol variation pattern selection process, the normal symbol random number shift process (S504) described later is performed. Further, following the normal symbol random number shift process (S504), the normal symbol variation start process (S505) is performed, and the process is completed. In the normal symbol variation start process, the variation display of the normal symbol is started with the normal symbol variation pattern selected in S503, and the normal operation status is set to "2". Further, in the normal symbol change start process, a normal symbol change start command is set in order to notify the sub-control board 90 of the start of change of the normal symbol.

[Normal symbol hit / fail judgment process]
As shown in FIG. 15, in the normal symbol hit / miss determination process (S502), first, the value (label-TRND-H) of the normal symbol hit / miss determination random number counter stored in the normal symbol hold storage unit is read out (S601). Next, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is ON (that is, whether or not the gaming state is the time saving state) (S602). When it is determined in S602 that the time saving flag is ON, that is, it is in the time saving state (YES in S602), among the normal symbol hit judgment tables shown in FIG. 8 (D), the table for the time saving state (the hit judgment value is Based on the high-probability normal-figure hit / fail determination based on "0" to "239"), it is determined whether or not it is a hit (S604), and the process proceeds to S605. That is, it is determined whether or not the value (label-TRND-H) of the read random number counter for determining whether or not the normal symbol is correct matches any of the hit determination values. On the other hand, when it is determined in S602 that the time saving flag is not ON, that is, it is in the non-time saving state (NO in S602), the table for the non-time saving state among the normal symbol hit determination tables shown in FIG. 8 (D) ( It is determined whether or not the hit is a hit (S603) by the low-probability normal figure hit / fail judgment based on the hit judgment values "0" and "1"), and the process proceeds to S605.
Then, in S605, it is determined whether or not the result of the normal figure hit / fail judgment (S603, S604) is a hit (normal figure hit) (S605), and if it is judged to be a miss (NO in S605), the stop display is missed. Determine the normal symbol (the symbol that is out of the ordinary) (S606), and finish the process. On the other hand, if it is determined to be a hit (per normal figure) in S605 (YES in S605), the normal symbol per stop display (design per normal figure) is determined (S607), and the normal figure hit flag is turned ON (S608). ), Finish the process.

[Ordinary symbol random number shift processing]
Following the normal symbol variation pattern selection process (S503), the normal symbol random number shift process (S504) is executed. As shown in FIG. 16, in the normal symbol random number shift process (S504), first, the number of normal symbol reserved balls is decremented by 1 (S701). Next, the storage location of each Fuzu hold in the Fuzu hold storage unit is shifted by one to the side read from the current position (S702). Then, the address space, which is the storage location of the highest hold storage in the normal figure hold storage unit, is emptied (“0”), that is, the RAM area corresponding to the fourth hold of the normal figure is cleared to 0 (S703). ), Finish the process. In this way, the general map hold is digested in the order of hold.

[Processing during normal symbol change]
As shown in FIG. 17, in the normal symbol changing process (S404), first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the normal symbol has elapsed (S801), and if not, the process ends (NO in S801). On the other hand, if it has passed (YES in S801), the normal symbol fluctuation stop command is set (S802) and the normal symbol operation status is set to "3" (S803). Then, after performing other processing such as stopping the variable display of the normal symbol at the display result (hit normal symbol or out-of-order normal symbol) according to the judgment result of the random number for determining whether the normal symbol is correct or not (S804), this process is performed. To finish.

[Normal symbol confirmation process]
As shown in FIG. 18, in the normal symbol determination process (S406), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol hit flag is ON (S901). If the normal map hit flag is not ON (NO in S901), the normal figure operation status is set to "1" (S905), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the flag per normal figure is ON (YES in S901), then it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is ON, that is, whether or not the time saving state is in progress (S902). Then, if it is in the time saving state (YES in S902), the opening pattern in the time saving state is set as the opening pattern of the variable winning device 22 (second starting port 21) (S903). As described above, the opening pattern in the time saving state is an opening pattern in which the opening for 2.0 seconds is repeated three times. Therefore, "3" is set in the second starting port opening counter that counts the number of times the second starting port 21 is opened.

On the other hand, if it is in the non-time saving state (NO in S902), the opening pattern in the non-time saving state is set as the opening pattern of the variable winning device 22 (second starting port 21) (S906). As described above, the opening pattern in the non-time saving state is an opening pattern in which opening for 0.2 seconds is performed once. Therefore, "1" is set in the second start port opening counter. Then, following the set of the open pattern (S903, S906), the normal figure operation status is set to "4" (S904), and this process is completed.

[Ordinary electric accessory processing]
As shown in FIG. 19, in the ordinary electric accessory processing (S407), first, it is determined whether or not the end flag per normal figure is ON (S1001). The normal figure hit end flag is a flag indicating that the opening of the second start port 21 has been completed in the auxiliary game executed as a hit.

If the end flag per normal figure is not ON (NO in S1001), it is determined whether or not the second starting port 21 is open (S1002). If it is not open (NO in S1002), it is determined whether or not it is time to open the second starting port 21 (S1003), if not (NO in S1003), the process is completed, and if it is reached, the second The start port 21 is opened (S1004), and the process is completed. On the other hand, if the second starting port 21 is being opened (YES in S1002), whether or not it is time to close the second starting port 21 (that is, the opening of the second starting port 21 and then a predetermined opening). Judging (whether or not the time has passed) (S1005), if not reached (NO in S1005), the process is completed, and if it is reached (YES in S1005), the second starting port 21 is closed (closed) (closed). S1006).

Then, following the closing process of the second starting port 21 (S1006), the value of the second starting port opening counter is decremented by 1 (S1007), and it is determined whether or not the value of the second starting port opening counter is "0". (S1008). If it is not "0" (NO in S1008), the process is finished as it is in order to open the second starting port 21 again. On the other hand, if it is "0" (YES in S1008), the end processing per normal figure to end the auxiliary game is performed (S1009), and the end flag per normal figure is set (S1010) to end the process. The second start port opening counter becomes "0" when the second start port 21 is opened three times (opening operation of the movable member 23) in the non-time reduction state, and is set to "0" in the non-time reduction state. When the second starting port 21 is opened once, it becomes "0".

On the other hand, if the end flag for hitting the normal figure is ON in S1001 (YES in S1001), the opening operation of the second starting port 21 for the number of times set in S903 or S906 has been completed, so that the hit in the normal figure is hit. The end flag is turned off (S1011), the normal figure hit flag is turned off (S1012), the normal figure operation status is set to "1" (S1013), and the process is completed. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the normal symbol standby process (S402) is executed again as the normal symbol operation process (FIG. 13).

[Special figure operation processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure operation process (S206) after the normal figure operation process (S205). In the special figure operation process (S206), as shown in FIG. 20, the processes related to the special symbol display 41 and the large prize device (first large prize device 31 and second large prize device 36) are divided into five stages, and these are divided into five stages. "Special figure operation status 1, 2, 3, 4, 5" is assigned to each stage of. Then, when the "special figure operation status" is "1" (YES in S1101), the special symbol standby process (S1102) is performed, and when the "special figure operation status" is "2" (S1101). NO, YES for S1103), processing during special symbol change (S1104) is performed, and if the "special symbol operation status" is "3" (NO for both S1101 and S1103, YES for S1105), the special symbol is confirmed. If processing (S1106) is performed and the "special figure operation status" is "4" (NO for S1101, S1103, S1105, YES for S1107), special electric accessory processing 1 (S1108) as a jackpot game. If the "special figure operation status" is "5" (all of S1101, S1103, S1105, and S1107 are NO), the special electric accessory processing 2 (S1109) as a small hit game is performed. The special figure operation status is "1" by default.

[Special symbol standby processing]
As shown in FIG. 21, in the special symbol standby process (S1102), first, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in the second starting port 21 (that is, the number of reserved balls in special figure 2) is “0” (S1201). .. Special figure 2 When the number of reserved balls is "0" (YES in S1201), that is, when the random number counter value acquired due to the entry into the second starting port 21 is not stored, the first start is performed. It is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in the mouth 20 (that is, the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1) is “0” (S1206). Then, when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is also "0" (YES in S1206), that is, when the random number counter value acquired due to the entry into the first starting port 20 is not stored, the image is displayed. It is determined whether or not the process of using the display screen 7a of the display device 7 as the standby screen (during the execution of the demo screen for waiting for customers) is in progress (S1211), and if so (YES in S1211), the process is completed. If not (NO in S1211), the standby screen setting process is executed to display the standby screen (S1212).

In S1201, when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is not "0" (NO in S1201), that is, when one or more random number counter values acquired due to entering the second starting port 21 are stored. , The special figure 2 hit / fail determination process (S1202), the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection process (S1203), the special figure 2 random number shift process (S1204), and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S1205) are performed in this order. Further, when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is "0" but the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is not "0" (YES in S1201 and NO in S1206), that is, the random number counter value related to the second starting port 21. Although there is no memory, if there is one or more memory of the random number counter value acquired due to the entry into the first starting port 20, the special figure 1 hit / miss judgment process (S1207) and the special figure 1 variation described later will be described. The pattern selection process (S1208), the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1209), and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1210) are performed in this order. As described above, in the first embodiment, the variation display of the first special symbol based on the first special figure hold is performed only when the second special figure hold is "0" (when YES in S1201). That is, the digestion of the second special symbol reservation (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed in preference to the digestion of the first special symbol reservation (variation display of the first special symbol). Then, in the first embodiment, the hit / fail judgment based on the second special figure hold is more likely to be a big hit that is more profitable for the player than the hit / fail judgment based on the first special figure hold (FIG. 8 (B). )).

[Special Figure 2 Win / Loss Judgment Process]
As shown in FIG. 22, in the special figure 2 hit / miss determination process (S1202), first, as a determination value, the lowest region of the second special figure hold storage unit 85b of the RAM (that is, the first one of the second special figure hold). The value (label-TRND-A) of the random number counter for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not (the oldest stored) stored in the corresponding RAM area) is read out (S1301). Next, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag is ON, that is, whether or not it is in a high probability state (S1302). Then, if it is not in the high probability state (NO in S1302), that is, if it is in the normal state, the jackpot determination table for the normal state (the jackpot determination values are "3" and "" in the jackpot determination table (FIG. 8 (A))). A hit / fail judgment is made based on 397 ”) (S1303). On the other hand, if it is in the high probability state (YES in S1302), the hit / fail judgment is performed based on the big hit determination table for the high probability state in the jackpot determination table (FIG. 8 (A)) (S1307). In the jackpot determination table for high probability states, the jackpot determination values are "3", "53", "113", "173", "227", "281", "337", "397", "449". , "503".

When the result of the jackpot determination (S1303, S1309) is determined to be "big hit" (YES in S1304), the value (label-TRND-AS) of the random number counter for determining the jackpot type is read out and shown in FIG. 8 (B). The jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type determination table (S1310), the jackpot symbol is determined based on the value of the random number for determining the jackpot type (S1311), the jackpot flag is turned ON (S1312), and the process is completed. In addition, in the case of the hit / fail judgment related to the first special symbol, the jackpot type is judged using the jackpot type judgment table for the first special symbol, and in the case of the hit / fail judgment related to the second special symbol, it is for the second special symbol. The jackpot type is determined using the jackpot type determination table of. Further, when it is determined as a big hit in the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol (special figure 1), any one of the 15R first big hit, the 15R second big hit, and the 2R third big hit is executed. Further, when the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is determined to be a big hit, all of them are 15R fourth big hits (FIG. 8 (B)).

Further, the big hit flag includes a long hit flag that is turned on when the type of big hit is 15R first big hit or 15R second big hit, and a short hit flag that is turned on when the type of big hit is 2R third big hit. Here, the round display 45 is composed of two LEDs, a 2R lamp and a 15R lamp, and when the 2R third jackpot is set and the short hit flag is turned ON, the 2R third jackpot symbol is displayed. The 2R lamp is lit and displayed at the timing when is confirmed and displayed. Specifically, the display mode is such as "2R ▲ 15R Δ" (for example, ▲: lighting, Δ: extinguishing). Further, when the long hit flag is turned on as any of the 15R 1st jackpot, the 15R 2nd jackpot, and the 15R 4th jackpot, the 15R lamp lights up at the timing when the corresponding jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed. Is displayed. Specifically, the display mode is as shown in "2R Δ15R ▲".

On the other hand, when it is determined that the result of the big hit determination (S1303, S1307) is not "big hit" (NO in S1304), it is determined whether or not it is a small hit (S1305). That is, it is determined whether or not the value (label-TRND-A) of the random number counter for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not matches any of the small hit determination values "101" to "105" (FIG. 8 (A)). .. Then, when it is determined that it is not a small hit (NO in S1305), the out-of-order symbol is determined (S1308), and the process is completed. If it is determined to be a small hit (YES in S1305), the small hit symbol is determined (S1306), the small hit flag is turned ON (S1306), and the process is completed. In addition, a random number for determining whether or not it is a small hit may be provided separately from the random number for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection process]
In the special symbol standby process (FIG. 21), the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process is performed (S1203) after the special figure 2 hit / fail determination process (S1202). As shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, in the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1203), first, it is determined whether or not the game state is the time saving state (whether or not the time saving flag is ON) (S1401). Then, if it is not in the time saving state (NO in S1401), that is, if it is in the non-time saving state, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (S1402), and if it is ON (YES in S1402), it is a medium jackpot in the non-time saving state. The fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) with reference to the table (the portion of the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9 that corresponds to the non-time saving state and the jackpot) (S1403). .. If the fluctuation pattern is decided, the fluctuation time is also decided. Further, in the first embodiment, the non-time saving medium big hit table is divided according to whether the big hit is a long hit (15R big hit) or a short hit (2R big hit). However, since this process is a variable pattern selection process for the special figure 2, the big hit won in the lottery of the special figure 2 is only the 15R fourth big hit (long hit). Therefore, the portion referred to in this process is always the location of the long hit, and the fluctuation pattern P1 or the fluctuation pattern P2 is selected. The table for medium and large hits in the non-time saving state does not have to be divided into a long hit table and a short hit table. This also applies to the table for medium and large hits in a time-saving state, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not ON (NO in S1402), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is ON (S1405). Then, if the small hit flag is ON (YES in S1405), the variation is made with reference to the non-time saving state medium / small hit table (the portion of the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9 corresponding to the non-time saving state and small hit). Pattern A variation pattern is selected based on the random number counter value (S1409). Specifically, in the first embodiment, the variation pattern P4 is always selected.

If the small hit flag is not ON (NO in S1405), it is determined whether or not the reach random number counter value (label-TRND-RC) is the reach establishment random number value (S1406). As shown in FIG. 8C, the reach establishment random number values are “0” to “5” in the time saving state and “0” to “13” in the non-time saving state. That is, the time-saving state is less likely to reach when the time is off than the non-time-saving state. This is to speed up the digestion speed of the special figure hold by allowing more non-reach effect deviations with a short fluctuation time to be selected in the time saving state.

When the reach random number counter value (label-TRND-RC) is the reach establishment random number value (YES in S1406), that is, when the reach is out of reach, the table for out of reach in the non-time saving state (variation shown in FIG. 9). The variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value with reference to the non-time saving state (the part corresponding to the reach / non-reach state) in the pattern table (S1407). In the first embodiment, the variation pattern P5 or P6 is selected.

If the reach random number counter value (label-TRND-RC) is not a reach-established random number value (NO in S1406), that is, if there is no reach, the table for no reach loss during the non-time saving state (variation pattern shown in FIG. 9). The variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value by referring to the non-time saving state and the part corresponding to the reach non-existence in the table (S1408). When this reach does not come off, the function of shortening fluctuation according to the number of reserved balls works. That is, when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is "3" or "4", a fluctuation pattern having a shorter fluctuation time than when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is "0" to "2" is selected. It is supposed to be done. In the first embodiment, the variation pattern P7 or P8 is selected.

Further, in S1401, when it is determined that the gaming state is the time saving state (YES in S1401), as shown in FIG. 24, the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to is the table for the time saving state (the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9). The process (S1410 to S1416) is performed in the same flow as in steps S1402 to S1609 except that the part corresponding to the time saving state). That is, if it is a big hit, refer to the part corresponding to the time saving state and the big hit in FIG. 9, if it is a small hit, refer to the part corresponding to the time saving state and the small hit in FIG. Based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value, refer to the part corresponding to the time saving state and reach non-off in FIG. 9, and refer to the part corresponding to the time saving state and reach non-off in FIG. 9 if there is no reach. And select the fluctuation pattern.

In the fluctuation pattern table during the time saving state (the part corresponding to the time saving state in the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9), the function of shortening fluctuation according to the number of reserved balls when the reach is not off is the number of reserved balls "2". ~ Works when "4". That is, the shortening variation is more likely to be selected than in the non-time saving state. Further, when the long hit is won among the big hits, the fluctuation pattern having a shorter fluctuation time is more likely to be selected than in the non-time saving state. That is, the fluctuation pattern table in the time saving state is a table in which the average value of the fluctuation time of the special symbol is shorter than the fluctuation pattern table in the non-time saving state.

After selecting the variation pattern as described above, another process (S1404) shown in FIG. 23 is performed to finish this process. In the other processing (S1404), the variation pattern specification command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM. The set fluctuation pattern specification command is included in the fluctuation start command described later, and is sent to the sub-control board 90 by the output process (S201).

[Special Figure 2 Random number shift processing]
As shown in FIG. 25, in the special figure 2 random number shift process (S1204), first, the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is decremented by 1 (S1501). Next, when the storage location of various counter values in the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b is one lower side (for example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b is composed of the address space corresponding to the addresses "0000" to "0003". , Address "0000" side) (S1502). Then, "0" is set in the uppermost address space of the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b, that is, the RAM corresponding to the fourth RAM of the second special figure reservation (when the upper limit number is stored). Clear the area to 0 (S1503) and finish this process.

After executing the special figure 2 random number shift process (S1204), the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S1205) of FIG. 21 is executed. In the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S1205), the special figure operation status is set to "2", the fluctuation start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started.

In the special symbol standby process (S1102) of FIG. 21, when the number of reserved balls in special figure 2 is "0" and the number of reserved balls in special figure 1 is not "0" (YES in S1201, NO in S1206). , Special figure 1 hit / fail determination process (S1207), special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection process (S1208), special figure 1 random number shift process (S1209), and special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1210) are performed in this order.

[Special Figure 1 Win / Loss Judgment Process]
As shown in FIG. 26, in the special figure 1 hit / fail determination process (S1207), the processes (S1601 to S1609) are performed in the same flow as the special figure 2 hit / fail determination process (S1202) shown in FIG. 22. Therefore, a detailed description of this process will be omitted.

However, since this process is related to the special figure 1, in S1601, the lowest area of the first special figure hold storage unit 85a of the RAM (that is, the RAM area corresponding to the first one of the first special figure hold) is set. The stored random number counter value (label-TRND-A) for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct is read out. Further, in the type determination of the jackpot in S1608, there is a possibility that any of the 15R first jackpot, the 15R second jackpot, and the 2R third jackpot is determined (FIG. 8 (B)). As shown in the column of the first special symbol (special figure 1) of FIG. 8B, the distribution rate of each jackpot is 40% for the 15R first jackpot, 50% for the 15R second jackpot, and 2R third jackpot. Is 10%. When it is determined as the 15R first jackpot or the 15R second jackpot in the jackpot type determination, the long hit flag is turned ON as the jackpot flag in step S1609. On the other hand, when it is determined that the 2R third big hit, the short hit flag is turned ON as the big hit flag in S1609.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation pattern selection process]
As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, in the special figure 1 variation pattern selection process (S1208), processing (S1701 to S1720) is performed in the same flow as the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1403) shown in FIGS. 23 and 24. )I do. Therefore, a detailed description of this process is omitted.

However, since this process is related to Special Figure 1, if YES in S1702 (Fig. 27) (that is, when the jackpot flag is ON), the jackpot type is 15R jackpot (15R first jackpot or 15R first jackpot). It is determined whether or not it is one of the two big hits (S1703). If it is a 15R jackpot (YES in S1703), refer to the 15R jackpot table in the non-time saving state (the part of the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9 corresponding to the non-time saving state and the long hit), and the fluctuation pattern. The variation pattern is selected based on the random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1704). Specifically, the fluctuation pattern P1 or the fluctuation pattern P2 is selected.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1703 that it is not a 15R jackpot (NO in S1703), that is, when it is a 2R third jackpot, the 2R jackpot table in the non-time saving state (the non-time saving state and the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9) The fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value with reference to the part corresponding to the short hit (S1706). Specifically, the fluctuation pattern P3 is selected.

Further, in this special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection process, even when YES in S1712 (FIG. 28) (that is, when the jackpot flag is ON), the jackpot type is 15R jackpot (15R first jackpot or 15R second jackpot). (S1713). Then, in the case of a 15R jackpot (YES in S1713), the fluctuation pattern random number counter is referred to in the 15R jackpot table in the time saving state (the part corresponding to the time saving state and the long hit in the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9). Select a variation pattern based on the value (S1714). Specifically, any of the fluctuation patterns P9 to P11 is selected.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1713 that it is not a 15R jackpot (NO in S1713), that is, when it is a 2R third jackpot, the 2R jackpot table in the time saving state (the time saving state and the short hit in the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9). The fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value with reference to (the part corresponding to) (S1715). Specifically, the fluctuation pattern P12 is selected.

In this special figure 1 variation pattern selection process, after the variation pattern is selected (S1704, S1706, S1709, S1710, S1711, S1714, S1715, S1718, S1719, S1720), other processes (S1705, FIG. 27) are performed. To finish this process. In the other processing (S1705), the variation pattern specification command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM. The set fluctuation pattern specification command is included in the fluctuation start command described later, and is sent to the sub-control board 90 by the output process (S201).

[Special Figure 1 Random number shift processing]
As shown in FIG. 29, in the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1209), first, the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is decremented by 1 (S1801). Next, the storage location of various counter values in the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a is shifted to the lower side by one (S2002). Then, "0" is set in the uppermost address space of the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a, that is, the RAM corresponding to the fourth RAM of the first special figure reservation (when the upper limit number is stored). Clear the area to 0 (S1803) and finish this process.

After executing the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1209), the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1210) of FIG. 21 is executed. In the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S1210), the special figure operation status is set to "2", the fluctuation start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started.

[Processing during special symbol change]
As shown in FIG. 30, in the special symbol variation processing (S1104), first, the variation time of the special symbol (the variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in S1203 or S1208 of FIG. 21, see FIG. 9) has elapsed. Whether or not it is determined (S1901). If it is determined that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (NO in S1901), the process ends. As a result, the variable display of the special symbol is continued.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation time has elapsed (YES in S1901), the fluctuation stop command is set (S1902). Then, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (S1903), if it is ON (YES in S1903), the probability variation counter is subtracted by 1 (S1904), and it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation counter is "0" (S1904). S1905). When the probability change counter is determined to be "0" in S1905, the probability change flag is turned off and the process proceeds to S1907. On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation flag is not ON (NO in S1903) and when it is determined that the probability variation counter is not "0" (NO in S1905), the process proceeds to S1907.

Then, in S1907, when it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is ON (S1907) and when it is determined that the time saving flag is ON (YES in S1907), the time saving for counting the number of fluctuation display times of the special symbol executed during the time saving state is counted. The counter value is subtracted by 1 (S1908), it is determined whether or not the time saving counter value is "0" (S1909), and if it is "0" (YES in S1909), the time saving flag is turned off (S1910). Proceed to the processing of S1911. Further, when it is determined that the time saving flag is not ON (NO in S1907) and when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter is not "0" (NO in S1909), the process proceeds to S1911.

In S1911, the special figure operation status is set to "3" (S1911). Then, other processing such as stopping the variable display of the special symbol at a result corresponding to the determination result of the special symbol hit / fail determination random number and the big hit type determination random number is performed (S1912), and this process is completed.

[Special symbol confirmation process]
As shown in FIG. 31, in the special symbol determination process (S1106), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (S2001). If the jackpot flag is ON (YES in S2001), then it is determined whether or not the jackpot type is 15R jackpot (15R first jackpot, 15R second jackpot, or 15R fourth jackpot) (S2002). ..

And if it is a 15R jackpot (that is, if the long hit flag is ON), the round to be executed during the jackpot game (in the mode of opening one round once, one round is from opening the big winning opening to closing). The value of the round counter that counts the number of times is set to "15", and as an opening pattern of the big prize device (the first big prize device 31 and the second big prize device 36), if it is the 15R first big hit, the 15R first An opening pattern for a big hit (see FIG. 6) is set, and if it is a 15R second big hit, an opening pattern for a 15R second big hit (see FIG. 6) is set (S2003).

If it is not a 15R jackpot in S2002 (that is, if the short hit flag is ON), the jackpot type is 2R second jackpot, so the value of the round counter is set to "2" and the jackpot prize device (first jackpot). As the opening pattern of the winning device 31 and the second big winning device 36), the opening pattern for the 2R second big hit (see FIG. 6) is set (S2004).

After finishing the processing of S2003 or S2004, in order to start the jackpot game, set the jackpot opening command (S2005), start the jackpot game opening effect (S2006), and set the special figure operation status to "4". (S2007).

Further, when it is determined in S2001 that the big hit flag is not ON (NO in S2001), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is ON (S2008). If the small hit flag is ON (YES in S2008), the value of the small hit opening counter that counts the number of times the large winning opening (second large winning opening 35) is opened during the small hit game is set to "2". At the same time, an opening pattern for small hits (see FIG. 6) is set as an opening pattern of the large winning devices (first large winning device 31 and second large winning device 36) (S2009).

After finishing the processing of S2009, in order to start the small hit game, set the small hit opening command (S2010), start the small hit game opening effect (S2011), and set the special figure operation status to "5". Set (S2012). If the small hit flag is not ON in S2008 (NO in S2008), neither the big hit game nor the small hit game will start, so the special figure operation status is set to "1" and the process is completed.

[Special electric accessory processing 1 (big hit game)]
As shown in FIG. 32, in the special electric accessory process 1 (S1108), first, it is determined whether or not the probability change flag is ON (S2101), and when it is determined to be ON (YES in S2101), the probability change flag is turned OFF. (S2102). Further, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is ON (S2103), and if it is determined to be ON (YES in S2103), the time saving flag is turned OFF (S2104). That is, during the execution of the jackpot game, it is controlled to a low probability state and a non-time saving state. In the first embodiment, since the low base state is always in the non-time saving state, the low base state is also controlled during the execution of the jackpot game.

Next, it is determined whether or not the jackpot end flag is ON (S2105). The jackpot end flag is a flag indicating that all of the jackpot winning devices (first jackpot winning device 31 and second jackpot winning device 36) have been opened (the jackpot game has ended) in the jackpot game.

If the jackpot end flag is not ON (NO in S2105), it is determined whether or not the jackpot (first jackpot 30 or second jackpot 35) is open (S2106). If it is not open (NO in S2106), it is time to open the big winning opening (1st big winning opening 30 or 2nd big winning opening 35), that is, the opening time of the big hit has passed 1 It is determined whether or not the time to start the round has been reached, or the time of the interval between rounds has elapsed and the time to start the next round (next open) has been reached (S2107).

If the judgment result of S2107 is NO, the process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the determination result of S2107 is YES, it is determined whether or not the executed round corresponds to either the first round or the second round (S2108). This may be determined by using the value of the round counter for each jackpot type, or may be determined by providing a round counter that counts the number of rounds to be executed separately. If neither the first round nor the second round (ie, any of the 3rd to 15th rounds) (NO in S2108), proceed to S2110 and follow the opening pattern according to the type of jackpot (see FIG. 6). The first big winning opening 30 is opened. On the other hand, if it is determined to be the first round or the second round (YES in S2108), the V validity period setting process (S2109) is performed, and then the process proceeds to S2110, and the opening pattern according to the type of jackpot (Fig. 6). Refer to) to open the second prize opening 35.

In the V validity period setting process (S2109), the game ball is detected by the specific area sensor 39a during the opening of the second special winning opening 35 and for several seconds after the closing of the second special winning opening 35 in the first or second round. Set to the period to be judged to be valid (corresponding to the first period). In the first embodiment, the period other than this (including during a small hit or when the special game is not executed) is a period (corresponding to the second period) in which the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 39a is judged to be invalid. Is set to. Here, determining that the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 39a is valid means turning on the V flag based on the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 39a (specific area sensor detection process (FIG. 35) described later). (Refer to steps S2401 to S2403), and determining that the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 39a is invalid means that the V flag is not turned on even if the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 39a is detected. Is.

Here, when the game ball is detected by the specific area sensor 39a and the V flag is turned ON, the game state display 46 is set to a predetermined display mode, and the game state after the jackpot game ends becomes a high probability state. Is notified. Specifically, the game status indicator 46 is composed of three LEDs of "a1a2a3". Then, in the first embodiment, in the normal state (low probability state), the display mode is "a1 □ a2 □ a3 □" (for example, □: off, ■: on). Further, when the game ball is detected by the specific area sensor 39a during the big hit game and the V flag is turned ON, the display mode is "a1 ■ a2 ■ a3 ■". Then, when the big hit game is completed and the game state is set to the high probability state, the display mode is "a1 □ a2 □ a3 □". Further, the lighting control timing of the game status indicator 46 is not limited to such timing, and during the big hit game, even if the game ball passes through the specific area, the display mode of "a1 □ a2 □ a3 □" remains. , "A1 ■ a2 ■ a3 ■" may be displayed at the timing of transition to the high probability state after the end of the big hit game, and "a1 □ a2 □ a3 □" may be displayed at the timing of transition from the high probability state to the low probability state. ..

That is, in the specific area sensor detection process (FIG. 35) described later, the V flag is turned on only when the V passage (passage of the game ball to the specific area 39) is detected during the V valid period, and the V flag is turned on outside the V valid period (V invalid). The V flag is not turned on when the V passage is detected (during the period). When the V flag is ON, the probability variation flag is ON, that is, the game state after the big hit game is set to the high probability state (game state setting process (FIG. 33) described later). By doing so, the V flag is not turned on based on the passage of V due to fraudulent activity, that is, it is prevented from being illegally set to the high probability state.

In addition, if there is a V pass at the 1st or 2R in the 15R 1st jackpot or the 2R 3rd jackpot, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game is set to a high probability state, while the V passage occurs during the small hit. Even if there is, if the game state before the small hit game is the normal state, the game state after the small hit game is also set to the normal state so that the winning / failing determination probability does not change before and after the big hit game.

In the first embodiment, in the V validity period setting process (S2109), the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 39a is set to the period (first period) that is determined to be effective even when the 15R second jackpot is hit. However, as another aspect, in the case of the 15R second jackpot, the first period may not be set at the 1st and 2nd rounds. That is, in the case of the 15R second jackpot, the first and second Rs may be set as the second period. In the big hit game related to the 15R second big hit, the opening time of the second big winning opening 35 is set to 0.1 seconds, which is an extremely short time, so there is a possibility that the game ball will enter the second big winning opening 35. It is extremely low, but if you set it in the second period, you will not turn on the V flag even if you should hit the ball. This makes it possible to prevent the V flag from being turned on illegally or the V flag from being turned on due to a rare entry. In this embodiment, the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 39a is enabled in the first round or the second round, but the location of the round is not limited to this.

If the big winning opening (1st big winning opening 30 or 2nd big winning opening 35) is open in S2106 (YES in S2106), the maximum number of balls that can be entered in the big winning opening in that round is the specified maximum number of balls. It is determined whether or not the number has reached (10 per round in the first embodiment) (S2111). If the specified number of balls has not been reached (NO in S2111), has it reached the time to close the big prize opening (that is, has the predetermined opening time (see FIG. 6) have passed since the big winning opening was opened? Whether or not) is determined (S2112). Then, if the opening time of the big winning opening has not passed (NO in S2112), the process is completed.

On the other hand, when the specified number of balls has been reached (YES in S2111) or when the opening time of the big winning opening has passed (YES in S2112), that is, one of the two round end conditions is satisfied. If this happens, the big winning opening (1st big winning opening 30 or 2nd big winning opening 35) is closed (S2113). Then, the value of the round counter is decremented by 1 (S2114), and it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter is "0" (S2115). If it is determined that it is not "0" (NO in S2115), the process ends in order to start the next round.

On the other hand, when it is determined to be "0" (YES in S2115), the jackpot ending command is set (S2116) and the jackpot ending effect is started (S2117) as the jackpot ending process for ending the jackpot game. Then, the jackpot end flag is set (S2118), and the process is completed. If the round counter is a long hit (15R big hit), it will be "0" if the big winning opening is opened 15 times, and if it is a short hit (2R big hit), the big winning opening will be opened twice. When executed, it becomes "0".

If the jackpot end flag is ON in S2105 (YES in S2105), the final round has ended, so it is determined whether or not the execution time of the jackpot ending effect has elapsed (S2119), and the ending time has elapsed. If not (NO in S2119), the process ends. On the other hand, if the ending time has elapsed (YES in S2119), after turning off the jackpot end flag (S2120), the game state setting process (S2121) described later is performed. Then, the jackpot flag is turned off (S2122), the special figure operation status is set to "1" (S2123), and the process is completed. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol standby process (S1102) is executed again as the special symbol operation process (FIG. 20).

[Game status setting process]
As shown in FIG. 33, in the game state setting process (S2121), first, it is determined whether or not the V flag is ON (S2201). The V flag is a flag that is turned ON in the specific area sensor detection process (FIG. 35) described later. If the V flag is ON (YES in S2201), the probability change flag is turned ON (S2202), the probability change counter is set to "140" (S2203), the V flag is turned OFF (S2204), and the processing of S2205 is performed. move on. That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is determined whether or not to set the gaming state after the big hit game to the high probability state based on whether or not the V flag is turned ON in this gaming state setting process.

On the other hand, if the V flag is OFF (NO in S2201), the time reduction flag is turned ON (S2209), the time reduction counter is set to "100" (S2210), and the process is completed without turning the probability change flag ON. As a result, the gaming state after the big hit game this time becomes a low probability state, a short time state, and a high base state (that is, a low probability high base state). In this low-accuracy high-base state, the variation display of the special symbol is performed 100 times (the total number of variation display times of the first special symbol and the variation display count of the second special symbol is 100 times). And the next big hit will occur, and it will end when either of the conditions is met. Further, the time reduction counter and the probability variation counter count the total number of times the fluctuation display number of the first special symbol and the fluctuation display number of the second special symbol are added.

In S2205, it is determined whether or not the completed jackpot game (the jackpot game executed this time) is a 15R jackpot. Then, when it is determined that it is not a 15R jackpot, that is, it is a 2R third jackpot (NO in S2205), then the gaming state before the jackpot game, that is, the gaming state when the 2R third jackpot is reached is a time saving state or not. (S2208). If it is determined that the time reduction state has not occurred (NO in S2208), the process ends without turning on the time reduction flag. As a result, the game state after the big hit game this time becomes a high probability state, a non-time saving state of the special symbol, and a low base state (that is, a high probability low base state). This high-accuracy-low-base state ends when either of the conditions that the special symbol fluctuates 140 times and the next big hit occurs is satisfied.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2205 that the completed jackpot game (the jackpot game executed this time) is a 15R jackpot (YES in S2205), and in S2208, the game state when the 2R third jackpot is reached is in a time-saving state. If it is determined that the time was (YES in S2208), the time saving flag is turned ON (S2206), "140" is set in the time saving counter (S2207), and the process is completed. As a result, the game state after the big hit game this time becomes a high probability state, a time saving state of the special symbol, and a high base state (that is, a high probability high base state). This high-accuracy high-base state ends when either of the conditions that the special symbol fluctuates 140 times and the next big hit occurs is satisfied.

Further, when the 2R third big hit and the V flag is turned ON during the big hit game, it is the big hit game that performs the process (S2208) of determining whether the game state before the big hit game is the time saving state. This is to make the operating state of the front and rear time saving function and the operating state of the high base function the same as the small hit. If these operating states are different between the small hit and the 2R 3rd big hit, even if it is difficult to recognize which hit is due to the opening pattern of the big winning opening, which hit is determined by the subsequent operating state. Because it will be done. This makes it difficult to distinguish between the small hit and the 2R third big hit by the opening pattern of the big winning opening, and also by the operating state of the time saving function and the high base generating function that occur thereafter. If the V flag is simply ON without confirming whether the time reduction state is set, the time reduction flag may be turned ON.

[Special electric accessory processing 2 (small hit game)]
As shown in FIG. 34, in the special electric accessory process 2 (S1109), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit end flag is ON (S2301). The small hit end flag is a flag indicating that all the large winning devices (first large winning device 31 and second large winning device 36) have been opened in the small hit game.

If the small hit end flag is not ON (NO in S2301), whether the big winning opening (1st big winning opening 30 or 2nd big winning opening 35) is open (that is, whether the big winning device is open) ) Is determined (S2302). If it is not open (NO in S2302), it is time to open the big winning opening (1st big winning opening 30 or 2nd big winning opening 35), that is, the opening time of the small hit has passed. It is determined whether the time to start the first opening has been reached, or whether the time of the interval between the multiple openings has elapsed and the time to start the next opening has been reached (S2303).

If the judgment result of S2303 is NO, the process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the determination result of S2303 is YES, the V invalid period setting process (S2304) is performed, and then the process proceeds to S2305 to open the second large winning opening 35 according to the small hit opening pattern (see FIG. 6).

In the V invalid period setting process (S2304), the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 39a is invalidated for a few seconds during the opening of the second large winning opening 35 and after the closing of the second large winning opening 35 in the small hit game. Set to the judgment period (second period). Further, in the first embodiment, a period other than the period specified in the valid period in the above-mentioned V valid period setting process (S2109) is set as an invalid period (second period). Therefore, in this V invalid period setting process, it is confirmed whether the valid period is set, that is, whether the invalid period is set. Specifically, it is confirmed whether the V timer (provided in the RAM of the main control board 80) that measures the passage of the V valid period by countdown is set to "0" (that is, the state without the valid period). do. If the V timer is not "0", set the V timer to "0". It should be noted that the V timer may be set to "0", that is, set to a state without a valid period without confirming whether or not the V timer is "0". As a result, even if V passes during the small hit, if the game state before the small hit game is the normal state, the game state after the small hit game is prevented from shifting to the high probability state. In the first embodiment, since the period other than the period specified in the valid period in the above-mentioned V valid period setting process (S2109) is the invalid period, the process of S2304 may be omitted.

If the big winning opening (1st big winning opening 30 or 2nd big winning opening 35) is open in S2302 (YES in S2302), the number of balls entered into the big winning opening during the 2 times opening, that is, 2 It is determined whether or not the total number of game balls entered in the opening of the number of times has reached the specified maximum number of entered balls (10 in the first embodiment) (S2306). If the specified number of balls has not been reached (NO in S2306), has it reached the time to close the big prize opening (that is, has the predetermined opening time (see FIG. 6) passed since the big winning opening was opened? Whether or not) is determined (S2307). Then, if the opening time of the big winning opening has not passed (NO in S2307), the process is completed.

On the other hand, if the number of balls entered into the large winning opening during the two openings has reached the specified number of balls (YES in S2506), the large winning opening (second large winning opening 35) is closed (2nd large winning opening 35). S2314), shift to the small hit end processing of S2311. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2307 that the opening time of the large winning opening has passed (YES in S2307), the large winning opening (second large winning opening 35) is closed (S2308). Then, the value of the small hit opening counter is decremented by 1 (S2309), and it is determined whether or not the value of the small hit opening counter is "0" (S2310). If it is determined in S2310 that it is not "0" (NO in S2310), the process is terminated as it is in order to start the next opening.

On the other hand, if it is determined to be "0" in S2310 (YES in S2310), the process proceeds to the small hit end process of S2311. In S2311, as the small hit end process for ending the small hit game, the small hit ending command is set (S2311) and the small hit ending effect is started (S2312). Then, the small hit end flag is set (S2313), and the process is completed. The small hit opening counter becomes "0" when the large winning opening is opened twice.

In S2301, if the small hit end flag is ON (YES in S2301), since the opening of two times has been completed, it is determined whether or not the ending time of the small hit has passed (S2315), and the ending time. If has not passed (NO in S2315), the process ends. On the other hand, if the ending time has passed (YES in S2315), the small hit end flag is turned off (S2316), the small hit flag is turned off (S2317), and the special figure operation status is set to "1". Set (S2318) and finish the process. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol standby process (S1102) is executed again as the special symbol operation process (FIG. 20).

At the start of the small hit game, the probability change flag and the time saving flag are not switched from ON to OFF. Further, at the end of the small hit game, the game state setting process (S2121, FIG. 34) is not performed. That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the gaming state is not changed before and after the execution of the small hit game.

[Specific area sensor detection processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure operation process (S206) and then the specific area sensor detection process (S207). In the specific area sensor detection process (S207), as shown in FIG. 35, first, it is determined whether or not the game ball is detected by the specific area sensor 39a (S2401). If it is determined that there is no detection (NO in S2401), the process ends. When it is determined that there is detection in S2401 (YES in S2401), it is determined whether or not it is in the V valid period (S2402). The V valid period is a period set in the V valid period setting process (S2109) in the above-mentioned special electric accessory process 1 (FIG. 32). The V validity period is set in the first and second rounds of the jackpot game.

If it is determined in S2402 that the V is valid (YES in S2402), the V flag is turned ON (S2403), and whether or not the jackpot game currently being executed is a 2R jackpot (2R third jackpot). Is determined (S2404). Then, if it is determined that it is not a 2R jackpot (NO in S2404), that is, if it is a 15R jackpot, the first V pass command is set (S2405), and the process is completed. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is a 2R jackpot (YES in S2404), the second V pass command is set (S2406), and the process ends. The CPU of the main control board 80 transmits this V-pass command to the sub-control board 90 at a predetermined timing, and the sub-control board 90 executes the game effect in the effect symbol display area or the like according to the type of the received V-pass command. ..

If it is determined in S2402 that the V valid period is not in effect (NO in S2402), the third V passage command is set (S2407) without turning on the V flag, and the process ends. The first V passage command is a command for causing the sub control board 90 to perform V passage notification control. On the other hand, the second V-passing command and the third V-passing command are commands for not causing the sub-control board 90 to perform V-passing notification control in principle. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 is a means for switching the validity / invalidity of the passage of the game ball to the specific area 39 by executing such a specific area sensor detection process (S207) or V validity period setting process (S2109). Functions as (specific area state switching means).

[Holded ball count processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the reserved ball number processing (S208) after the specific area sensor detection processing (S207). In the reserved ball number processing (S208), as shown in FIG. 36, first, the special figure 1 reserved ball number, the special figure 2 reserved ball number, and the normal symbol reserved ball number stored in the RAM of the main control board 80 are read out ( S2501). Next, the data of the number of reserved balls (the number of reserved balls command for transmitting the information on the number of reserved balls to the sub-control board 90 or the like) is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S2502).

[Power failure monitoring process]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a power failure monitoring process (S209) after the hold ball number process (S208). In the power-off monitoring process (S209), as shown in FIG. 37, first, it is determined whether or not a power-off signal is input (S2601), and if there is no input (NO in S2601), the process ends. On the other hand, if there is an input of a power off signal (YES in S2601), the current state of the gaming machine (whether it is a probability change, whether it is playing a game, the number of reserved balls is some, and the number of remaining fluctuations of the probability change / time reduction is some. Etc.) are stored in the RAM (S2602), the power off flag is turned on (S2603), and then loop processing is performed without returning to interrupt processing (FIG. 11).

[Sub-control main processing]
Next, the operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 47. The counters, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. that appear in the operation description of the effect control microcomputer 91 are provided in the RAM of the sub control board 90 (sub control unit). When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the effect control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub-control board 90 reads and executes the sub-control main processing program shown in FIG. 38 from the ROM of the sub-control board 90. .. As shown in the figure, in the sub-control main process, the CPU initialization process is first performed (S4001). In the CPU initialization process (S4001), stack setting, constant setting, CPU 92 setting, SIO, PIO, CTC (interrupt time controller) and other settings, various flags, status and counter resets are performed.

Subsequently, the S4002 determines whether or not the power cutoff signal is ON and the contents of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 are normal (S4002). If the determination result is NO (NO in S4002), the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized (S4003), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, if the determination result is YES (YES in S4002), the process proceeds to S4004 without initializing the RAM of the sub-control board 90. That is, if the power off signal is not ON, or if the contents of the RAM are not normal even if the power off signal is ON (NO in S4002), the RAM of the sub control board 90 is initialized, but due to a power failure or the like. If the power off signal is turned on but the contents of the RAM are kept normal (YES in S4002), the RAM is not initialized. Initializing the RAM resets the values of various flags, statuses and counters. Note that S4001 to S4003 are executed only once after the power is turned on (when the power is turned on), and are not executed thereafter.

The S4004 disables interrupts. Next, the random number seed update process is executed (S4005). In the random number seed update process (S4005), the values of various random number counters for determining the effect are updated. The updated random number counter values are sequentially stored in a predetermined updated value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the sub-control board 90. The random numbers for determining the effect include a random number for determining the advance effect that determines the advance effect and a random number for determining the effect symbol that determines the effect symbol. The random number update method can be the same as the random number update process performed by the main control board 80 described above. Instead of adding the random values one by one at the time of updating, it is possible to add two by two. The random number for determining the effect is acquired at a predetermined timing. As this timing, for example, when a control signal (starting ball entry command) notifying that the starting ball has arrived is transmitted from the main control board 80, or a control signal notifying the start of fluctuation from the main control board 80 ( It can be used when a fluctuation start command) is transmitted, or when a fluctuation effect pattern, which will be described later, is determined. The storage location of the acquired random number for determining the effect is a predetermined random number counter value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the sub-control board 90. In the first embodiment, the random numbers for determining the advance notice effect include a random number for determining the conversation advance notice, a random number for determining the step-up advance notice, a random number for determining the pseudo-variation advance notice, a random number for determining the moving part advance notice, and a random number for determining the advance notification effect. The advance notice effect to be executed is determined by using the acquisition values of the random numbers for determining the advance notice effect and the advance notice determination tables of FIGS. 49 and 50.

When the random number seed update process (S4005) is completed, the command transmission process is executed (S4006). In the command transmission process, various commands (control signals) stored in the output buffer in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 are transmitted to the image control board 100, the voice control board 106, and the lamp control board 107. Each control board (each control unit) that received the command uses various effect devices (image display device 7, speaker 67, board lamp 5, frame lamp 66, movable decorative member 14, etc.) according to the received command. Execute the production (directed design game production, special game production associated with the big hit game and the small hit game, etc.). The effect control microcomputer 91 subsequently enables interrupts (S4007). After that, S4004 to S4007 are looped. While the interrupt is enabled, the receive interrupt process (S4008), the 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009), and the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) can be executed.

[Receive interrupt processing]
In the reception interrupt processing (S4008), as shown in FIG. 39, whether or not the strobe signal (STB signal) is ON, that is, the strobe signal sent from the main control board 80 is sent to the external INT input unit of the effect control microcomputer 91. Determine if it has been entered (S4101). Then, when it is determined in S4101 that the strobe signal is not ON (NO in S4101), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S4101 that the strobe signal is ON (YES in S4101), various commands transmitted from the main control board 80 are stored in the RAM of the sub control board 90 (S4102), and the process is completed. .. This receive interrupt process (S4008) is a process that is executed in preference to other interrupt processes (S4009, S4010).

[2ms timer interrupt processing]
The 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009) is a process executed every time an interrupt pulse having a cycle of 2 msec is input to the sub control board 90. As shown in FIG. 40, in the 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009), first, an input process for creating switch data (edge data and level data) is performed based on the detection signals from the effect button detection switches 63c and 63d (S4201). .. Subsequently, a lamp data output process for outputting the lamp data created by the 10 ms timer interrupt process described later is performed (S4202). Next, a drive data output process for creating and outputting drive data for driving the movable decorative member 14 is performed (S4203). Then, the watchdog timer process for resetting the watchdog timer is performed (S4204).

[10ms timer interrupt processing]
The 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) is a process executed every time an interrupt pulse having a cycle of 10 msec is input to the sub control board 90. As shown in FIG. 41, in the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010), first, the received command analysis process described later is performed (S4301). Next, a switch state acquisition process is performed in which the switch data created by the 2 ms timer interrupt process is stored in the RAM of the sub control board 90 as the switch data for the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4302). Subsequently, a switch process for setting the display contents and the like of the display screen 7a is performed based on the switch data stored in the switch state acquisition process (S4303). After that, other processing such as creating lamp data (data for controlling the lighting of the board lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66) and updating the random number for determining the effect is executed (S4304).

[Received command analysis processing]
As shown in FIGS. 42 and 43, in the reception command analysis process (S4301), first, it is determined whether or not the effect control microcomputer 91 has received the start input command from the main control board 80 (main control unit) ( S4401), when it is determined that the start ball entry command has been received (YES in S4401), then the ball entry start processing (S4402), which will be described later, is performed, and the process proceeds to S4403. If it is determined that the start ball entry command has not been received by S4401 (NO in S4401), the process proceeds to S4403 without performing the effect start process at the time of ball entry.

In S4403, it is determined whether or not a variation start command has been received from the main control unit (S4403), and if it is determined that a variation start command has been received (YES in S4403), the variation effect start processing described later is performed (S4404). , Move to S4405 processing. If it is determined that the fluctuation start command has not been received by S4403 (NO in S4403), the process shifts to the processing of S4405 without performing the fluctuation production start processing. In S4405, it is determined whether or not there is an unexecuted advance notice effect (game effect) (S4405), and if it is determined that there is an unexecuted advance notice effect (YES in S4405), the advance notice effect, etc. execution processing described later is performed. Is performed (S4406), and the process proceeds to S4407. If it is determined in S4405 that there is no unexecuted advance notice effect (NO in S4405), the process proceeds to S4407 without executing the advance notice effect. Here, "not yet executed notice effect, etc." refers to a game effect whose execution timing has not yet arrived, among the advance notice effects, etc. that have been decided to be executed by the advance notice effect setting process (S4506), etc. say. These set game effects that have not been executed will be executed in order when the execution timing determined for each game effect arrives.

In S4407, it is determined whether or not a fluctuation stop command has been received from the main control unit (S4407), and if it is determined that a fluctuation stop command has been received (YES in S4407), the variation effect end processing described later is performed (S4408). Move to S4409 processing. If it is determined that the fluctuation stop command has not been received in S4407 (NO in S4407), the process shifts to the processing of S4409 without performing the fluctuation production end processing.

Subsequently, in S4409, it is determined whether or not the opening command has been received from the main control unit (S4409), and when it is determined that the opening command has been received (YES in S4409), the special game effect selection process described later is performed (S4410). ), Move to the processing of S4411. If it is determined that the opening command has not been received by S4409 (NO in S4409), the process proceeds to S4411 without performing the special game effect selection process. In S4411, it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received from the main control unit (S4411), and if it is determined that the ending command has been received (YES in S4411), the ending effect selection process is performed (S4412), and the process of S4413 is performed. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined in S4411 that the ending command has not been received (NO in S4411), the process proceeds to S4413 without performing the ending effect selection process.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the first V passage command has been received from the main control unit (S4413), and if it is determined that the first V passage command has been received (YES in S4413), the V passage notification command is set (S4414). ), Move to the processing of S4415. The first V passage command is a command from the main control board 80 to notify the sub control board 90 that the game ball has been detected by the specific area sensor 39a during the V valid period in the 15R first jackpot. When the V-passage notification command is transmitted to the image control board 100 (image control unit) or the like by the command transmission process (S4006), the CPU of the image control board 100 reads predetermined image information from the ROM of the image control board 100. Then, characters such as "V pass!" Are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. As a result, the player is notified that the game ball passes through the specific area 39 and the game state after the jackpot game ends becomes a high probability state. On the other hand, when it is determined in S4413 that the first V passage command has not been received (NO in S4413), the process proceeds to the process of S4415 without setting the V passage notification command.

It should be noted that displaying the character "V passage!" Is one of the V passage notification modes, and other display contents (for example, displaying an object image imitating the character "V" or "probability change GET"". The passage of V may be notified by displaying the characters of, etc.). As a result, it is possible to notify the player that the game state after the big hit game (special game) being executed will be a high probability state.

Subsequently, in S4415, when the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the second V passage command has been received from the main control unit (S4415), and determines that the second V passage command has not been received (NO in S4415). ), Determine whether or not the third V passage command has been received (S4417). Then, when it is determined that the second V passage command has been received in S4415 (YES in S4415) and when it is determined in S4417 that the third V passage command has been received (YES in S4417), V passes. Set the non-notification command (S4416) and move to the processing of S4418. On the other hand, when it is determined in S4417 that the third V passage command has not been received (NO in S4417), the process proceeds to S4418 without setting the V passage non-notification command. In S4418, as other processing, processing based on a reception command other than the above-mentioned command (for example, a normal symbol fluctuation start command or a normal symbol fluctuation stop command) is performed, and the processing is completed. Here, the second V passage command is a command from the main control board 80 to notify the sub control board 90 that the game ball has been detected by the specific area sensor 39a during the V valid period in the 2R third big hit. The third V passage command is a command from the main control board 80 to notify the sub control board 90 that the game ball has been detected by the specific area sensor 39a during the V invalid period such as during a small hit.

When the V-pass non-notification command is transmitted to the image control board 100 or the like by the command transmission process (S4006), the CPU of the image control board 100 displays "V-pass!" Or the like on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The display is controlled on a screen in which there is no display of characters indicating that the V has passed (that is, a screen in which there is no notification of the passage of V). In other words, the V-passing non-notification mode is adopted. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, even if the gaming ball passes through the specific area 39 in the 2R third big hit or small hit, that is not notified to the player.

The command to be set in the above-mentioned specific area sensor detection process (FIG. 35) may be limited to the first V pass command, and the second V pass command and the third V pass command may not be set. In this case, the received command analysis process (S4301) does not execute the above-mentioned S4415 to S4417. Even with this configuration, the pachinko gaming machine can be used to notify the player only when V has passed during the V valid period in the 15R first jackpot. That is, it is not necessary to set a command (V-passage non-notification command) when the effect for notifying V-passage is not performed. However, it is possible to increase the stability of the image control by setting a command and controlling the image control board 100 based on the command as in this embodiment.

[Production start processing when entering the ball]
The effect start processing (S4402) at the time of ball entry is a process of executing a start ball entry command indicating that the ball has entered the start port from the main control unit. By this process, the image display device 7 Display control (control regarding the number of displays and changes in the display mode of the effect hold) of the effect hold (first effect hold 9a and second effect hold 9b) displayed on the display screen 7a of Occasionally, a so-called look-ahead effect (also referred to as "advance effect" or "advance notice") is performed based on the acquired information acquired by the main control unit. The look-ahead effect is a notice effect for starting the effect (game effect) before starting the variable display of the effect symbol (special symbol) indicating the result of the predetermined special symbol hit / miss determination. That is, the look-ahead effect is a variation display of the effect symbol (special symbol) that is executed before starting the variation display (also referred to as “the variation”) of the effect symbol (special symbol) indicating the result of the predetermined special symbol hit / fail determination. It is executed along with (also called "preliminary fluctuation"). In addition, the advance notice effect (including the look-ahead effect) means that the result of the variable display of the effect symbol (special symbol) indicating the result of the predetermined special symbol hit / fail judgment becomes a big hit (stops and displays in the big hit mode / big hit symbol). It is an effect that shows (suggests) the possibility before the variable display of the effect symbol (special symbol) ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 44, in the effect start processing (S4402) at the time of entering the ball, first, the processing of turning on the specific flag is performed in S5001, and the process shifts to the processing of S5002. Here, the "specific flag" of the first embodiment is in a state (high) in which the load of the control processing performed by the sub control unit 90 (also referred to as the "game effect control unit") is relatively high (the amount of control processing is large). It is a flag indicating the load state). Then, this "specific flag" is turned on when the ball entering effect start process is executed, and turned off when the ball entering effect start process is completed. That is, in the first embodiment, the processing amount of the control (effect control process, notice effect control process) related to the game effect of the sub control unit (game effect control unit) is greater than the predetermined amount during the execution of the effect start process at the time of entering the ball. It is said that there are many periods. In the first embodiment, the advance notice determination table used in the setting process such as the advance notice effect, which will be described later, is different depending on the state (ON or OFF) of this "specific flag". The state in which the specific flag is ON is also referred to as a "high load state" or "second control state", and the state in which the specific flag is OFF is also referred to as a "low load state" or "first control state".

Next, in the S5002, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a pre-effect determination random number acquisition process (S5002) for acquiring a pre-effect determination random number for the pre-effect determination, and shifts to the process of S5003. At the timing when the start-in ball command is received from the main control unit 80, the processing of S5002 is performed, and a predetermined value (acquisition information) is acquired from a random number for determining a preliminary effect (not shown). Further, in the pre-effect determination process (S5005) described later, whether or not to execute the pre-effect based on the acquired value, and if it is executed, the execution mode and the like are determined. The S5003 analyzes the start-in ball command received from the main control unit by the effect control microcomputer 91, and shifts to the processing of the S5004. The start-in ball command includes a variation pattern specifying command (information for specifying the variation pattern to be executed) that can specify the variation pattern to be selected in the variation pattern selection process of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. ing. In addition, hold information for specifying the number of acquired information (number of stored items, number of holds) stored in the current 1st special figure hold storage unit 85a and 2nd special figure hold storage unit 85b, and the current gaming state are specified. The game state information to be played, the judgment result (preliminary judgment result) of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment or the second special symbol hit / fail judgment, the symbol information for designating the hit type, and the like are included.

In S5004, a table for determining the pre-production is set (S5004), and the set pre-production determination table, the information included in the start entry command, and the random number for pre-production determination acquired in S5002 are displayed. Based on this, it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-effect, and if so, which effect mode the pre-effect is to be executed (S5005), and the process proceeds to S5006.

The S5006 controls the display of the effect hold (first effect hold and second effect hold) displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and shifts to the process of S5007. Specifically, the number of acquired information stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a and the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b is calculated based on the hold information analyzed by the start entry command analysis process (S5003). In order to show the player, control is performed to display the first effect hold and the second effect hold, which indicate the same number as the number of the stored acquired information. As a result, the player can easily grasp the current number of holds.

Further, by changing the display modes of the first effect hold and the second effect hold, or by changing the display modes of the first effect hold and the second effect hold to a special display mode different from the normal display mode. When showing the possibility that the result of the variable display of the effect symbol related to the effect hold will be a specific result (big hit) before starting the variable display of the effect symbol (when executing the pre-effect), the effect of S5006 Performs the corresponding display control process in the hold display process.

In S5007, the specific flag is turned off and the production start process at the time of entering the ball is completed. By determining that this specific flag is OFF, it is possible to determine that the effect start processing at the time of entering the ball is not being executed, that is, that the control processing amount related to the game effect performed by the sub control unit is a predetermined amount. It is possible. Here, whether or not "the amount of control processing related to the game effect is a predetermined amount" means whether or not the amount of control processing is equal to or less than a predetermined threshold value (the amount of control processing is within a predetermined range). Rather than measuring the control processing amount, a specific control process (“production start processing at the time of ball entry” in Example 1) is being executed, which generally increases the control processing amount (also simply referred to as “processing amount”). It is possible to easily judge by judging whether or not it is. Therefore, when a predetermined specific control process is performed, it is considered that "the amount of control process related to the game effect is larger than the predetermined amount", and the corresponding control process for the high load state is executed. do. As another aspect, a measuring means for actually measuring the load of the CPU of the sub-control unit is provided, and when the value (load) measured by the measuring means exceeds a predetermined threshold value, the corresponding high load state is used. It may be the one that executes the control process of.

[Variation production start processing]
As shown in FIG. 45, in the variable effect start process (S4404), first, in S4501, the effect control microcomputer 91 acquires the effect determination random numbers such as the advance notice effect determination random number and the effect symbol determination random number. Performs acquisition processing (S4501). Specifically, in this embodiment, as the random numbers for determining the advance notice effect, the random numbers for determining the conversation advance notice effect (also referred to as "random numbers for determining the first advance notice effect") and the random numbers for determining the step-up advance notice effect ("random number for determining the second advance notice effect"). Random number for determining pseudo-variation notice (also referred to as "random number for determining third notice effect"), random number for determining moving part notice (also referred to as "random number for determining fourth notice effect"), and advance notification effect decision It has a random number for use (“random number for determining the fifth notice effect”), and at the timing when the fluctuation start command is received from the main control unit 80, the processing of S4501 is performed, and a predetermined value (acquisition information) is obtained from each random number. Will be acquired. Further, in the advance notice effect setting process (S4506) described later, the advance notice effect or the like to be executed along with the variable display of the effect symbol (special symbol) is determined based on the acquired value.

Next, in S4502, the fluctuation start command is analyzed by the effect control microcomputer 91 (S4502). The variation start command includes a variation pattern specification command (information for designating the variation pattern) that specifies the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Then, the information for designating the fluctuation pattern includes the fluctuation pattern information (P1 to P17) shown in FIG. 9, the game state information for designating the current game state, the first special symbol hit / fail judgment or the second special symbol hit / miss judgment. (See FIG. 8). The variation pattern information, the game state information, the symbol information, and the like can be used in other processes other than the variation effect start process to be executed thereafter.

Next, in S4503, the effect control microcomputer 91 refers to the current mode status (S4503). The mode status is for determining the effect mode to be executed. The mode status is any value from "1" to "5", and each value is assigned to the effect modes A to E.

Here, the effect mode is an aspect of the effect in the image display device 7, and if the effect mode is different, a part or all of the effect modes of the game effect such as the advance notice effect and the reach effect are different. Specifically, the images displayed on the image display device 7 are different, such as different characters, items, and background images, and the effect symbol game effect can also be executed in a mode corresponding to the effect mode. Further, when a plurality of game effects (notice effect, reach effect, etc.) are provided, different game effects may be executed depending on the effect mode. In this embodiment, the effect mode A is executed when the low accuracy low base state is controlled, the effect mode B is executed when the effect mode B is controlled to the low accuracy high base state, and the effect mode C is the high accuracy high state. Executed when controlled to the base state. Therefore, by confirming which of the production modes A to C, the player can grasp the current gaming state.

Further, the effect mode D or the effect mode E is executed when the high accuracy low base state or the low accuracy low base state is controlled. Therefore, when the effect mode is D or E, even if the player confirms the effect mode, he / she can grasp whether the probability state of the special symbol winning / failing determination is in the high probability state or the low probability state (normal state). It's difficult to do. In that sense, the effect modes D and E can be said to be probability non-notification modes.

Next, in the S4504, for determining the variable effect pattern (also referred to as “effect pattern”) of the image display device 7, the board lamp 5, the movable decorative member 14, etc. controlled by the effect control microcomputer 91. Set the table (S4504). Specifically, as a table for determining the variation effect pattern, there is an effect symbol variation mode determination table for determining the variation mode of the effect symbol, although not shown, based on the variation pattern designation command received from the main control unit 80. Set. In this embodiment, different effect symbol variation mode determination tables are set depending on the game state and the effect mode.

Next, in S4505, based on the variation effect pattern table set in S4504, a variation effect pattern that matches the specified variation pattern and corresponds to the effect mode indicated by the referenced mode status is selected (S4505). Further, in S4505, among the variation effect patterns, the variation mode of the effect symbol displayed in the effect symbol display area 7b (the mode of the effect symbol game effect) is mainly determined. As a result, in the effect symbol game effect, when the reach effect is executed (reach-existing effect symbol game effect) and when the character effect performed using a specific character is executed (character effect symbol game effect), the reach effect and When the character effect is not executed (reach non-effect symbol game effect) is set.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, reach A, reach B, reach C, super reach (also referred to as “SP reach”) A, super reach B, super reach C, and characters are used as variations of the effect symbols. The effect is set, and in S4505, which of these effects is performed or which of these effects is not performed (this is also referred to as "normal variation") is determined based on the effect symbol variation mode determination table. Will be done.

Then, when the reach effect symbol game effect is executed, one of the reach effects is set based on the variation pattern designation command and the effect symbol variation mode determination table. In addition, when the reach A, reach B, or reach C (also referred to as "normal reach") is executed in the case where the play effect with reach is executed, the "reach flag" is turned ON and the "super reach flag" is executed. Is turned off, and when super reach A, super reach B, or super reach C is executed, the "super reach flag (also referred to as" SP reach flag ")" is turned on and the "reach flag" is turned off. In addition, when the effect with reach effect symbol game effect is not executed, the "reach flag" and the "super reach flag" are turned off. It is assumed that the state of these flags is determined and the advance notification effect described later is performed.

Here, when the super reach effect is executed as the game effect, the possibility of a big hit is higher than that when the normal reach effect is executed. That is, it can be said that the super reach production is a game production having a higher jackpot reliability (possibility of becoming a jackpot, feasibility of a jackpot game) than the reach (normal reach) production. Next, in S4506, setting processing such as a notice effect described later is performed. In the advance notice effect setting process (S4506), which of the advance notice effect types to be described later is mainly executed among the variable effect patterns based on the effect determination random number acquired in S4501. To determine. In addition, an effect symbol to be stopped and displayed (also referred to as a "stop effect symbol") is determined. By these processes (S4505 and S4506), the variation effect pattern is determined.

Next, in S4507, a variable effect start command for starting an effect symbol game effect or the like is set based on the variable effect pattern selected in S4505 and S4506 (S4507), and the variable effect start process is ended. Further, when the variable effect start command set in S4505 is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the CPU of the image control board 100 outputs a predetermined effect image from the ROM of the image control board 100. It is read out, and the effect symbol game effect is performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

The effect symbol that is stopped and displayed as a result of the effect symbol game effect is doublet of an odd number such as "777" when the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is 15R first jackpot, and when it is 15R second jackpot. Is doublet with an even numbered symbol such as "666". In addition, when one of the three production symbols such as "787" is out of reach, one of the three production symbols is different from the other production symbols, and when it is out of reach, three productions such as "635" are produced. At least one of the symbols is selected so that the other effect symbols are different from each other. Further, in the case of the 2R 3rd big hit and the small hit, a predetermined chance eye such as "135" or a dedicated symbol for the 2R 3rd big hit and the small hit such as "3 ☆ 3" may be stopped and displayed. That is, the same effect symbol is stopped and displayed at the time of the 2R third big hit and at the time of the small hit. Therefore, the player cannot determine whether the 2R third specific big hit or the small hit is obtained only by checking the stopped display of the effect symbol. It should be noted that the above-mentioned stop display mode of the effect symbol is an example, and when a big hit occurs, what is stopped and displayed as the stop effect symbol can be appropriately changed.

[Setting processing such as notice production]
As shown in FIGS. 46 and 47, in the advance notice effect setting process (S4506), first, it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned "specific flag" is ON (S4922). Then, when it is determined that the specific flag is ON (YES in S4922), that is, when it is determined that the load of the sub control unit is high (the amount of control processing related to the game effect performed by the sub control unit is large). In, a notice determination table for a high load state shown in FIG. 53 is set as a notice determination table for determining whether or not to execute the advance notice effect and, if so, which advance notice effect is to be executed. S4923), shift to the processing of S4901. Since a plurality of advance notice determination tables are set as the advance notice determination table for the high load state, it is also referred to as a "notice determination table group". On the other hand, when it is determined that the specific flag is OFF (NO in S4922), the notice determination table for the low load state shown in FIG. 52 is set as the advance notice determination table (S4924), and the process proceeds to S4901. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, the notice determination table for the low load state shown in FIG. 52 is used in the normal load state except for the state where the load of the sub control unit is particularly high, that is, the state in which the specific flag is ON. Use to determine the notice production.

More specifically, a notice to be used from the notice determination table shown in FIGS. 52 and 53 based on the state of the specific flag (ON or OFF) and the fluctuation pattern designation command received from the main control unit 80. The decision table is to be set. For example, when the fluctuation pattern information specified by the received fluctuation pattern specification command is "P1 (variation pattern 1)" and the specific flag is OFF, the notice determination table is used for the low load state shown in FIG. The conversation notice decision table for P1 and P9, the step-up notice decision table for P1 and P9, the cut-in notice decision table for P1 and P9, and the movable part notice decision table for P1 and P9 will be set.

Next, by the processing after S4901, the special symbol (effect symbol) changes based on the effect determination random number (random number for advance notice effect determination, random number for effect symbol determination) acquired in S4501 and the advance notice determination table set in S4504. The notice effect to be executed during the display and the effect symbol (stop effect symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the effect symbol is changed and displayed are determined.

In S4901, any of a plurality of conversation notice effects is executed based on the value of the conversation notice determination random number acquired in S4501 and the conversation notice determination table set in S4923 or S4924 (see FIG. 52 or FIG. 53). It is determined whether or not to execute the conversation notice effect (S4901), and the process proceeds to S4902. In this embodiment, there are four types of notice effects that constitute (belong to) the present notice effect type in the low load state, and one type of the advance notice effect that constitutes (belongs to) the present notice effect type in the high load state. Here, the random number for determining the conversation notice has a random number range of 0 to 99, and it is determined which of the four types of conversation notice effects is to be executed or whether the conversation notice effect is not to be executed, depending on the acquired value.

For example, when the fluctuation pattern information specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is P2 (variation pattern 2) and the specific flag is ON, the conversation notice determination for P2, P10, and P11 for the high load state shown in FIG. 53 is determined. The table is set. Then, if the value of the acquired random number for determining the conversation notice is any of "0 to 29, 60 to 99" (selection probability: 70%), the conversation notice effect is not executed. If the acquired value is any of "30 to 59" (30%), the conversation notice effect of the "chance" of rank K3 is displayed in the effect symbol display area 7b at a predetermined timing. As described above, in the state where the specific flag is ON (high load state), the execution mode of the conversation notice effect is only one mode of "chance". That is, it is determined whether or not to execute the conversation notice effect, and when it is determined to be executed, the "chance" conversation notice effect (specific notice effect) is always executed. Therefore, in this notice production type (conversation notice production), it can be said that the feasible notice production is fixed.

On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern information specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is P2 (variation pattern 2) and the specific flag is ON, it is for P2, P10 and P11 for the low load state (normal use) shown in FIG. Conversation notice decision table is set. Then, if the value of the acquired random number for determining the conversation notice is any of "0 to 19" (selection probability: 20%), the conversation notice effect is not executed. Further, when the acquired value is any of "20 to 24" (5%), the conversation notice effect of "Hello" of rank K1 is displayed in the effect symbol display area 7b at a predetermined timing. Further, if the acquired value is any of "25 to 29" (5%), the conversation notice effect of "Reach !?" of rank K2 is executed. This is a notice effect that notifies the player that there is a high possibility that reach will occur (for example, a reliability of about 50%). Further, if the acquired value is any of "30 to 59" (30%), the conversation notice effect of the "chance" of rank K3 is executed. This is a notice effect that notifies the player that there is a relatively high possibility of a big hit (for example, a reliability of about 20%). Further, if the acquired value is any of "60 to 99" (40%), the conversation notice effect of "super heat" of rank K4 is executed. This is a warning effect that notifies the player that there is a high possibility of a big hit (for example, a reliability of about 40%).

The ranks are set as K4> K3> K2> K1 in descending order of the possibility of a big hit (big hit reliability) when the advance notice effect is executed. Therefore, in this conversation notice production, the production mode of "super heat" related to rank K4 is the notice production showing the highest possibility of big hit (special game execution possibility). Further, since the fluctuation pattern P2 is a fluctuation pattern related to the jackpot, the feasibility of the conversation notice effect having a high jackpot reliability is set higher than the feasibility of the conversation notice effect having a low jackpot reliability. As described above, in the state where the specific flag is OFF (low load state), the execution mode of the conversation notice effect is the four modes shown in FIG. 52 (A). That is, even when it is determined that the conversation notice effect is to be executed, the notice effect in a different mode is executed depending on the acquired fluctuation pattern information and the value of the random number for determining the conversation notice.

If the S4902 determines whether or not to execute the conversation notice and determines that the conversation notice is to be executed (YES in S4902), the conversation notice flag ("first notice flag", "1st notice flag" indicating that the conversation notice is to be executed is executed. (Also referred to as "first notice information") is turned ON (S4903), the determined conversation notice effect is set (S4904), and the process proceeds to S4906. On the other hand, when it is determined that the conversation notice is not executed (NO in S4902), the conversation notice flag is turned OFF (if it is already OFF, it is left OFF) (S4905), and the process proceeds to S4906.

Next, in S4906, a plurality of step-up notices are given based on the value of the random number for step-up notice determination acquired in S4501 and the step-up notice determination table set in S4923 or S4924 (see FIG. 52 or FIG. 53). It is determined which of the effects is to be executed or whether the step-up notice effect is not to be executed (S4906), and the process proceeds to S4907. Further, in the present embodiment, there are five types of advance notice effects that constitute the present advance notice effect type regardless of whether the load is low or high. Here, the random number for the step-up notice determination has a random number range of 0 to 99, and it is determined which of the five types of step-up notice effects is to be executed or whether the step-up notice effect is not to be executed depending on the acquired value. do. Here, the "step-up notice effect" is an effect that changes in five stages from step 1 to step 5, and in the first embodiment, five characters (five types) perform steps 1 to step 5. One person is displayed in order, and all five people are gathered and displayed in step 5. Since this is a time-series production, it is said that the execution time becomes longer as the steps progress.

Since the specific method for determining the step-up notice effect is the same as the conversation notice effect described above, the description thereof will be omitted. The ranks are set as S5> S4> S3> S2> S1 in descending order of the possibility of a big hit (big hit reliability) when the advance notice effect is executed. In addition, when it is determined in S4907 that the step-up notice effect is to be executed (YES in S4907), the step-up notice flag ("second notice flag" and "second notice information" indicating that the step-up notice effect is to be executed is also used. Turn on (S4908), set the determined step-up notice effect (S4909), and shift to the processing of S4911. On the other hand, when it is determined that the step-up notice effect is not executed (NO in S4907), the step-up notice flag is turned OFF (if it is already OFF, it remains OFF) (S4910), and the process proceeds to S4911.

Next, in S4911, a plurality of cut-in notices are given based on the value of the random number for cut-in notice determination acquired in S4501 and the cut-in notice determination table set in S4923 or S4924 (see FIG. 52 or FIG. 53). It is determined which of the effects is to be executed or whether the cut-in notice effect is not to be executed (S4911), and the process proceeds to S4912. In this embodiment, there are three types of advance notice effects that constitute the present advance notice effect type in the low load state, and one type of advance notice effect that constitutes the present advance notice effect type in the high load state. Here, the random number range for the cut-in notice determination is 0 to 99, and it is determined which of the three types of cut-in notice effects is to be executed or whether the cut-in notice effect is not to be executed depending on the acquired value. do. Here, the "cut-in notice effect" is a notice effect indicating that the result of the special symbol hit / miss judgment may be a big hit, and is any of the characters A, B, or C at a predetermined timing during the variable display of the effect symbol. Is suddenly displayed (cut-in), and indicates the possibility of a big hit depending on the type and display timing of the displayed character. For example, it is assumed that the displayed character has a high possibility of becoming a big hit in the order of character C (high)> B (medium)> A (low) (special game execution possibility), and the character has a high possibility. The more it is displayed at the timing after the fluctuation display (the time closer to the stop display), the higher the possibility of becoming a big hit can be shown.

Since the specific method for determining the cut-in notice effect is the same as that for the conversation notice effect described above, the description thereof will be omitted. The ranks are set as C3> C2> C1 in descending order of the possibility of a big hit (big hit reliability) when the advance notice effect is executed. In addition, when it is determined in S4912 that the cut-in notice effect is to be executed (YES in S4912), the cut-in notice flag ("third notice flag" and "third notice information" indicating that the cut-in notice effect is to be executed is also used. Turn on (S4913), set the determined cut-in notice effect (S4914), and shift to the processing of S4916. On the other hand, when it is determined that the cut-in notice effect is not executed (NO in S4912), the cut-in notice flag is turned OFF (if it is already OFF, it remains OFF) (S4915), and the process proceeds to S4916.

Next, in S4916, based on the value of the random number for determining the movable part notice acquired in S4501 and the cut-in notice determination table set in S4923 or S4924 (see FIG. 52 or FIG. 53), a plurality of movable part notices are announced. It is determined which of the effects is to be executed, or whether to execute the moving part notice effect (S4916), and the process proceeds to S4917. In this embodiment, there are three types of advance notice effects that constitute the present advance notice effect type in the low load state, and two types of advance notice effects that form the main advance notice effect type in the high load state. Here, the random number for determining the movable part notice has a random number range of 0 to 99, and it is determined which of the three types of the movable part notice effect is executed or whether the movable part notice effect is not executed depending on the acquired value. do. Here, the "movable portion advance notice effect" is an effect performed by using the movable decorative member 14 that performs a predetermined operation, and a light emitting member provided on the movable decorative member 14 or visible through the movable decorative member 14 is a predetermined embodiment. It has an effect of emitting light in, an effect of operating the movable decorative member 14 in a predetermined operation mode, and an effect of combining light emission and operation.

Since the specific method for determining the moving part notice effect is the same as the conversation notice effect described above, the description thereof will be omitted. The ranks are set as M3> M2> M1 in descending order of the possibility of a big hit (big hit reliability) when the advance notice effect is executed. In addition, when it is determined in S4917 that the movable part notice effect is to be executed (YES in S4917), the movable part notice flag ("4th notice flag" and "4th notice information" indicating that the movable part notice effect is to be executed is also used. Turn on (S4918), set the determined movable part notice effect (S4919), and shift to the processing of S4921. On the other hand, when it is determined that the movable part notice effect is not executed (NO in S4917), the movable part notice flag is turned OFF (if it is already OFF, it remains OFF) (S4920), and the process proceeds to S4921.

In S4921, the effect symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined based on the value of the random number for determining the effect symbol acquired in S4501 and the effect symbol determination table (not shown), and the determined effect symbol (stop effect symbol) is set (S4926). ), Finish the process.

As described above, the notice determination table used in the low load state (specific flag OFF state) shown in FIG. 52 and the notice determination table used in the high load state (specific flag ON state) shown in FIG. 53 are the notices to be determined. The number of production types (conversation notice production, step-up notice production, cut-in notice production, and moving part notice production) is the same, but the number of notice productions to be decided is different. Specifically, in the advance notice determination table for the high load state, the number of advance notice effects belonging to the conversation advance notice effect type is reduced from 4 to 1, and the number of advance notice effects belonging to the step-up advance notice effect type remains unchanged at 5, and the cut-in The number of advance notice effects belonging to the advance notice effect type has been reduced from three to one, and the number of advance notice effects belonging to the movable part advance notice effect type has been reduced from three to two. That is, the number of advance notice effects to be decided has been reduced from 15 to 9. As a result, in the high load state (specific flag ON state), the number of processes of the advance notice effect determination process (also referred to as “game effect determination process”) for determining the advance notice effect is smaller than that in the low load state (specific flag OFF state). do. That is, the control load applied to the sub-control unit by the control process (notice effect determination unit) of the advance notice effect determination process is better when the advance notice effect is determined using the advance notice determination table for the low load state shown in FIG. , It is higher than the case where the advance notice effect is determined using the advance notice determination table for the high load state shown in FIG. 53.

Therefore, during the execution of the ball entry start process in which the specific flag is turned ON, the amount of control related to the game effect excluding the advance notice effect determination process by the sub control unit is increasing (becomes a high load state). A low-load control process shall be performed as the advance notice effect determination process executed by the sub-control unit. Further, when the amount of control related to the game effect other than the advance notice effect determination process by the sub control unit is not so large (in a low load state), the load of the advance notice effect determination process is relatively high, but the game effect to be determined is determined. Control processing using a large number of advance notice determination tables shall be performed. This prevents the load on the sub-control unit (CPU of the sub-control unit) from becoming excessive, and makes it possible to execute a game production (notice production, etc.) with a wide variety of tastes and enhances the game interest. It becomes possible. Further, this makes it possible to optimize the control related to the game effect executed by the sub control unit.

Further, in the first embodiment, although the number of advance notice effects to be determined in the high load state is reduced, the number of advance notice determination tables, that is, the number of feasible advance notice effect types is not reduced. As a result, during the variable display of one effect symbol, the number of game effects (number of advance notice effect types) that can be executed during the variable display is the same regardless of whether the load is low or high. (In the first embodiment, 0 to 4 notice effects (notice effect types) can be executed in any state). Further, the maximum number of game effects (maximum number of advance notice effect types) that can be executed during the variable display of 1 effect symbol is the same regardless of whether the load is low or high. The number (in the first embodiment, a maximum of four notice effects can be executed in any state). As a result, in a high load state (a state in which the specific flag is ON), the number of advance notice effects to be determined is reduced, but by maintaining the number of feasible game effects, the game interest is reduced as much as possible. It becomes possible to prevent.

However, as shown in FIGS. 52 and 53, in the notice determination table for the high load state, the notice effect types (conversation notice effect, cut-in notice effect, movable part notice effect) in which the number of advance notice effects is decreasing , The feasibility of the advance notice effect of the notice effect type is low. Therefore, the case of determining the advance notice effect to be executed based on the notice determination table for the low load state is 1 more than the case of determining the advance notice effect to be executed based on the advance notice determination table for the high load state. There is a high possibility that a large number of advance notice effects will be executed during the variable display. However, by not reducing the number that can be executed (maximum number), it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the game interest as much as possible.

[Execution processing such as notice production]
Next, the execution process (S4406) such as the advance notice effect will be described with reference to FIG. 48. The present advance notice effect execution process (S4406) is a process that is executed when it is determined that there is an unexecuted advance notice effect or the like while the variation effect is being executed (the effect symbol is being displayed in a variable manner). First, S5101 determines whether or not the start time of the advance notice production has arrived (S5101). The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment has a conversation notice flag, a step-up notice flag, a cut-in notice flag, and a movable part notice flag as notice flags, and among the notice effects shown by these, the pachinko game machine 1 has not been executed. It is determined whether or not there is a notice effect for which the execution time (start time) has arrived, which is a notice effect (the execution time has not arrived). Further, the execution timing of each of these advance notice effects to be executed is set in the advance notice effect setting process (S4506), and the execution time is controlled by a predetermined timer means possessed by the sub control unit. Then, when the count value of the timer means indicates the start time of the predetermined advance notice effect, it is determined that the start time of the advance notice effect has arrived. In addition to the advance notice effect, it may be determined whether or not the start time of another game effect (lamp effect, background effect, game mode effect, etc.) has arrived, and the start and end of the game effect may be controlled.

When it is determined by S5101 that there is a notice effect whose start time has arrived (YES in S5101), a notice effect start command (conversation notice start command, step-up notice start) for executing the rehearsal effect whose start time has arrived. Command, cut-in notice start command, moving part notice start command, etc.) are set (S5102), and the process proceeds to S5103. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no notice production etc. for which the start time has arrived in S5101 (NO in S5101), the process shifts to the processing of S5103. The advance notice effect start command set in the process of S5102 is transmitted to the image control board 100 (image control unit) by the command transmission process (S4006). Then, the CPU of the image control board 100 that has received the advance notice effect start command reads out the effect image corresponding to the advance notice effect related to the advance notice effect start command from the ROM of the image control board 100, and displays the display screen of the image display device 7. It is displayed on 7a, and a production pattern game production is performed.

In S5103, it is determined whether or not there is a notice effect being executed (S5103), and if it is determined that there is no notice effect being executed (NO in S5103), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is an advance notice effect or the like being executed in S5103 (YES in S5103), it is then determined whether or not the end time of the execution period of the advance notice effect or the like being executed has arrived (S5104). Since the execution period is determined for each advance notice effect, the execution period is controlled by a predetermined timer means possessed by the sub-control unit, so that the count value of the timer means determines the end time of the predetermined advance notice effect being executed. When indicated, it is determined that the end time of the advance notice production has arrived.

When it is determined by S5104 that the end time of the ongoing notice effect, etc. has arrived (YES in S5104), the notice effect end command (conversation notice end command, step up) for ending the notice effect whose end time has arrived. Set the notice end command, cut-in notice end command, movable part notice end command, etc. (S5105), and finish the process. In addition, even if it is determined in S5104 that the end time has not arrived for the advance notice production, etc. being executed (NO in S5104), the process is completed. The advance notice effect end command set in the process of S5105 is transmitted to the image control board 100 (image control unit) by the command transmission process (S4006). Then, the CPU of the image control board 100 that has received the advance notice effect end command finishes displaying the advance notice effect related to the advance notice effect end command, and performs the effect symbol game effect. Here, in the first embodiment, the advance notice effect or the like being executed is terminated by the advance notice effect or the like end command, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. Regarding the end control of the advance notice effect, etc., for some or all of these advance notice effects, etc., the advance notice effect is started based on the advance notice effect, etc. start command, regardless of the advance notice effect, etc. end command (without providing the advance notice effect, etc. end command). Then, the advance notice production may be terminated when a predetermined production time elapses.

[Fluctuating production end processing]
As shown in FIG. 49, in the variation effect end process (S4408), first, in S4601, the effect control microcomputer 91 analyzes the variation stop command (S4601) and refers to the mode status (S4602). Next, the S4603 determines whether or not the mode status is "1", that is, whether or not the effect mode is the effect mode A (S4603). Then, if the mode status is "1", the process proceeds to S4607. On the other hand, if the mode status is not "1", the value "M" of the effect mode counter corresponding to the current effect mode is subtracted by 1 (S4604), and whether or not the value "M" after the subtraction is "0" is determined. Judge (S4605). If it is determined in S4605 that the value "M" after subtraction is not "0" (NO in S4605), the process proceeds to S4607. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value "M" after subtraction is "0" (YES in S4605), "1" is set in the mode status to set the effect mode to the effect mode A (S4606), and S4607 Move to processing. In the S4607, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets a variable effect end command for ending the effect symbol game effect (S4607), and ends the process.

[Special game production selection process]
As shown in FIG. 50, in the special game effect selection process (S4410), first, the opening command is analyzed by S4701 (S4701). Next, the S4702 performs a special game effect pattern selection process for selecting a pattern (effect mode) of the special game effect to be executed during the special game (big hit game or small hit game) based on the analyzed opening command (S4702). This special game effect is executed during the opening period before the opening of the special game opening and during the opening of the large winning opening and during the interval between the opening and opening (between rounds). Includes post-start production and. Next, in the S4703, an opening effect start command for starting the special game effect based on the special game effect pattern selected by the effect control microcomputer 91 is set (S4703), and the process is completed.

When the opening effect start command set in S4703 is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the CPU of the image control board 100 reads a predetermined opening effect image from the ROM of the image control board 100. The image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. As an opening effect, for example, an effect indicating that a right-handed game is to be performed is displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, as a special game effect selected when executing a special game as a 2R third big hit or a small hit, in the opening effect, a game ball is aimed at the second big prize device 36 (the second big prize opening 35). It is preferable that the one that displays the fact that the game is to be fired (the fact that the right-handed game is performed) is displayed on the display screen 7a. That is, at a predetermined timing (opening period) before the opening of the second prize-winning device 36 (second prize-winning opening 35), an effect of notifying that the right-handed game should be started is performed in advance. NS. As a result, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball will enter the second large winning opening 35 during the short opening time of the second large winning opening 35, which is a total of 1.8 seconds. On the other hand, when the special game as the first big hit of 15R is executed, the opening effect without such a notification (notification that the right-handed hit is continued before the opening of the second big winning opening 35) is selected. It has become like. Even when the special game related to the 2R third big hit or small hit is executed, the opening effect that does not include such a launch notification may be selected.

[Ending effect selection process]
As shown in FIG. 51, in the ending effect selection process (S4412), first, the ending command is analyzed in S4801 (S4801). Then, in S4802, the mode status change process is performed (S4802). In the mode status change process (S4802), if the special game currently being executed is a big hit game related to the 15R second big hit, the mode status is set to "2". Further, if the jackpot game is related to the 15R first jackpot and there is no V passage during the V valid period, the mode status is set to "2". Further, if the jackpot game is related to the 15R first jackpot and there is a V pass during the V valid period, the mode status is set to "3". If it is a hit game (big hit game) related to the 2R third big hit or small hit, the mode status is set to "4" or "5". The initial value of the mode status is "1".

Due to such a change (setting) of the mode status, the effect mode in the effect symbol game effect executed along with the variable display of the special symbol after the end of the special game (big hit game, hit game) is changed (after setting). It is said to be a production mode corresponding to the mode status of. That is, in the judgment of whether or not the special symbol is correct, if the 15R first big hit and there is a V passage during the V valid period of the special game, the first (first) special symbol change after the end of the special game. Along with the display, the effect mode C is executed. As a result, the player is notified that the current gaming state is a high probability state.

In addition, if the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is a 2R third big hit or a small hit, the effect mode D or E is accompanied by the variation display of the first (first) special symbol after the end of the special game. Will be executed. As a result, the player is notified that the current gaming state may be a high-probability state or a low-probability state, that is, a high-probability state may be possible. Further, this effect mode D or E is in a high probability state after the special game related to the 2R third big hit, but may be in a low probability state after the special game related to the small hit. A person cannot be definitively determined to be in a high probability state. Therefore, this effect mode can also be referred to as a probability non-notification mode.

Furthermore, in the mode status change process (S4802), since an upper limit is set for the number of times of variation display of the special symbol in the changed effect mode, the upper limit number of times is set to the value "M" of the effect mode counter corresponding to the changed effect mode. To set. Specifically, when setting the effect mode B, the value "Mb" of the effect mode counter is set to 100 (when V is not passed during the 15R second jackpot and V valid period) or 140 (15R first jackpot and V is valid). When there is no V passage during the period) is set. When setting the effect mode C, 140 is set in the value "Mc" of the effect mode counter. Further, when setting the effect mode D or E, 30 is set in the value "Md" or "Me" of the effect mode counter.

Next, in S4803, the effect control microcomputer 91 refers to the mode status (S4803), and then in S4804, the effect pattern (effect mode) of the ending effect is selected based on the analyzed ending command and the referenced mode status. Performs the ending effect pattern selection process (S4804). The ending effect is an effect to be executed during the ending period after all the large winning opening opening processes in the special game are completed. Then, in S4805, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets an ending effect start command for starting the ending effect based on the selected ending effect pattern (S4805), and ends the process.

Further, when the ending effect start command set in S4805 is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the CPU of the image control board 100 outputs a predetermined ending effect image to the ROM of the image control board 100. Is read from, and is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Here, in this embodiment, when the special game related to the 15R first jackpot is executed and V is passed during the V valid period, the characters "effect mode C rush" are displayed on the display screen 7a as the ending effect. Is selected. Further, as the ending effect for the special game related to the 2R third big hit or small hit, one that displays the characters "effect mode D rush" or "effect mode E rush" on the display screen 7a is selected.

As described in detail above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment is provided with a specific flag for determining whether or not the amount of control processing related to the game effect excluding the game effect determination process of the sub-control unit is large, and is related to the game effect. When the control processing amount is determined to be larger than the predetermined amount (during the execution of the effect start processing at the time of entering the ball), the specific flag is turned ON, and when the specific flag is ON, the game effect is determined. It is possible to prevent the load of the sub-control unit from becoming excessive by performing control processing with a small amount of processing (low control load) as processing. In addition, when the specific flag is OFF, as a game effect determination process, a control process with a larger amount of processing (higher control load) than when the specific flag is ON is performed to execute various game effects with high taste. Is possible.

As a result, the control load (control state) of the sub-control unit balances the control load between the processing amount of the game effect determination process and the control processing amount related to the game effect excluding it, and the game effect control unit is excessive. It is possible to execute various game effects without imposing a heavy load. again,
It is possible to control the optimum game production. In addition, by providing a characteristic configuration that is not found in conventional pachinko gaming machines, it is possible to achieve unique effects that conventional pachinko gaming machines do not have, or significant effects compared to conventional pachinko gaming machines. Become.

Next, the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, in which the notice effect setting process of the first embodiment and the notice determination table for the high load state (specific flag is ON state) are different, will be described. In the second embodiment, when the load is low (the specific flag is OFF), the notice effect to be executed is determined based on the notice determination table for the low load state shown in FIG. 52, which is the same as in the first embodiment. On the other hand, when the load is high (the specific flag is ON), unlike the first embodiment, the notice effect to be executed is determined based on the notice determination table for the high load state shown in FIG. 56.

As shown in FIG. 56, the advance notice determination table for the high load state of the second embodiment is limited to the cut-in advance notice determination table, and the (executable) advance notice effect type to be determined is only the cut-in advance notice. Will be done. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 52, the notice decision table for the low load state is a conversation notice decision table, a step-up notice decision table, a cut-in notice decision table, and a movable part notice decision table, which are subject to decision. There are four types of (executable) notice effects: conversation notice, step-up notice, cut-in notice, and moving part notice. That is, in the high load state in the second embodiment, the number of advance notice effect types to be determined by the sub control unit (notice effect determination unit) is smaller than that in the low load state (4 types → 1 type). Further, in a high load state, it can be said that the feasible advance notice effect type is fixed to one type. As a result, it is possible to significantly reduce the amount of processing in the advance notice effect determination process, and it is possible to prevent the control load from becoming excessive when the control load of the sub control unit is high.

Further, in the high load state in the second embodiment, when it is determined that the notice effect is to be executed, the number of the notice effect types that can be executed is reduced as compared with the low load state, and a specific notice effect type (cut-in notice effect) is used. ) Is executed, but the number of (executable) game effects included in the specific advance notice effect type remains three, which is the same as the advance notice decision table for the low load state, so that the game effects are diverse. It also has a certain effect in terms of conversion, and it is possible to secure a game interest.

Next, the advance notice effect setting process (S4506) of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 54 and 55. First, in S4951, it is determined whether or not the specific flag is ON (S4951), and when it is determined that the specific flag is ON, that is, it is in a high load state (YES in S4951), the conversation notice determination and step-up are performed. The advance notice determination table for the high load state shown in FIG. 56 is set (S4974), and the process proceeds to S4967, without executing the advance notice determination, the movable part advance notice determination, or the like. Therefore, in the second embodiment, when the specific flag is ON, no matter what kind of information the fluctuation pattern information is (even the information related to the big hit), the conversation notice effect, the step-up notice effect, and the movable None of the club notice productions will be performed. Further, when the specific flag is ON, the process shifts to the S4967 process without performing the processes of S4952 to S4965, so that the processing amount of the advance notice effect setting process (game effect determination process) can be significantly reduced. It is possible to prevent the control load of the sub control unit from becoming excessive.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S4951 that the specific flag is not ON (NO in S4951), the notice determination table for the low load state shown in FIG. 52 is set (S4973). Next, the process related to the conversation notice determination for determining whether or not to execute the conversation notice effect is executed (S4952 to S4956). Similar to the notice effect setting process (see FIG. 46) of the first embodiment, this process determines whether or not to execute the conversation notice effect based on the notice determination table or the like shown in FIG. 52, and if so, which case. It determines whether to execute the advance notice effect, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, in S4957, the process related to the step-up notice determination for determining whether or not to execute the step-up notice effect is executed (S4957 to S4961). Since this process is also the same control process as the notice effect setting process (see FIG. 46) of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Next, in S4962, the process related to the movable portion advance notice determination for determining whether or not to execute the movable portion advance notice effect is executed (S4962 to 4966). Since this process is also the same control process as the notice effect setting process (see FIG. 46) of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in the second embodiment, the low load state (specification) is obtained for three types of advance notice effect types (conversation advance notice effect type, step-up advance notice effect type, and moving part advance notice effect type) out of the four types of advance notice effect types. Only when the flag is OFF), it is subject to determination (in the advance notice effect determination unit) in the advance notice effect setting process. A plurality of advance notice effects having different execution modes, including these four types of advance notice effect types, are stored in the advance notice effect storage unit (sub-control unit). As a result, it is possible to diversify the variation of the game effect in the low load state, and to execute the game effect with high taste without increasing the control load on the sub control unit.

Next, in S4967, the cut-in notice determination is executed. When the specific flag is ON, whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect based on the cut-in notice determination table for the high load state shown in FIG. 56 set in S4974, and which cut-in notice effect is executed. Is determined (S4967). When the specific flag is OFF, whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect based on the cut-in notice determination table shown in FIG. 52 (C) set in S4973, and which cut-in notice effect is executed. Is determined (S4967). Next, in S4968, it is determined whether or not to execute the cut-in notice (S4968), and if it is determined to execute the cut-in notice (YES in S4968), the cut-in notice flag indicating that the cut-in notice is executed is set. Turn it on (S4969), set the decided cut-in notice effect (S4970), and shift to the processing of S4972. On the other hand, when it is determined that the cut-in notice effect is not executed (NO in S4968), the cut-in notice flag is turned OFF (if it is already OFF, it remains OFF) (S4971), and the process proceeds to S4972. Since S4972 is the same control process as the advance notice effect setting process (see FIG. 46) of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in the second embodiment, when the sub-control unit considers that the amount of control related to the game effect excluding the advance notice effect determination process is larger than the predetermined amount, that is, when the specific flag is ON, The number of advance notice effect types that can be determined in the advance notice determination table for the high load state is reduced and fixed to a specific advance notice effect type (cut-in advance notice effect in Example 2). As a result, it is possible to remarkably reduce the amount of processing related to the advance notice effect determination process and prevent the control load of the sub control unit from becoming excessive.

Next, the pachinko gaming machine of Example 3 will be described. The third embodiment is different from the first embodiment when it is considered that the control related to the game effect of the sub control unit is more than the predetermined amount, that is, when the specific flag is turned on. In the first embodiment, the specific flag is turned ON while the execution of the ball entry start processing (S4402) performed when the sub control unit receives the start ball entry command from the main control unit is set as a high load state. In the third embodiment, the low load state is set during the execution of the special game (big hit game), and the high load state is set when the special game is not executed. It should be noted that even when the special game is not being executed, the effect symbol (special symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner, and the control process related to the effect symbol (special symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner (such a period is referred to as "variable display". (Also referred to as "in processing") may be in a high load state.

During the execution of the big hit game, the production for the big hit game such as the round effect is executed, but since the effect symbol (special symbol) is not displayed in a variable manner, the control load such as the variable effect start process and the variable effect end process is high. Does not perform the predetermined control process. Therefore, in the third embodiment, it can be said that the load of the control processing of the sub control unit is lower during the big hit game than during the “variation display processing”. Therefore, during the fluctuation display processing, the specific flag is turned on to indicate that the load is high, and during the execution of the jackpot game, the specific flag is turned off to indicate that the load is low. Then, it is possible to determine the advance notice effect to be executed based on different notice determination tables depending on whether the specific flag is in the ON state or the specific flag is in the OFF state. This point is the same as in Example 1 and Example 2.

In the third embodiment, when a predetermined timing during the special game, for example, when a start ball entry command is received, when a predetermined round (for example, 5R, 10R, etc.) is started, or when a predetermined round is finished. , It is assumed that the advance notice effect determination process (game effect determination process) is performed. It is also possible to execute the advance notice effect determined by the advance notice effect determination process during the special game during the special game or during the variable display of the effect symbol. Here, it is assumed that the advance notice production includes the above-mentioned advance production. Then, for example, when the advance notice effect is determined during the special game, the advance notice effect to be executed is determined using the advance notice determination table shown in FIG. 52, and when the advance notice effect is determined during the variable display process, FIG. 53 The advance notice effect to be executed may be determined using the advance notice determination table shown in.

Further, in the third embodiment, since the advance notice effect is determined using a notice determination table different from that during the variable display process during the big hit game, it is possible to execute a rehearsal effect that is not a decision target during the variable display process. Therefore, since it has a dedicated advance notice effect that can be executed only during the big hit game, it is possible to diversify the execution mode of the game effect during the big hit game and enhance the game interest.

Next, a process of turning the specific flag ON or OFF in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 and 58. In the third embodiment, the specific flag is turned on by the process when the power is turned on, and when the power is turned on, the state is determined to be a high load state. Then, in the special game effect selection process (S4410) executed with the start of the big hit game shown in FIG. 57, a process of turning off the specific flag is performed. As a result, it becomes a state determined to be a low load state.

[Special game production selection process]
As shown in FIG. 57, in the special game effect selection process (S4410), first, the opening command is analyzed (S4701), then the special game effect pattern selection process (S4702) is performed, and then the opening command effect start command set process is performed. (S4703) and move to the processing of S4704. Since the processes of S4701 to S4703 are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Then, in S4704, the specific flag is turned off (S4704), and the process is completed. By the process of turning off this specific flag, it is determined that the execution of the special game is in the low load state (first control state). Then, when the advance notice effect determination process is performed during the special game, it is possible to determine the advance notice effect that is not executed during the variable display process as the advance notice effect (game effect). In addition, the advance notice effect determined during this special game may be executed during the special game. That is, if the control process can determine the high-load game effect in the low-load state, it is desirable to execute the high-load game effect during the low-load state. This makes it possible to execute control related to the optimum game effect.

[Ending effect selection process]
Next, a process of turning on the specific flag with the end of the special game will be described. As shown in FIG. 58, in the ending effect selection process (S4412), first, the specific flag is turned ON (S4806), and the process proceeds to the process of S4801. By the process of turning on this specific flag, it is determined that the high load state (second control state) is after the end of the special game. Then, when the advance notice effect determination process is performed after the end of this special game, the advance notice effect is determined using the advance notice determination table for the high load state as the advance notice effect (game effect). Further, the advance notice effect determined when the special game is not executed (high load state in which the specific flag is ON) may be executed during the state (state in which the specific flag is ON). When the advance notice effect determined in the high load state is executed in the low load state (during the special game), various advance notice effects (dedicated advance notice effects) can be determined (executable) for a limited period of the low load state. It cannot be used effectively. Therefore, it is preferable to execute the advance notice effect determined in the high load state during the high load state.

As described above, in the third embodiment, the execution of the special game is set as the low load state, and the special advance notice effect that is not the decision target during the variable display of the identification information is set as the decision target. This makes it possible to enhance the interest of the game during the special game. As another aspect of the setting control of the specific flag, a state in which the specific flag is ON is determined as a low load state, and a state in which the specific flag is OFF is determined as a high load state. The mode may be such that the flag is turned ON.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment described above, the pachinko gaming machine includes a advance notice effect determination unit that determines the game effect to be executed and a advance notice effect execution unit that executes the game effect determined by the advance notice effect determination unit, and is in a low load state ( As a game effect to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit in the first control state), a game effect not to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit in the high load state (second control state) may be provided. ..

Further, the game effect to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit in the low load state may be different from the game effect to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit in the high load state. Further, the advance notice effect execution unit may execute the game effect determined by the advance notice effect determination unit in the low load state in the low load state. Further, the advance notice effect execution unit may execute the game effect determined by the advance notice effect determination unit in the high load state in the high load state. Further, the low load state (first control state) is a predetermined time when the special game is being executed, and the high load state (second control state) is a predetermined time when the special game is not being executed. May be good.

In addition, it is equipped with a start port through which a game ball can enter, and as a control related to the game effect (effect control process), it has a control related to the game effect at the time of ball entry, which is executed based on the ball entering the start port, and is in a low load state. Is a predetermined time when the control related to the game effect at the time of entering the ball (the effect control process at the time of entering the ball, the notice effect control process at the time of entering the ball) is being executed, and the high load state controls the game effect at the time of entering the ball. It may be a predetermined time when it is not executed. Further, as the control related to the game effect, it has the control related to the game effect at the start of the change (the effect control process at the start of the change, the notice effect control process at the start of the change) that is executed based on the start of the variation display of the identification information, and is in a low load state. Is a predetermined time when the control related to the game effect at the start of fluctuation is being executed, and the high load state may be a predetermined time when the control related to the game effect at the start of fluctuation is not being executed.

Next, the pachinko gaming machine of Example 4 will be described. In the fourth embodiment, when it is considered that the control related to the game effect of the sub control unit is more than the predetermined amount, that is, when the specific flag is turned on, the control is different from the first and third embodiments. In the fourth embodiment, the high load state is set during the execution of the variation effect start process, and the low load state is set at other times. The variation effect start process is a process executed when the sub control unit receives a variation start command from the main control unit, and among them, a random number acquisition process for determining the effect, a variation effect pattern selection process, a setting process such as a notice effect, etc. , It is necessary to perform a lot of processing, and it is a control processing with a relatively large amount of processing.

In the fourth embodiment, the specific flag is turned ON during the execution of the variation effect start process having a large amount of processing, and the specific flag is turned OFF when the variation effect start process is not executed. Further, since the advance notice effect determination process is performed along with the change effect start process, the advance notice effect determination process executed during the change effect start process uses the advance notice determination table for the high load state (for the second control state). The advance notice effect is determined by using the advance notice effect determination process, which is executed when the variable effect start process is not in progress (for example, during a big hit game), using the advance notice determination table for the low load state (for the first control state). It is possible to determine the advance notice production. As a result, it is possible to prevent the processing load of the sub-control unit from becoming excessive, and to perform various game effects by controlling the optimum game effects.

[Variation production start processing]
Next, a process of turning the specific flag ON or OFF in accordance with the variation effect start process will be described. As shown in FIG. 59, in the variation effect start processing (S4402), first, the specific flag is turned ON (S4508), and the process shifts to the processing of S4501. By the process of turning on this specific flag, it is determined that the high load state (second control state) is being executed during the execution of the variation effect start process. Then, in the fourth embodiment, when the advance notice effect determination process is performed during the execution of the variable effect start process, the advance notice effect determined by using the advance notice determination table for the high load state is executed as the advance notice effect (game effect). Will be done.

Next, processing is performed in order from S4501 to S4507. Since these processes are the same as the variation effect start process of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Then, following S4507, in S4509, the specific flag is turned off (S4509), and the process is completed. By the process of turning off this specific flag, it is determined that the load state is low (first control state) after the variation effect start process is completed (when the variation effect start process is not performed). Then, in the fourth embodiment, if the advance notice effect determination process is performed when the change effect start process is not executed, the advance notice determined by using the advance notice determination table for the low load state as the advance notice effect (game effect). The production will be executed.

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the high load state is set during the execution of the variable effect start process, the low load state is set when the variable effect start process is not executed, and the execution is performed using different notice determination tables. The notice production is decided. In addition, in the low load state, a dedicated advance notice effect that is not a decision target in the high load state is set as the decision target. This prevents the processing load of the sub-control unit from becoming excessive, and by executing the control related to the optimum game effect, it is possible to execute various game effects.

Next, the pachinko gaming machine of Example 5 will be described. FIG. 62 shows the design arrangements 281L, 281C, and 281R of the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R of the pachinko gaming machine of the fifth embodiment. Similar to the first embodiment, the stop mode (hit stop mode, disengagement stop mode) of the effect symbol of the fifth embodiment is composed of three digits (three) effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. The symbol array 281L (281) shown in FIG. 62A is a symbol constituting the left effect symbol 8L in the stop mode. Further, the symbol array 281C shown in FIG. 62B is a symbol constituting the medium effect symbol 8C in the stop mode. Further, the symbol array 281R shown in FIG. 62 (c) is a symbol constituting the right effect symbol 8R in the stop mode.

One effect symbol selected from the left pattern array 281L is the left effect symbol 8R. Further, the left symbol array 281L is composed of nine (9 types) production symbols of "0, 1, 2, 0, 4, 5, 6, 0, 8". Then, on the left side of the display screen 7a, the effect symbol 8L of the left symbol array 281L is repeatedly and variablely displayed in the order of 0 → 1 → 2 → 0 → 4 → 5 → 6 → 0 → 8 from the top to the bottom. .. The left symbol array 281L has three "0" symbols 282 (zero symbol, special symbol, specific symbol) having different display modes. The “0” symbol 282 in the shaded display mode is referred to as the first zero symbol 282a. The "0" symbol 282 in the vertical line display mode is referred to as a second zero symbol 282b. The "0" symbol 282 in the horizontal line display mode is referred to as a third zero symbol 282c. That is, the three (plurality) "0" symbols (zero symbol, special symbol, specific symbol) included in the left symbol array 281L show the same numerical information (information), and the display modes are different. Can identify this.

Further, one effect symbol selected from the middle symbol array 281C is the middle effect symbol 8C. Further, the middle symbol array 281C is composed of nine (9 types) effect symbols as in the left symbol array 281L, and has three "0" symbols 282 having different display modes. Further, one effect symbol selected from the right symbol array 281R is the right effect symbol 8R. Further, the right symbol array 281R is also composed of nine (9 types) effect symbols as in the left symbol array 281L, and also has three "0" symbols 282 having different display modes.

In the embodiment of the fifth embodiment, the number of symbols constituting the left symbol array 281L, the middle symbol array 281C, and the right symbol array 281R are the same, and the number of "0" symbols 282 is also the same. The embodiment described above has been described. Not limited to such an embodiment, the number of symbols constituting the left symbol array 281L, the middle symbol array 281C, and the right symbol array 281R may be different, or the number of "0" symbols 282 may be different. For example, the number of effect symbols constituting the left symbol array may be 9 (9 types), and the number of effect symbols constituting the middle symbol array may be 10 (9 types). Further, the left symbol array and the right symbol array include the first zero symbol, the second zero symbol, and the third zero symbol, and the middle symbol array includes only the first zero symbol and the second zero symbol as "0" symbols. It may be configured to include.

Next, the "0" symbol 282 (zero symbol, special symbol, specific symbol) will be described. The "0" symbol 282, which is included in each of the plurality of symbol arrays 281, is a change symbol whose display mode can be changed when a specific condition is satisfied. Further, when the specific condition is satisfied, some or all "0" symbols 282 included in each symbol array 281 are not included in the symbol array 281 at a predetermined timing during the variable display of the effect symbols. It changes to (change symbol, second specific symbol). Specifically, the symbol array 281 before the specific condition is satisfied (at the start of fluctuation, before the change) is "0, 1, 2, 0, 4, 5, 6, 0, 8", and is 0 to 8. Among the consecutive numbers, there are no numbers "3" and "7", and the symbol at that position is the "0" symbol. Then, based on the establishment of the specific condition, the "0" symbol is added to the "3" and / or "7" symbol (change symbol, second specific symbol) that was not included in the symbol array 281 before the change. Change.

Further, in the execution mode of the fifth embodiment, a plurality of change modes (change patterns) are used as modes in which the "0" symbol 282 changes to the change symbol 283 (second specific symbol, "3" and "7" symbol). Have. FIG. 63 shows an example of a variation mode of the left symbol array 281L. In the change mode of FIG. 63 (a), the first zero symbol 282a does not change, the second zero symbol 282b changes to the first change symbol 283a (“3” symbol), and the third zero symbol 282c changes second. The symbol 283b (“7” symbol) is changed, and the symbol array 281L after the change becomes “0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8”. Then, on the left side of the display screen 7a, the effect symbol 8L of the left symbol array 281L after the change is repeated in the order of 0 → 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 → 7 → 8 from the top to the bottom. Variable display.

Further, in the change mode of FIG. 63 (b), the first zero symbol 282a changes to the first change symbol 283a (“3” symbol), and the second zero symbol 282b is the first zero symbol 282a as in the case of the first zero symbol 282a. The changed symbol 283a (“3” symbol) is changed, the third zero symbol 282c is changed to the second changed symbol 283b (“7” symbol), and the changed symbol array 281L is “3, 1, 2, 3”. 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 ". Then, on the left side of the display screen 7a, the effect symbol 8L of the left symbol array 281L after the change is repeated in the order of 3 → 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 → 7 → 8 from the top to the bottom. Variable display. In addition, since a plurality of first change symbols 283a (“3” symbols) are included, the expectation that the first change symbol 283a (“3” symbol) with high jackpot reliability will be stopped and displayed will increase, and the game will be enhanced.

Further, as for the change mode of FIG. 63 (c), the first zero symbol 282a, the second zero symbol 282b, and the third zero symbol 282c (“0” symbol) are all the second change symbol 283b (“7””. The symbol array 281L after the change is changed to "7, 1, 2, 7, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8". Then, on the left side of the display screen 7a, the effect symbol 8L of the left symbol array 281L after the change is repeated in the order of 7 → 1 → 2 → 7 → 4 → 5 → 6 → 7 → 8 from the top to the bottom. Variable display. In addition, since a plurality of second change symbols 283a (“7” symbols) are included, the expectation that the second change symbol 283b (“7” symbol) with high jackpot reliability will be stopped and displayed will increase, and the game will be enhanced. Although the three aspects of FIGS. 63 (a) to 63 (c) have been described, all of the "0" symbols change to the first change symbol 283a ("3" symbol), and only a part of the change symbols ("3" symbols). It also has other modes not shown, such as a mode of changing to the first change symbol 283a and / and the second change symbol 283b).

Further, the variation mode of the middle symbol array 281C and the right symbol array 281R is omitted, but the medium symbol array 281C and the right symbol array 281R have the same variation mode as the left symbol array 281L when the left symbol array 281L is changed. The left symbol sequence 281R, the middle symbol sequence 281C, and the right symbol sequence 281R may be partially or completely changed in different modes. As a result, the player's expectation differs depending on the mode of change.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 64 to 68, aspects of the gaming effect (reach effect, hit effect, off effect, hit game effect, etc.) of the pachinko gaming machine of the fifth embodiment will be described. In FIG. 64 (a), three first effect hold 9a (pictures of “◯”) are displayed in the first effect hold display area 9c (first effect hold display unit) at the lower left of the display screen 7a. .. It is shown that there are three undigested information (information such as a special symbol hit / miss determination random number) that is acquired and stored based on the ball entering the first starting port 20. Further, in the variable pattern display area 9e at the lower center of the display screen 7a, one variable pattern 9f is displayed with a pattern of "〇" which is slightly larger than the first effect hold 9a. In the variable pattern display area 9e, a variable pattern 9f indicating that the variable display is currently being executed is displayed. Then, depending on the display mode of the variable pattern 9f, the result of the variable display currently being executed may indicate the possibility of becoming a big hit (stop display with the big hit symbol).

FIG. 64 (b) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 64 (a) in the same variation display as in FIG. 64 (a). On the left side of the display screen 7a, the effect symbols of the left symbol array 281L are variablely displayed from the upper side to the lower side. In the central portion of the display screen 7a, the effect symbols of the middle symbol array 281C are variably displayed from the upper side to the lower side. On the right side of the display screen 7a, the effect symbols of the right symbol array 281R are variablely displayed from the upper side to the lower side.

FIG. 64 (c) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 64 (b) in the same variation display as in FIG. 64 (b). In FIG. 64 (c), the “0” symbol (second zero symbol 282b, specific symbol) selected from the left symbol array 281L as the left effect symbol 8L is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped), and the right effect symbol 8R is displayed on the right. The "0" symbol (second zero symbol 282b, specific symbol) selected from the symbol array 281R is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped), and the middle effect symbol 8C shows a scene in which the middle symbol array 281C is being displayed in a variable manner. .. That is, in FIG. 64 (c), as the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R, the “0” symbol 282 (second zero symbol 282b, specific symbol) in the same display mode is stopped and displayed, and the remaining middle effect symbol 8C Is being displayed in a variable manner, indicating a reach mode in which the second zero symbol 282b is a reach symbol. Further, a game effect notification unit 289 is provided in the upper left portion of the display screen 7a, and the game effect notification unit 289 shows the characters "reach" indicating that the reach effect is in progress.

FIG. 64 (d) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 64 (c) in the same variation display as in FIG. 64 (c). On the display screen 7a, as the middle effect symbol 8C, the second zero symbol 282b, which is the same as the left and right effect symbols 8 (reach symbol), is stopped and displayed, and the hit symbol array 284 (specific stop mode) indicating that it is a big hit (hit). , The first specific stop mode) indicates a scene in which the stop is displayed. FIG. 64 (e) shows a hit notification effect 286 (“big hit!”) Based on the stop display (fixed stop display) of the hit symbol array 284 (specific stop mode, first specific stop mode) shown in FIG. 63 (d). This is a scene in which the character display) is executed, a big hit is made, and a big hit game is executed. FIG. 64 (f) shows a scene in which the jackpot game related to the jackpot notified in FIG. 64 (e) is being executed. At the lower right of the display screen 7a, a symbol corresponding to the second zero symbol 282b is displayed as a hit symbol 287.

In this way, the hit symbol array 284 (specific stop mode, first specific stop mode) is configured (stop display, fixed stop display) with the "0" symbols 282 having the same display mode, resulting in a big hit and a big hit game. Benefits (first benefit) will be granted. Similarly, the first zero symbol 282a, the third zero symbol 282c, the change symbol (first change symbol 283a, the second change symbol 283b) and other production symbols ("1", "2", "4", " 5 ”,“ 6 ”,“ 8 ”) configure the stop mode with the same three production symbols, the stop mode becomes the hit symbol array 284, and the privilege of the big hit game (first privilege) is given. .. Further, a mode in which two of the same effect symbols 8 are stopped and displayed and one is displayed in a variable manner is referred to as a reach mode, and two stop symbols constituting the reach mode are referred to as a reach symbol.

FIG. 65 (g) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 64 (b) in the same variation display as in FIG. 64 (b). The "0" symbol (second zero symbol 282b, specific symbol) selected from the left symbol array 281L as the left effect symbol 8L is displayed as a stop display (temporary stop display) on the left side of the display screen 7a, and the right effect symbol 8R is displayed on the right. The "0" symbol (first zero symbol 282a, specific symbol) selected from the symbol array 281R is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped), and the middle effect symbol 8C shows a scene in which the middle symbol array 281C is being displayed in a variable manner. .. That is, in FIG. 65 (g), as the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R, the “0” symbol 282 (specific symbol) having a different display mode is stopped and displayed, and the remaining middle effect symbol 8C is being displayed in a variable manner. , The reach mode in which the second zero symbol 282b and the first zero symbol 282a are the reach symbols is shown.

In addition, the game effect notification unit 289 is indicated with the character "reach" indicating that the reach is being produced. As described above, when the zero symbol 282 is configured such that two zero symbols 282 are stopped and one is variablely displayed regardless of whether the display mode is the same or different. The mode is a reach mode. Each symbol array 281 of the fifth embodiment includes a plurality of "0" symbols 282 (zero symbol, special symbol, specific symbol), and the "0" symbol 282 may be any combination of display modes. Since the reach mode is configured, the player can feel that the reach mode is more likely to occur than the number of the effect symbols 8 constituting the symbol array 281. This makes it possible to raise the expectations of the player.

FIG. 65 (h) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 65 (g) in the same variation display as in FIG. 65 (g). On the display screen 7a, as the middle effect symbol 8C, the same "0" symbol 282 (specific symbol, third zero symbol 282c) as the left and right effect symbols 8 (reach symbol, "0" symbol 282) is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped). Shows the scene that was displayed). As a result, all the effect symbols constituting the stop display mode become "0" symbols 282 (specific symbols). However, although the three symbols ("0" symbol 282, specific symbol) constituting the stop display mode (temporary stop display mode) display the same numerical information (information), "0", the display mode is It's different. Such a stop display mode is called a "transition symbol array (specific stop mode, second specific stop mode)", and even if the display modes are different, all the effect symbols constituting the stop display mode are "0" symbols. In the case of 282 (specific symbol), a predetermined privilege (second privilege) is given.

All the effect symbols constituting the stop display mode are "0" symbols 282 (specific symbols), and at least one of the effect symbols constituting the stop display mode is displayed as another "0" symbol 282 (specific symbol). The privilege (second privilege) given when the mode is different is a "special game production (second reach production 302, second game production, high reliability production) with high jackpot reliability compared to other game productions. ) ”Is executed. In the fifth embodiment, there are cases where all the effect symbols constituting the stop display mode are "0" symbols 282 (specific symbols), cases where all of the "0" symbols 282 (specific symbols) are the same display mode, and "0". When a part of the symbol 282 (specific symbol) is displayed differently from the other "0" symbol 282 (specific symbol), different benefits (big hit game, small hit game, execution of special game production, etc.) are given. Granted.

FIG. 65 (i) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 65 (h) in the same variation display as in FIG. 65 (h). FIG. 65 (i) shows a scene in which three “0” symbols 282 having different display modes displayed as a stop display (temporary stop display) on the display screen 7a are executing a symbol change effect 288 that changes to another effect symbol. Is shown. The symbol change effect 288 is an effect executed when the three symbols constituting the stop display mode (temporary stop display mode) become "0" symbols 282 (specific symbol, transition symbol array) in different display modes. Is. In the symbol change effect 288, an effect of changing the stopped display "0" symbol 282 (specific symbol) to a symbol (change symbol 283) different from the "0" symbol 282 (specific symbol) is executed.

Further, in the present execution mode, the change symbol 283 changed by the symbol change effect 288 is a symbol that is not included in the symbol array 281 that has been variablely displayed until then, so that the symbol has changed (the symbol change effect is The player can easily recognize what has been done. FIG. 65 (j) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 65 (i) in the same variation display as in FIG. 65 (i). As shown in FIG. 65 (j), the symbol change effect 288 is executed, and the second zero symbol 282b of the left symbol constituting the stop display mode is the first change symbol 283a indicating the numerical information (information) of "3". The third zero symbol 282c of the middle symbol changes to the second change symbol 283b indicating the numerical information (information) of "7", and the first zero symbol 282a of the right symbol is the same as the left symbol "3". The scene changed to the first change symbol 283a showing the numerical information (information) of ".

FIG. 65 (k) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 65 (j) in the same variation display as in FIG. 65 (j). FIG. 65 (k) shows the variation display of the middle effect symbol 8C (middle symbol array 281C) with the left and right change symbols 283 (first change symbol 283a) changed as a result of the symbol change effect 288 in the reach mode. Shows the scene that started. The middle symbol array 281C includes the first variation symbol 283a, which is the same as the reach symbol, including the second variation symbol 283b (“7” symbol) shown. The game effect notification unit 289 at the upper left of the display screen 7a displays the characters "SP reach" indicating that it is a special reach. In this embodiment, "SP reach" is set to a game production with higher jackpot reliability than "reach" (normal reach). Therefore, when the "SP reach" is executed, the player raises the expectation for the big hit and enhances the interest of the game.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, when the change symbol 283 (first change symbol 283a) is in the reach mode and the reach effect (game effect) is executed, the game effect (second) with relatively high jackpot reliability is performed. The execution of the reach effect 302, the second game effect, and the high reliability effect) is confirmed. That is, when the reach effect is executed using the first change symbol 283a (“3” symbol) which is the change symbol 283 as the reach symbol, and the second change symbol 283b (“7” symbol) which is the change symbol 283 is used as the reach symbol. In any case where the reach effect is executed, the game effect with high jackpot reliability (second reach effect 302, second game effect, high reliability effect) is executed. Therefore, the player raises the expectation of a big hit and enhances the interest of the game with respect to the execution of the symbol change effect 288 and the execution of the reach effect using the change symbol 283 as the reach symbol.

FIG. 65 (l) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 65 (k) in the same variation display as in FIG. 65 (k). On the display screen 7a, the second reach effect 302 (third) that displays the middle effect symbol 8C (middle symbol array 281C) in a relatively high-speed manner with the left and right change symbols 283 (first change symbol 283a) in the reach mode. 2 Shows the scene during execution of the game production). FIG. 66 (m) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 65 (l) in the same variation display as in FIG. 65 (l). On the display screen 7a, the second reach effect 302 (second reach effect 302 (th)) in which the middle effect symbol 8C (middle symbol array 281C) is variablely displayed at a relatively low speed while the left and right change symbols 283 (first change symbol 283a) are in the reach mode. 2 Shows the scene during execution of the game production).

FIG. 66 (n) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 66 (m) in the same variation display as in FIG. 66 (m). On the display screen 7a, after the second reach effect 302 (second game effect) is executed for a predetermined time, the first change symbol 283a, which is the same as the reach symbol, is stopped and displayed as the middle effect symbol 8C, and the stop display mode is the hit symbol arrangement. The scene which became 284 (specific stop mode, first specific stop mode) is shown. As a result, the player recognizes that the jackpot has been confirmed and enhances the interest of the game. In FIG. 66 (o), based on the fact that the hit symbol array 284 (big hit effect symbol) is stopped and displayed in FIG. 66 (n), a hit notification effect (fanfare effect) is performed, and a game profit (award) is given to the player from now on. It indicates that the jackpot game in which the ball) is given is executed.

FIG. 66 (p) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 66 (m) in the same variation display as in FIG. 66 (m). On the display screen 7a, after the second reach effect 302 (second game effect) is executed for a predetermined time, the "4" symbol different from the reach symbol is stopped and displayed as the middle effect symbol 8C, and the stop display mode is deviated and the symbol array 291. (At this point, it has not been confirmed). As a result, the player recognizes that he / she will be out. As described above, in the present execution mode, the second reach effect 302 is a game effect having a relatively high reliability of the big hit, but has a case where the big hit is achieved and a case where the second reach effect is missed. Here, it is assumed that the jackpot reliability (big hit game executable feasibility) when the second reach effect is executed is set to 40%. The second reach effect 302 may be the reach effect with the highest jackpot reliability among the reach effects of the pachinko gaming machine, or may have a reach effect with a higher jackpot reliability. ..

FIG. 66 (q) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 66 (p) in the same variation display as in FIG. 66 (p). FIG. 66 (q) is a scene in which the effect of returning the out-of-order symbol array (“343”) including the changed symbol displayed in FIG. 66 (p) to the effect symbol before the change is executed. The change symbol (second specific symbol) is not included in the symbol arrangement at the start of the variation display, and a predetermined effect symbol (“0” symbol, specific symbol) is changed during the execution of the variation display 283. Therefore, before the definite stop display of the out-of-order symbol arrangement is performed, the return display is performed to return the changed symbol to the effect symbol before the change, that is, the "0" symbol 282. As a result, the player reconfirms which effect symbol is changed to the changed symbol and the "SP reach" with high jackpot reliability is executed, and the "0" symbol is stopped even after the next fluctuation display. Expecting the display, it will be possible to enhance the interest of the game. In addition, the player recognizes that the deviation has been confirmed.

FIG. 66 (r) shows a scene in FIG. 66 (q) in which the out-of-order symbol array 291 (“040”) is displayed as a fixed stop display and the next effect symbol variation display is started. As described above, in the present execution mode, the reach effect in which the "0" symbol 282 in the different display mode is the reach symbol displays the "0" symbol 282 as the middle effect symbol in a stopped manner, that is, the transition symbol array 285 (specific stop). A mode, a second specific stop mode) is stopped and displayed, and then a "special game effect (second reach effect 302, second game effect, high reliability effect)" is executed, and the out-of-design arrangement 291 is displayed. There is a case where a stop display is displayed to confirm the deviation, and then a special game effect is not executed in the variable display.

FIG. 67A shows a scene in which the variable display of a predetermined effect symbol is being executed. The left symbol array 281L, the middle symbol array 281C, and the right symbol array 281R are all displayed in a variable manner. FIG. 67 (b) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 67 (a) in the same variation display as in FIG. 67 (a). In FIG. 67 (b), the “0” symbol 282 (zero symbol, special symbol, specific symbol) included in each symbol array 281 is changed to the change symbol 283 (second specific symbol) at a predetermined timing during the variable display. It shows the scene where the changeable symbol change effect 288 is started.

FIG. 67 (c) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 67 (b) in the same variation display as in FIG. 67 (b). On the display screen 7a, the symbol change effect 288 started in FIG. 67 (b) is being continued, and the predetermined "0" symbol 282 (first zero symbol, second zero symbol, third zero symbol) is changed to the change symbol 283. (2nd specific symbol, 1st change symbol, 2nd change symbol) shows a scene to be changed. Although not shown, there may be a case where the "0" symbol changes to a changed symbol and a case where the symbol does not change as a result of executing the symbol change effect. That is, there may be a case where the design change effect fails.

FIG. 67 (d) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 67 (c) in the same variation display as in FIG. 67 (c). FIG. 67 (d) shows a scene in which the symbol change effect 288 being executed in FIG. 67 (c) is successful and the “0” symbol is changed to a change symbol. As described above, as a pattern in which the "0" symbol changes to a changing symbol, after performing a reach effect in which the "0" symbol is the reach symbol, the transition to configure the stop display mode with the "0" symbols having different display modes. It has a pattern that stops and displays the symbol array and then changes to a changing symbol. In this execution mode, in addition to such a change pattern, a symbol change effect is generated at a predetermined timing during the variation display without going through the stop display of the transition symbol array, and the "0" symbol is changed to the change symbol. Has a pattern. When the symbol change effect is executed via the transition symbol arrangement, it may be assumed that the "0" symbol does not have a failure pattern that does not change to the change symbol (always changes).

FIG. 67 (e) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 67 (d) in the same variation display as in FIG. 67 (d). FIG. 67 (e) shows a scene in which the second reach effect 302 using the “7” symbol (second change symbol 283b), which is the change symbol 283, as the reach symbol is started. In the game production notification unit 289, the characters "SP reach" indicating that it is a special reach are displayed. Further, a reliability notification unit 292 (big hit reliability notification unit, special game feasibility notification unit) is provided at the lower part of the display screen 7a. In addition, the reliability notification unit 292 displays five ★ patterns, visually indicating to the player that the jackpot reliability is high. In addition, the number of ★ patterns in the reliability notification unit 292 has 1 to 5 patterns corresponding to the reach effect to be executed, and the larger the number of ★ patterns (maximum 5), the higher the jackpot reliability of the player. The degree is shown. Further, also in this execution mode, it is assumed that the reach effect in which the changed symbol is the reach symbol is executed with a relatively high hit reliability.

FIG. 67 (f) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 67 (e) in the same variation display as in FIG. 67 (e). On the display screen 7a, after the second reach effect 302 (second game effect) is executed for a predetermined time, the second change symbol 283b, which is the same as the reach symbol, is stopped and displayed as the middle effect symbol 8C, and the stop display mode is the hit symbol arrangement. The scene which became 284 (specific stop mode, first specific stop mode) is shown ("777"). As a result, the player recognizes that the jackpot has been confirmed and enhances the interest of the game.

FIG. 68 (g) shows a scene in which the first reach effect (first game effect, low reliability effect) in which the reach symbol is “4” symbol 8 is being executed in the variable display of the predetermined effect symbol. .. The game effect notification unit 289 displays the characters "reach" indicating that it is a normal reach, and the reliability notification unit displays two ★ patterns, and a jackpot reliability lower than that of the second reach effect is displayed. ing. Here, it is assumed that the jackpot reliability (big hit game executable feasibility) when the first reach effect is executed is set to 5%. FIG. 68 (h) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 68 (g) in the same variation display as in FIG. 68 (g). After the second reach effect 302 (second game effect) is executed for a predetermined time, the "0" symbol 282b, which is different from the reach symbol, is stopped and displayed as the middle effect symbol 8C, and the stop display mode is out of order. The scene that became (array) is shown.

FIG. 68 (i) shows a scene in which the second zero symbol 282b is stopped and displayed as the left and right effect symbols and the reach effect is being executed with the second zero symbol 282b as the reach symbol during the variable display of the predetermined effect symbol. Shown. Further, in FIG. 68 (j), the first zero symbol 282a is stopped and displayed as the left effect symbol 8L, and the third zero symbol 282c is stopped and displayed as the right effect symbol 8R during the variable display of the predetermined effect symbol. It shows a scene in which a reach effect is being executed in which a zero symbol 282 having a different display mode is used as a reach symbol. In this way, in principle, the same effect symbol is used as the reach symbol to perform the reach effect, but in the case of the zero symbol 282, even if the display mode is different, the zero symbol 282 is used as the reach symbol to perform the reach effect. It becomes possible to execute. This makes the player feel that the reach effect is likely to occur, and the player can raise the expectation for acquiring the privilege.

[Blinking stock production]
Next, the blinking stock effect 296 (stock effect), which is a game effect of the pachinko gaming machine of the fifth embodiment, will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. Here, the blinking stock effect 296 means that a predetermined pattern (eyes) appears on the display screen 7a at a predetermined timing during the variable display, and the predetermined pattern (eyes) performs a predetermined effect (blink). It is an effect that confirms that a special effect (stop display of zero symbol) will occur (stocks the occurrence of the special effect) at a predetermined timing thereafter. Further, by executing the predetermined effect a plurality of times, it is possible to determine (stock) the occurrence of the special effect a plurality of times according to the number of times.

In FIG. 69 (a), three first effect hold 9a (pictures of “◯”) are displayed in the first effect hold display area 9c (first effect hold display unit) at the lower left of the display screen 7a. .. It is shown that there are three undigested information (information such as a special symbol hit / miss determination random number) that is acquired and stored based on the ball entering the first starting port 20. FIG. 69 (b) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 69 (a) in the same variation display as in FIG. 69 (a). An eye-like pattern (eye pattern 299) appears in the substantially center of the display screen 7a, and the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a small variation at the lower right of the display screen 7a.

FIG. 69 (c) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 69 (b) in the same variation display as in FIG. 69 (b). In FIG. 69 (c), the blinking stock effect 296 being executed in FIG. 69 (b) is continuously executed, and the eye pattern 299 changes from the state in which the eyes are opened to the state in which the eyes are closed, so-called. Shows a scene in which the eye pattern 299 blinks. This "blinking effect" stocks the subsequent occurrence of special effects. Further, in the blinking stock effect 296, at the timing when the eye pattern 299 closes the eyes, one line display (one line in total) appears on the stock count display part 298 in the upper left part and the lower right part of the display screen 7a. do. This line display indicates the number of stocks for the subsequent occurrence of the special effect, and the player can recognize the number of stocks for the special effect by checking the number of lines.

FIG. 69 (d) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 69 (c) in the same variation display as in FIG. 69 (c). FIG. 69 (d) shows a scene in which the blinking stock effect 296 being executed in FIG. 69 (c) is continuously executed, and the eye pattern 299 is changed to the state in which the eyes are opened again. FIG. 69 (e) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 69 (d) in the same variation display as in FIG. 69 (d). FIG. 69 (e) shows a scene in which the blinking stock effect 296 being executed in FIG. 69 (d) is continuously executed, and the eye pattern 299 changes from the state in which the eyes are opened to the state in which the eyes are closed. .. FIG. 69 (e) shows a scene in which the eye pattern 299 executes the second blink in the blinking stock effect 296 being executed, and the stock count display unit 298 in the upper left portion and the lower right portion of the display screen 7a shows. Is displayed with the second line display.

FIG. 69 (f) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 69 (e) in the same variation display as in FIG. 69 (e). FIG. 69 (f) shows a scene in which the blinking stock effect 296 being executed in FIG. 69 (e) is continuously executed, and the eye pattern 299 is changed to the state in which the eyes are opened again. FIG. 70 (g) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 69 (f) in the same variation display as in FIG. 69 (f). The stock count display unit 298 on the display screen 7a displays two line displays indicating that the stock count is two. That is, the stocked special effect is executed during the variable display during execution or in the variable display related to the hold executed after that. Although the eye pattern is not displayed, two line displays are displayed on the stock count display unit 298, and it can be said that the blinking stock effect 296 is continuously being executed even in this scene. .. The same applies to FIGS. 70 (h) and 70 (i).

On the display screen 7a, the "4" symbol is stopped and displayed as the left effect symbol 8L, and the right symbol array 281R and the middle symbol array 281C are displayed in a variable manner. FIG. 70 (h) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 70 (g) in the same variation display as in FIG. 70 (g). On the display screen 7a, the left effect symbol 8L is composed of "4" symbols, the right symbol array 281R is composed of "5" symbols, and the middle symbol array 281C is composed of "5" symbols. Shows the stopped display scene. Also at this time, the stock count display unit 298 displays two line displays indicating that the stock count is two.

FIG. 70 (i) shows a scene in which the next variation display of FIG. 70 (h) is started. Also at this time, the stock count display unit 298 displays two line displays indicating that the stock count is two. FIG. 70 (j) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 70 (i) in the same variation display as in FIG. 70 (i). On the display screen 7a, the first zero symbol 282a is stopped and displayed as the left effect symbol 8L, and the blink release effect 291 (stock release effect) is executed at a predetermined timing during the variable display of the middle symbol array 281C and the right symbol array 281R. Therefore, a scene in which the eye pattern 299 is displayed on the background of the effect pattern is shown.

The special effect stocked by the blink stock effect 296 of this embodiment is said to be an effect of "stopping and displaying the zero symbol (specific symbol)". As shown in FIG. 70 (j), when the first zero symbol 282a is stopped and displayed as the left effect symbol 8L, the blink release effect 297 is executed. Therefore, if all the two stocks are released at this timing, As the middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R, the "0" symbol is stopped and displayed, and the stop display mode is the specific stop mode. That is, in each case, if the "0" symbol that is stopped and displayed by the blinking emission effect is the first zero symbol 282a, it becomes a big hit (the first privilege is given), and at least one of them is the second zero symbol 282b or the first. If it is a 3 zero symbol 282c, it will be a transition effect to SP reach (granting the second privilege).

As a result, the number of stocks displayed on the stock count display unit 298, the number of "0" symbols that are stopped and displayed before the stock is released, and the display mode of the "0" symbols are used to obtain the player's privilege. Expectations will diversify, and it will be possible to enhance the interest of the game. In addition, the blink stock effect (stock effect) that stocks the special effect and the blink release effect (stock release effect) that starts the stock special effect are the same predetermined pattern (eye pattern) that executes the predetermined effect (blink). It is executed by doing. That is, all of them are triggered by the execution of a common effect.

FIG. 70 (k) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 70 (j) in the same variation display as in FIG. 70 (j). In FIG. 70 (k), the blink emission effect 297 shown in FIG. 70 (j) is continuously executed, and the eye pattern 299 is overlapped with the effect symbol 8 in the substantially central portion of the display screen 7a. , The effect that the eye pattern 299 closes the eyes is executed. This indicates to the player that the stocked special effect will be released. The stock count display unit 298 displays two line displays indicating that the stock count is two.

FIG. 70 (l) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 70 (k) in the same variation display as in FIG. 70 (k). In FIG. 70 (l), the blinking emission effect 297 shown in FIG. 70 (k) is continuously executed, and by executing the first blinking emission effect, the right effect symbol 8R and the third zero symbol 282c Shows the scene where is stopped and displayed. In the stock count display unit 298, one line display is erased by releasing one special effect, and one line display indicating that the remaining stock count is one is displayed. Further, the eye pattern 299 is displayed on the background of the effect symbol 8, indicating that the blink emission effect is continued. Further, at this time, since the display modes of the two "0" symbols that are stopped and displayed are different, the player gives up the stop display of the hit symbol array and shifts the expectation that the transition symbol array is stopped and displayed. ..

FIG. 71 (m) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 70 (l) in the same variation display as in FIG. 70 (l). In FIG. 70 (m), the blink emission effect 297 shown in FIG. 70 (l) is continuously executed, and the eye pattern 299 is overlapped with the effect symbol 8 in the substantially central portion of the display screen 7a. , The effect that the eye pattern 299 closes the eyes is executed. As a result, the player is shown that the remaining one special effect in stock is released. That is, at this point, the player can recognize that the stop display mode is the transition symbol arrangement, and enhances the interest of the game. The stock count display unit 298 displays one line display indicating that the stock count is one.

FIG. 71 (n) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 71 (m) in the same variation display as in FIG. 71 (m). In FIG. 71 (n), the blinking emission effect 297 shown in FIG. 71 (m) is continuously executed, and by executing the second blinking emission effect 297, the second zero symbol is added to the middle effect symbol 8C. 282b shows a stop display, and the stop display mode shows a scene in which the transition symbol array 285 (specific stop mode, second specific stop mode) is set. By releasing all the stock, all the line displays of the stock count display unit 298 are erased. Further, although the eye pattern 299 is displayed on the background of the effect symbol 8, it indicates that the blink release effect is completed because there is no stock of the special effect. In this way, the blinking release effect is executed at the timing when the predetermined zero symbol is stopped and displayed as the left effect symbol, and this stock release effect causes two special effects (zero symbol stop display) that have been stocked in advance. Was executed, and a predetermined zero symbol was stopped and displayed on the middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R, and the stop display mode was succeeded in setting the transition symbol arrangement.

In this way, the blinking stock effect is an effect that guarantees the number of times the special effect is executed later according to the number of times the stock is made. Further, as the blink emission effect, the blink release effect may be executed in the variable display in which the blink stock effect is executed. In this case, the blink stock effect and the blink release effect are game effects that notify the jackpot reliability of the variable display during execution. Further, as shown in the present execution mode, the blink emission effect may be executed in the variation display executed after the variation display in which the blink stock effect is executed. In this case, the blink stock effect and the blink release effect are pre-effects (look-ahead effect) for notifying the jackpot reliability before the variable display of the target for notifying the jackpot reliability.

FIG. 71 (o) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 71 (n) in the same variation display as in FIG. 71 (n). In FIG. 71 (o), the symbol change effect 288 is executed based on the transition symbol array 285 being stopped and displayed in FIG. 71 (n) in the same manner as described above, and the first change symbol 283a is a special reach symbol. It shows the scene where the reach (second reach production, second game production) is executed.

[Countdown reach production]
Next, the mode of the countdown reach effect, which is the game effect of the pachinko gaming machine of the fifth embodiment, will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 to 74. In FIG. 72 (a), three first effect hold 9a (pictures of “◯”) are displayed in the first effect hold display area 9c (first effect hold display unit) at the lower left of the display screen 7a. .. It is shown that there are three undigested information (information such as a special symbol hit / miss determination random number) that is acquired and stored based on the ball entering the first starting port 20. Further, in the variable pattern display area 9e at the lower center of the display screen 7a, one variable pattern 9f is displayed with a pattern of "〇" which is slightly larger than the first effect hold 9a. In the variable pattern display area 9e, a variable pattern 9f indicating that the variable display is currently being executed is displayed. Then, depending on the display mode of the variable pattern 9f, the result of the variable display currently being executed may indicate the possibility of becoming a big hit (stop display with the big hit symbol).

FIG. 72 (b) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 72 (a) in the same variation display as in FIG. 72 (a). On the left side of the display screen 7a, the effect symbols of the left symbol array 281L are variablely displayed from the upper side to the lower side. In the central portion of the display screen 7a, the effect symbols of the middle symbol array 281C are variably displayed from the upper side to the lower side. On the right side of the display screen 7a, the effect symbols of the right symbol array 281R are variablely displayed from the upper side to the lower side. FIG. 72 (c) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 72 (b) in the same variation display as in FIG. 72 (b). FIG. 72 (c) shows a scene in which the character “reach” is displayed on the game effect notification unit 289 at the upper left of the display screen 7a, and the reach effect (countdown reach effect) is being executed.

Further, on the display screen 7a, the reach symbol 306 is formed by the "2" symbol in which the left effect symbol 8L and the middle effect symbol 8C are the same effect symbols, and the reach symbol 306 is stopped and displayed. Indicates a scene during variable display. That is, of the three effect symbols, two effect symbols match with the "2" symbol to become the reach symbol 306, and the remaining one effect symbol shows an execution scene of the reach effect in which the variation display is performed. FIG. 72 (d) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 72 (c) in the same variation display as in FIG. 72 (c). FIG. 72 (d) shows a scene in which the right effect symbol 8R, which was being displayed in a variable manner in FIG. 72 (c), is stopped and displayed at the first zero symbol 282a, which is different from the reach symbol 306.

In this way, in the countdown reach effect 305 (special reach effect), the reach effect is executed using the effect symbols other than the specific symbol as the reach symbol, and the remaining one effect symbol is a symbol different from the reach symbol, and the specific symbol (zero). The stop mode (“220” in this example) when the stop is displayed in the symbol, the first zero symbol, the second zero symbol, and the third zero symbol is referred to as a revariable stop mode (special stop mode).

The countdown reach effect 305 is a game effect in which the reach pattern is changed a plurality of times in a predetermined order, and the reach effect is performed a plurality of times. Further, in the countdown reach effect 305, different benefits are given depending on which reach symbol 306 is the big hit while the reach symbol 306 changes. Further, in the countdown reach effect 305, when two of the three effect symbols become the predetermined reach symbols and become the reach mode, the remaining one effect symbol is the same as the reach symbol (matches). ) It will be a big hit when the stop display is displayed with the effect pattern.

Further, when two of the three effect symbols become the predetermined reach symbols and the reach mode is established, the remaining one effect symbol is a symbol different from the reach symbol and is a specific symbol (zero). When the stop display is performed with the symbol, the first zero symbol, the second zero symbol, and the third zero symbol), the reach symbol is changed and the effect symbol is displayed in a variable manner again. That is, the reach symbol is changed to continue the countdown reach effect 305, and the variable display during execution is continued. Further, when two of the three effect symbols become the predetermined reach symbols and the reach mode is established, the remaining one effect symbol is a symbol different from the reach symbol and is a specific symbol (zero). When the stop display is performed with a symbol different from the symbol, the first zero symbol, the second zero symbol, and the third zero symbol, the stop mode becomes the out-of-design arrangement 291 (confirmed out-of-confirmation symbol arrangement), and the countdown reach effect 305 ends. At the same time, the running fluctuation display is terminated.

Therefore, in the reach effect in the countdown reach effect 305 (special reach effect), when the remaining one effect symbol is stopped and displayed with the same effect symbol as the reach symbol, and the remaining one effect symbol is different from the reach symbol. Even so, if a specific symbol (zero symbol) is stopped and displayed, game benefits (privileges, special games, re-reach effects, etc.) are given, so the player can acquire the benefits. It is possible to feel that it is highly sexual and enhance the interest of the game. Also, when the reach symbol is not a specific symbol, even if the remaining one effect symbol is a different effect symbol from the reach symbol, if the specific symbol (zero symbol) is stopped and displayed, the reach symbol is changed and the result is restarted. Since the reach effect is executed, the player can play the game again with the expectation that the privilege will be given.

In addition, the countdown reach effect 305 starts the reach effect with the effect symbol (“2” symbol in this execution mode) other than the specific symbol (zero symbol) as the reach symbol 306, and each time the reach symbol changes, the previous reach The reach effect is repeatedly executed with the effect symbol obtained by subtracting 1 from the symbol as the reach symbol. That is, every time the reach symbol is changed, the number (information) indicated by the reach symbol is counted down (2 → 1 → 0). Further, in the execution mode of the fifth embodiment, the reach symbol is changed and the final reach symbol is set as a specific symbol (zero symbol). Then, when the reach effect is performed with the zero symbol that became the reach symbol in the final change and the remaining one effect symbol is stopped and displayed with the same specific symbol (zero symbol) as the reach symbol, the stop mode becomes the hit symbol array. , It is assumed that a privilege (greater for the player) that is advantageous to the player is given to the player than the winning symbol arrangement when the other production symbols are the reach symbols.

FIG. 72 (e) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 72 (d) in the same variation display as in FIG. 72 (d). In FIG. 72 (e), based on the fact that the stop mode of the effect symbol is the revariable stop mode 307 (special stop mode, “220”) in FIG. 72 (d), the effect symbol on the left, middle, and right is changed again. It shows the scene where the variable display is executed. FIG. 72 (f) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 72 (e) in the same variation display as in FIG. 72 (e). In FIG. 72 (f), the countdown reach effect 305 is continuously executed, the reach symbol 306 changes from "2" to "1" (countdown), and the remaining one effect symbol is displayed in a variable manner. It shows the scene where the second reach production is being performed.

FIG. 73 (g) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 72 (f) in the same variation display as in FIG. 72 (f). In FIG. 73 (g), the countdown reach effect 305 is continuously executed, and the right effect symbol 8R, which was being displayed in a variable manner in FIG. 72 (f), stops at the second zero symbol 282b, which is different from the reach symbol 306. Shows the displayed scene. In FIG. 73 (g), in the countdown reach effect 305 (special reach effect), a reach effect is executed using an effect symbol other than the specific symbol as a reach symbol, and the remaining one effect symbol is different from the reach symbol (zero symbol). ) Is displayed as a stop (“110” in this example), indicating a scene in which the stop mode is a revariable stop mode (special stop mode).

FIG. 73 (h) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 73 (g) in the same variation display as in FIG. 73 (g). In FIG. 73 (h), the countdown reach effect 305 is continuously executed, and in FIG. 73 (g), the stop mode of the effect symbol is the revariable stop mode 307 (special stop mode, “110”). Based on, the left, middle, and right effect symbols show the scene where the variable display is executed again. FIG. 73 (i) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 73 (h) in the same variation display as in FIG. 73 (h). In FIG. 73 (i), the countdown reach effect 305 is continuously executed, and the reach symbol 306 changes from "1" to "0 (specific symbol, zero symbol)" (countdown) and the remaining one. Shows a scene in which the third reach effect is being executed, in which the effect symbol of is displayed in a variable manner. Further, the change in which the reach symbol becomes a specific symbol is a change in the final stage in the countdown reach effect 305.

FIG. 73 (j) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 73 (i) in the same variation display as in FIG. 73 (i). In FIG. 73 (j), the countdown reach effect 305 is continuously executed, and the right effect symbol 8R, which was being displayed in a variable manner in FIG. 73 (i), is a specific symbol (first zero symbol) which is the reach symbol 306. A scene in which the same first zero symbol 282a is stopped and displayed is shown. That is, it shows a scene in which all the left, middle, and right effect symbols match with the first zero symbol 282a, and the stop mode is the hit symbol array 284 (specific stop mode, first specific stop mode). Further, a stop mode in which the hit symbol array 284 is composed of specific symbols (first zero symbol, second zero symbol, third zero symbol) is referred to as a first hit symbol array 284a, and the first hit symbol array 284a is stopped. When displayed, a privilege (second special privilege) that is relatively advantageous to the player is given.

Here, the privilege (second special privilege) that is relatively advantageous for the player is the 15R first jackpot (15R first jackpot game). In addition, a privilege that is relatively disadvantageous to the player (first special privilege) is a 2R third big hit (2R third big hit game). In addition, the privilege that is relatively advantageous for the player (second special privilege) is a privilege that can be obtained with a larger amount of game profit (prize ball) than the privilege that is relatively disadvantageous for the player (first special privilege). Alternatively, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game may be advantageous (high probability state, high base state, or a long execution period of these states, etc.).

FIG. 73 (k) shows to the player that a relatively advantageous privilege (second special privilege) is given based on the stop display of the first hit symbol array 284a in FIG. 73 (j). It shows a scene in which the one-hit notification effect 286a (“super big hit!”) Is executed. FIG. 73 (l) shows a scene in which the jackpot game (15R first jackpot game) related to the jackpot (15R first jackpot) shown in FIGS. 73 (j) and (k) has started. Further, the first zero symbol 282a is displayed as the hit symbol 287.

FIG. 74 (m) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 72 (c) in the same variation display as in FIG. 72 (c). In FIG. 74 (m), the countdown reach effect 305 is continuously executed, and the right effect symbol 8R, which was being displayed in a variable manner in FIG. 72 (c), is the reach symbol 306, the “2” symbol (other than the specific symbol). Shows a scene that is stopped and displayed with the same "2" symbol as the production symbol). That is, it shows a scene in which all the left, middle, and right effect symbols match with the "2" symbol, and the stop mode is the hit symbol array 284 (specific stop mode, first specific stop mode). Further, a stop mode in which the hit symbol array 284 is composed of the “2” symbol, which is an effect symbol other than the specific symbol, is referred to as a second hit symbol array 284b, and when the second hit symbol array 284b is stopped and displayed, it is displayed. A privilege (first special privilege) that is relatively disadvantageous to the player is given.

FIG. 74 (n) shows to the player that a relatively disadvantageous privilege (second special privilege) is given based on the stop display of the second hit symbol array 284b in FIG. 74 (m). It shows the scene where the 2 hit notification effect 286b (“big hit!”) Is executed. FIG. 74 (o) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 72 (f) in the same variation display as in FIG. 72 (f). In FIG. 74 (o), the countdown reach effect 305 is continuously executed, and the right effect symbol 8R, which was being displayed in a variable manner in FIG. 72 (f), is the reach symbol 306 “1” symbol (other than the specific symbol). Shows a scene that is stopped and displayed with the same "1" symbol as the production symbol). That is, it shows a scene in which all the left, middle, and right effect symbols match with the "1" symbol, and the stop mode is the hit symbol array 284 (specific stop mode, first specific stop mode). Further, a stop mode in which the hit symbol array 284 is composed of the “1” symbol, which is an effect symbol other than the specific symbol, is referred to as a second hit symbol array 284b.

Further, as in the case where the hit symbol array 284 is composed of the “2” symbol which is an effect symbol other than the specific symbol, a privilege (first special privilege) relatively disadvantageous to the player is given. FIG. 74 (p) shows to the player that a relatively disadvantageous privilege (second special privilege) is given based on the stop display of the second hit symbol array 284b in FIG. 74 (o). It shows the scene where the 2 hit notification effect 286b (“big hit!”) Is executed.

In addition, in the countdown reach effect 305, when the winning symbol array is configured by the specific symbol (zero symbol), a privilege advantageous to the player is given as compared with the case where the winning symbol array is configured by the effect symbols other than the specific symbol. It was supposed to be done. In addition to this, even when the hit symbol array is configured by the effect symbols other than the specific symbol, different benefits may be given depending on the effect symbols constituting the hit symbol array. For example, when the number of changes of the reach symbol in the countdown reach effect is small (for example, the reach symbol is "2" symbol) (second special privilege), when the number of changes is large (for example, the reach symbol is "1" symbol). ) (Third special privilege), a privilege advantageous to the player may be given.

[Pushing reach production]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 75 to 79, a mode of the push-to-reach effect, which is the game effect of the pachinko gaming machine of the fifth embodiment, will be described. In FIG. 75 (a), three first effect hold 9a (pictures of “◯”) are displayed in the first effect hold display area 9c (first effect hold display unit) at the lower left of the display screen 7a. .. It is shown that there are three undigested information (information such as a special symbol hit / miss determination random number) that is acquired and stored based on the ball entering the first starting port 20. Further, in the variable pattern display area 9e at the lower center of the display screen 7a, one variable pattern 9f is displayed with a pattern of "〇" which is slightly larger than the first effect hold 9a. In the variable pattern display area 9e, a variable pattern 9f indicating that the variable display is currently being executed is displayed. Then, depending on the display mode of the variable pattern 9f, the result of the variable display currently being executed may indicate the possibility of becoming a big hit (stop display with the big hit symbol).

FIG. 75 (b) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 75 (a) in the same variation display as in FIG. 75 (a). On the left side of the display screen 7a, the effect symbols of the left symbol array 281L are variablely displayed from the upper side to the lower side. In the central portion of the display screen 7a, the effect symbols of the middle symbol array 281C are variably displayed from the upper side to the lower side. On the right side of the display screen 7a, the effect symbols of the right symbol array 281R are variablely displayed from the upper side to the lower side. FIG. 75 (c) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 75 (b) in the same variation display as in FIG. 75 (b). In FIG. 75 (c), the first zero symbol 282a is stopped and displayed as the left effect symbol 8L, and the same (matching) first zero symbol 282a as the left effect symbol is stopped and displayed as the right effect symbol 8R. Shows a scene in which is displayed in a variable manner. That is, the scene in which the first zero symbol 282a (“0” symbol) is set as the reach symbol and the remaining one medium effect symbol is variablely displayed is shown.

FIG. 75 (d) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 75 (c) in the same variation display as in FIG. 75 (c). FIG. 75 (d) shows a scene in which the reach effect executed in FIG. 75 (c) becomes the push-in reach effect 309. The characters "Oshiai Reach" are displayed on the game effect notification unit 289 on the upper left of the display screen 7a, indicating that the Oshiai Reach effect 309 has been executed by the player. Further, below the game effect notification unit 289, an effect symbol in a reach mode in which the first zero symbol 282a is a reach symbol is displayed.

Here, in the push-fitting reach effect (display area acquisition reach effect), a bar-shaped partition portion 310 (display area partition portion) is displayed on the display screen 7a so as to divide (divide, partition) the display area. Then, the privilege symbol 311a is displayed in the privilege symbol display area 311 on the display screen 7a divided by the partition portion 310, and the privilege symbol 312b is displayed in the non-privilege symbol display area 312 on the display screen 7a also divided by the partition portion 310. Is displayed. Then, the pressing effect is performed in the privilege symbol display area 311 (the privilege symbol 311a displayed in) and the non-privilege symbol display area 312 (the non-privilege symbol 312b displayed in). Then, one effect symbol selected from the effect symbols displayed in the display area (privilege symbol display area or non-privilege symbol display area) on the side that won the push effect (satisfying the predetermined condition) is finally displayed. Stop display Display the stop display as the (third) effect symbol 8C. Alternatively, it is decided whether or not the privilege will be granted.

As shown in FIG. 75 (d), the display screen 7a is provided with a horizontally long bar-shaped partition portion 310 (display area partition portion) in the left-right direction to form a privilege symbol display area 311 (first display area) on the upper side of the display screen 7a. , A non-privilege symbol display area 312 (second display area) on the lower side of the display screen 7a is provided. Here, the effect symbol 8 that matches the reach symbol 306 is displayed in the privilege symbol display area 311 (first display area), and matches the reach symbol 306 in the non-privilege symbol display area 312 (second display area). No effect symbol 8 is displayed. An effect symbol that "matches the reach symbol" means that a privilege is given (big hit game, reach effect again, etc.) when the effect symbol is stopped and displayed at the end, that is, the hit symbol array. (Or, it is an effect symbol that becomes a transition symbol arrangement). Further, the effect symbol that "does not match the reach symbol" is an effect symbol that is not given a privilege when it is stopped and displayed as the effect symbol to be stopped and displayed at the end, that is, an effect symbol that is out of alignment.

In FIG. 75 (d), the push-to-reach effect 309 in which the first zero symbol 282a is set as the reach symbol 306 is executed, and the privilege symbol display area 311 (first display area) is given a privilege when the stop display is performed. The effect symbols (first zero symbol 282a, second zero symbol 282b, and third zero symbol 282c) are displayed. Further, in the non-privilege symbol display area 312 (second display area), the effect symbols ("1", "2", "4", "5", "6", and the effect symbols ("1", "2", "4", "5", "6", , "8") is displayed. Then, in the push-to-reach effect 309, while changing the displayed effect symbols, the privilege symbol display area 311 (first display area) and the non-privilege symbol display area 312 (second display area) are moved up and down (mutually). ) The display area of the person who has acquired the larger display area by performing the pressing effect (predetermined game effect) wins.

FIG. 75 (e) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 75 (d) in the same variation display as in FIG. 75 (d). In FIG. 75 (e), the push-to-reach effect 309 is continuously executed, the second zero symbol 282b is displayed as the privilege symbol 311a in the privilege symbol display area 311 and the non-privilege symbol 312b is displayed in the non-privilege symbol display area 312. The "1" symbol is displayed as. In FIG. 75 (e), the partition portion 310 moves downward (non-privilege symbol display area side), and the privilege symbol display area 311 (second zero symbol 282b displayed in) becomes the non-privilege symbol display area 312. (The "1" symbol displayed in) is pressed. That is, it shows a scene in which the privilege symbol display area 311 side is dominant. Further, adjacent to the partition portion 310, a push-in direction suggestion portion 313 indicating the moving direction (display area on the pushing side, pushing direction) of the partition portion 310 is displayed indicating the downward direction. Further, the effect symbol displayed in the display area on the superior side is displayed larger than the effect symbol displayed in the display area on the inferior side. This indicates to the player which display area is predominant.

FIG. 75 (f) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 75 (e) in the same variation display as in FIG. 75 (e). In FIG. 75 (f), the pressing reach effect 309 is continuously executed, and the non-privilege symbol 312b displayed in the non-privilege symbol display area 312 is changed from the “1” symbol to the “2” symbol. Then, the partition portion 310 moves upward (toward the privilege symbol display area side), and the non-privilege symbol 312b displayed in the non-privilege symbol display area 312 pushes back the privilege symbol 311a displayed in the privilege symbol display area 311. Shows the scene. Further, the pushing direction suggestion unit 313 is displayed indicating the upward direction.

FIG. 76 (g) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 75 (f) in the same variation display as in FIG. 75 (f). In FIG. 76 (g), the push-in reach effect 309 is continuously executed, and the privilege symbol 311a displayed in the privilege symbol display area 311 is changed from the second zero symbol to the third zero symbol. Then, the partition portion 310 moves downward (non-privilege symbol display area side), and the privilege symbol 311a displayed in the privilege symbol display area 312 moves the non-privilege symbol 312b displayed in the non-privilege symbol display area 311. It shows the scene of pushing back. Further, the pushing direction suggestion unit 313 is displayed indicating the downward direction.

FIG. 76 (h) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 76 (g) in the same variation display as in FIG. 76 (g). In FIG. 76 (h), the pressing reach effect 309 is continuously executed, and the non-privilege symbol 312b displayed in the non-privilege symbol display area 312 is changed from the “2” symbol to the “4” symbol. Then, the partition portion 310 moves upward (toward the privilege symbol display area side), and the non-privilege symbol 312b displayed in the non-privilege symbol display area 312 pushes back the privilege symbol 311a displayed in the privilege symbol display area 311. Shows the scene. Further, the pushing direction suggestion unit 313 is displayed indicating the upward direction.

FIG. 76 (i) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 76 (h) in the same variation display as in FIG. 76 (h). In FIG. 76 (i), the push-in reach effect 309 is continuously executed, and the privilege symbol 311a displayed in the privilege symbol display area 311 is changed from the third zero symbol to the second zero symbol. Then, the partition portion 310 moves downward (non-privilege symbol display area side), and the privilege symbol 311a displayed in the privilege symbol display area 312 moves the non-privilege symbol 312b displayed in the non-privilege symbol display area 311. It shows the scene of pushing back. Further, the pushing direction suggestion unit 313 is displayed indicating the downward direction. In addition, a scene in which the help character A314 is displayed in the privilege symbol display area 311 (first display area) is shown.

The help character A314 is displayed in the privilege symbol display area at a predetermined timing during the execution of the push-to-reach effect, the privilege symbol display area is pushed into the non-privilege symbol display area, and the privilege symbol display area wins (the predetermined condition is satisfied). ) Is a character that assists. When the help character A314 is displayed, the possibility of winning is higher than that of the case where the help character A314 is not displayed, but the character may be defeated or may be defeated without fail. Therefore, when the help character A314 is displayed, the player raises the expectation for the establishment of the privilege and enhances the interest of the game.

Further, in this embodiment, the help character A314 is illustrated as the help character, but the present invention is not limited to this. In addition to the help character A314, a plurality of help characters (for example, help characters X, Y, Z) in other display modes may be provided. Then, the possibility that the privilege symbol display area wins may differ depending on the type of help character displayed. In addition, depending on the type of help character, the privilege symbol display area may always win.

FIG. 76 (j) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 76 (i) in the same variation display as in FIG. 76 (i). FIG. 76 (j) shows a scene in which the push-to-reach effect 309 is continuously executed and the help character A314 pushes the partition portion 310 toward the non-privilege symbol display area side. Then, the partition portion 310 moves downward (non-privilege symbol display area side), and the privilege symbol 311a displayed in the privilege symbol display area 312 moves the non-privilege symbol 312b displayed in the non-privilege symbol display area 311. Shows the scene to press. In addition, the number of push-in direction suggestion portions 313 has increased, indicating a scene in which the privilege symbol display area has become more predominant.

FIG. 76 (k) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 76 (j) in the same variation display as in FIG. 76 (j). FIG. 76 (k) shows a scene in which the push-to-reach effect 309 is continuously executed and the help character A314 further pushes the partition portion 310 toward the non-privilege symbol display area side. Such an effect in which the help character A314 assists the victory on the privilege symbol display area side is also referred to as an auxiliary effect 318. In addition to the help character, a floating character (for example, a balloon or a balloon) that assists the partition portion 310 to move upward, and a weight character that assists the partition portion 310 to move downward (for example,). , Weight, etc.) can be displayed. Specifically, when a floating character is added to the partition, it assists the partition to move upwards, and when a weighted character is placed on the partition, the partition moves downward. Assist in moving. Further, by displaying such a character, the player can intuitively recognize in which direction the partition portion is guided. Further, the possibility (reliability) that the partition portion is guided in a predetermined direction (auxiliary direction) may differ depending on the help character, the floating character, or the weight character.

FIG. 76 (l) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 76 (i) in the same variation display as in FIG. 76 (k). FIG. 76 (j) shows a scene in which the push-to-reach effect 309 is continuously executed, the help character A314 pushes the partition portion 310 toward the non-privilege symbol display area side, and the privilege symbol display area side wins. There is. That is, the privilege symbol 311a (first zero symbol) on the privilege symbol display area 311 side pushes out the non-privilege symbol 312b (“4” symbol) of the non-privilege symbol display area 312, and the entire display area becomes the privilege symbol display area. Shows the scene. As a result, when the privilege symbol display area side wins, the first zero symbol, which is the privilege symbol displayed in the privilege symbol display area, becomes the last stop symbol in the extrusion reach effect. In this way, when the privilege symbol display area side wins, the stop symbol is selected from the privilege symbols (effect symbols) displayed in the privilege symbol display area.

FIG. 77 (m) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 76 (l) in the same variation display as in FIG. 76 (l). In FIG. 77 (m), the push-in reach effect 309 (display area acquisition reach effect) is continuously executed, and the privilege symbol display area side acquires the display area and wins (satisfies a predetermined condition), and the extrusion reach effect. It shows a scene in which the third stop symbol in 309 is determined (confirmed) as the first zero symbol 282a which is the privilege symbol 311a. As a result, it is confirmed that the player is given a predetermined privilege.

FIG. 77 (n) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 77 (m) in the same variation display as in FIG. 77 (m). On the display screen 7a, as the middle effect symbol 8C, the first zero symbol 282a, which is the same as the left and right effect symbols 8 (reach symbol), is stopped and displayed, and the hit symbol array 284 (specific stop mode) indicating that it is a big hit (hit). , The first specific stop mode) indicates a scene in which the stop is displayed. FIG. 77 (o) shows a hit notification effect 286 (“big hit!”) Based on the stop display (fixed stop display) of the hit symbol array 284 (specific stop mode, first specific stop mode) shown in FIG. 77 (n). This is a scene in which the character display) is executed, a big hit is made, and a big hit game is executed. FIG. 77 (p) shows a scene in which the jackpot game related to the jackpot notified in FIG. 77 (o) is being executed. At the lower right of the display screen 7a, a symbol corresponding to the first zero symbol 282a is displayed as a hit symbol 287.

In this way, the hit symbol array 284 (specific stop mode, first specific stop mode) is configured (stop display, fixed stop display) with the "0" symbols 282 having the same display mode, resulting in a big hit and a big hit game. Benefits (first benefit) will be granted. Similarly, the second zero symbol 282b, the third zero symbol 282c, the change symbol (first change symbol 283a, the second change symbol 283b) and other production symbols ("1", "2", "4", " 5 ”,“ 6 ”,“ 8 ”) configure the stop mode with the same three production symbols, the stop mode becomes the hit symbol array 284, and the privilege of the big hit game (first privilege) is given. .. Further, a mode in which two of the same effect symbols 8 are stopped and displayed and one is displayed in a variable manner is referred to as a reach mode, and two stop symbols constituting the reach mode are referred to as a reach symbol.

FIG. 77 (q) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 76 (g) in the same variation display as in FIG. 76 (g). In FIG. 77 (q), the push-in reach effect 309 (display area acquisition reach effect) is continuously executed, and the privilege symbol display area 311 side (third zero symbol) sets the partition portion 310 to the non-privilege symbol display area side. Shows the scene of pushing further into. In addition, the number of push-in direction suggestion portions 313 indicating downwards has increased, indicating a scene in which the privilege symbol display area side has become more dominant.

FIG. 77 (r) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 77 (q) in the same variation display as in FIG. 77 (q). In FIG. 77 (r), the push-to-reach effect 309 is continuously executed, and the privilege symbol display area 311 side (third zero symbol) pushes the partition portion 310 toward the non-privilege symbol display area side to display the privilege symbol. It shows the scene where the area side won (satisfied the predetermined conditions). That is, the privilege symbol 311a (third zero symbol) on the privilege symbol display area 311 pushes out the non-privilege symbol 312b (“2” symbol) of the non-privilege symbol display area 312, and the entire display area becomes the privilege symbol display area. Shows the scene. As a result, when the privilege symbol display area side wins, the third zero symbol, which is the privilege symbol displayed in the privilege symbol display area, becomes the last stop symbol in the extrusion reach effect.

FIG. 78 (s) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 77 (r) in the same variation display as in FIG. 77 (r). The display screen 7a shows a scene in which the third zero symbol 282c, which has a different display mode from the left and right effect symbols 8 (reach symbols), is stopped and displayed as the middle effect symbol 8C. As a result, the three stop symbols match with the "0" symbol 282 (zero symbol) having a different display mode, and the stop display mode becomes the transition symbol array 285 (specific stop mode, second specific stop mode) described above. When the transition symbol array 285 is stopped and displayed as a result of the extrusion reach effect, the symbol change effect is subsequently executed, and it is confirmed that the game effect with relatively high hit reliability is executed.

FIG. 78 (t) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 78 (s) in the same variation display as in FIG. 78 (s). FIG. 78 (t) shows a scene in which three “0” symbols 282 having different display modes displayed as a stop display (temporary stop display) on the display screen 7a are executing a symbol change effect 288 that changes to another effect symbol. Is shown. The symbol change effect 288 is an effect executed when the three symbols constituting the stop display mode (temporary stop display mode) become "0" symbols 282 (specific symbol, transition symbol array) in different display modes. Is. In the symbol change effect 288, an effect of changing the stopped display "0" symbol 282 (specific symbol) to a symbol (change symbol 283) different from the "0" symbol 282 (specific symbol) is executed. In this embodiment, the execution of this symbol change effect and the subsequent SP reach effect are given to the player as a privilege. Since the execution mode of the game effect after the symbol change effect 288 is the same as that in FIGS. 65 and 66, the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 78 (u) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 76 (h) in the same variation display as in FIG. 76 (h). FIG. 78 (u) shows a scene in which the push-in reach effect 309 is continuously executed and the disturbing character B315 is displayed in the non-privilege symbol display area 312 (second display area).

The disturbing character B315 is displayed in the non-privilege symbol display area at a predetermined timing during the execution of the push-to-reach effect, the non-privilege symbol display area pushes the privilege symbol display area, and the non-privilege symbol display area wins (predetermined condition). It is a character that assists in satisfying). That is, it is a character that prevents the privilege symbol display area from winning (satisfying a predetermined condition). When the disturbing character B315 is displayed, the possibility that the privilege symbol display area will win is lower than that when it is not displayed, but the privilege symbol display area may win, and it must be done. It may be defeated. Therefore, when the disturbing character B315 is displayed, the player's expectation for the establishment of the privilege is lowered. Therefore, the player expects that the help character is displayed on the privilege symbol display area side, and executes the game.

Further, in this embodiment, the disturbing character B315 is illustrated as the disturbing character, but the present invention is not limited to this. In addition to the disturbing character B315, there may be a plurality of disturbing characters (for example, disturbing characters X, Y, Z) in other display modes. Then, the possibility that the privilege symbol display area wins (the possibility that the non-privilege symbol display area wins) may differ depending on the type of the disturbing character displayed. In addition, depending on the type of disturbing character, the privilege symbol display area may always win.

FIG. 78 (v) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 78 (u) in the same variation display as in FIG. 78 (u). FIG. 78 (v) shows a scene in which the push-in reach effect 309 is continuously executed, and the disturbing character B315 further pushes the partition portion 310 toward the privilege symbol display area side. Such an effect in which the obstructive character B315 assists the victory on the non-privilege symbol display area side is also referred to as an obstructive effect 319.

FIG. 78 (w) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 78 (v) in the same variation display as in FIG. 78 (v). In FIG. 78 (w), the push-to-reach effect 309 is continuously executed, the disturbing character B315 pushes the partition portion 310 toward the privilege symbol display area side, and the non-privilege symbol display area side wins (privilege symbol display). The scene where the territory side was defeated) is shown. That is, the non-privilege symbol 312b (“4” symbol) on the non-privilege symbol display area 312 pushes out the privilege symbol 311a (third zero symbol) of the privilege symbol display area 311, and the entire display area is the non-privilege symbol display area 312. Shows the scene that became. As a result, the non-privilege symbol "4" symbol displayed in the non-privilege symbol display area becomes the final stop symbol in the extrusion reach effect. In this way, when the non-privilege symbol display area side wins (satisfies a predetermined condition), the stop symbol is selected from the non-privilege symbol (effect symbol) displayed in the non-privilege symbol display area.

FIG. 78 (x) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 78 (w) in the same variation display as in FIG. 78 (w). On the display screen 7a, as the middle effect symbol 8C, a "4" symbol different from the left and right effect symbols 8 (reach symbol) is stopped and displayed, indicating that the result of the special symbol win / fail judgment is incorrect. Indicates a scene in which the definite out-of-confirmation symbol array) is stopped and displayed.

Next, another execution mode of the extrusion reach effect 309 (specific effect, specific reach effect) will be described with reference to FIG. 79. In this execution mode, the display mode of the partition unit 310 (moving display unit) is changed to show the possibility of giving a privilege (big hit reliability) in the extrusion reach effect. FIG. 79 (a) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 76 (h) in the same variation display as in FIG. 76 (h). In FIG. 79 (a), the push-to-reach effect 309 is continuously executed, and the partition portion 310 changes the display mode at the timing when the non-privilege symbol display area side further pushes the partition portion 310 toward the privilege symbol display area side. The scene in which the background color change effect 317 is executed is shown. In FIG. 79 (A), the partition portion 310 emits light at a predetermined position on the display screen to change the display mode.

FIG. 79 (b) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 79 (a) in the same variation display as in FIG. 79 (a). In FIG. 79 (b), the pressing reach effect 309 is continuously executed, and in the background color change effect 317 executed in FIG. 79 (a), the partition portion 310 changes to the first partition color 310a (shown in a grid pattern). Shows a changed scene. FIG. 79 (c) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 79 (b) in the same variation display as in FIG. 79 (b). In FIG. 79 (c), the background color change effect 317 in the push-to-reach effect 309 is continuously executed, and the privilege symbol displayed in the privilege symbol display area 311 is changed to change the privilege symbol display area side (privilege symbol side). ) Shows a scene in which the partition portion 310 is pushed into the non-privilege symbol display area side.

Further, in the background color change effect 317, the background color of the privilege symbol display area 311 corresponds to the first partition color 310a in response to the movement of the partition portion 310 whose display color is changed to the first partition color 310a. The scene changed to the first background color 317a is shown. Further, in the background color change effect 317, when the partition portion 310 passes, the display area of the passed portion is changed to a color corresponding to (matching the change color) the change color of the partition portion 310. Further, when the background color change effect 317 is executed, it is more likely that the privilege symbol display area 311 will win (satisfy a predetermined condition) than when the background color change effect 317 is not executed. Correspondingly, the number of pushing direction suggestion portions 313 is increasing.

FIG. 79 (d) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 79 (c) in the same variation display as in FIG. 79 (c). In FIG. 79 (d), the background color change effect 317 in the push-to-reach effect 309 is continuously executed, and the privilege symbol display area 311 further pushes the partition portion 310 toward the non-privilege symbol display area 312 side. show. As a result, the display area of the privilege symbol display area 311 having the first background color 317a is expanded. FIG. 79 (e) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 79 (d) in the same variation display as in FIG. 79 (d). In FIG. 79 (e), the background color change effect 317 in the push-to-reach effect 309 is continuously executed, and the privilege symbol display area 311 further pushes the partition portion 310 toward the non-privilege symbol display area 312 side. show.

As a result, the non-privilege symbol display area 312 disappears, and all the display areas become the privilege symbol display area 311 with the first background color 317a, indicating a scene in which the privilege symbol display area side wins. That is, the privilege symbol 311a (first zero symbol) on the privilege symbol display area 311 side pushes out the non-privilege symbol 312b (“4” symbol) of the non-privilege symbol display area 312, and the entire display area becomes the privilege symbol display area. Shows the scene. As a result, when the privilege symbol display area side wins, the first zero symbol, which is the privilege symbol displayed in the privilege symbol display area, becomes the last stop symbol in the extrusion reach effect.

FIG. 79 (f) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 79 (e) in the same variation display as in FIG. 79 (e). On the display screen 7a, as the middle effect symbol 8C, the first zero symbol 282a, which is the same as the left and right effect symbols 8 (reach symbol), is stopped and displayed, and the hit symbol array 284 (specific stop mode) indicating that it is a big hit (hit). , The first specific stop mode) indicates a scene in which the stop is displayed.

Further, in the background color change effect 317 of the present embodiment, the display color of the partition portion 310 is changed to the first partition color (for example, red), and the background color of the display screen is changed to the first in response to the movement of the partition portion 310. An embodiment in which the first background color (for example, red) corresponding to the partition color is used has been described. In addition to such an aspect, a plurality of display colors of the partition portion 310 and a plurality of background colors of the display screen may be provided. For example, the display color of the partition portion is changed to the second partition color (for example, blue), and the background color of the display screen is changed to the second background color corresponding to the second partition color (for example, blue) in response to the movement of the partition portion. ), Or change the display color of the partition to the third partition color (for example, gold), and change the background color of the display screen to the third background color (for example, gold) corresponding to the movement of the partition. , Golden) may be provided.

Further, the possibility that the privilege display area side wins, that is, the privilege is given may differ depending on the display color of the partition portion and the background color of the display screen executed in the background color change effect. For example, the possibility of granting a privilege (the possibility that the privilege display area side wins) may increase in the order of the first partition color, the second partition color, and the third partition color. Further, the possibility of granting the privilege (the possibility that the privilege display area side wins) may be set to 100% (determined) depending on the display color of the partition portion and the background color of the display screen executed in the landscape change effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, the partition portion 310 is displayed on the display screen, but instead of this mode, the movable member can be operated on the display screen, and the partition portion 310 is composed of the movable member. You may. Further, the display color of the movable member may be changed. As a mode for changing the display color of the partition portion composed of the movable member (movable part, movable body), a mode in which a plurality of LEDs (display parts) capable of changing the display color are provided on the movable member will be exemplified. Then, by controlling the lighting of the LED on the movable member in a predetermined display mode (color, blinking, lighting, etc.), it is possible to change the display color of the movable member.

Further, in the present embodiment, the background color of the display area (background) of the display screen through which the partition has passed in response to the movement of the partition (moving display body) is sequentially changed in response to the passage of the partition. And said. In addition to or changing to such an aspect, the character displayed in the display area of the display screen through which the partition portion has passed may be changed to a different character in response to the movement of the partition portion, or the partition portion may be changed to a different character. The shape (display mode) of the character displayed in the display area of the display screen through which the partition portion has passed may be changed in response to the movement of the character. Further, as an example of the moving display body, a partition portion on the display and a partition portion of a movable member are illustrated, but what kind of shape (round shape, square shape, specific character type, brush type, character type) is used for the moving display body. Etc.).

Further, in this embodiment, the background color of almost the entire display area (background) of the display screen is changed according to the color of the partition portion in response to the movement of the partition portion. In addition to or changing to such an embodiment, there is an execution mode in which the moving range of the partition portion becomes a part of the display area on the display screen, and in the case of such an execution mode, the movement of the partition portion is performed. The background color of a part of the display area (background) of the display screen may be changed according to the range to correspond to the color of the partition portion (moving display body). Further, when there are a plurality of execution modes in which the range in which the background color of the display area (background) of the display screen changes is different, the larger the change range may be, the higher the jackpot reliability may be.

In addition, when the background color of the display area (background) of the display screen that the partition has passed in response to the movement of the partition is sequentially changed in response to the passage of the partition, the moving speed of the partition is in the process of moving. (For example, switching between pause, high-speed movement, medium-speed movement, low-speed movement, etc.) may be performed. According to this, the mode of changing the background color of the display area (background) of the display screen is diversified, and the game is enhanced.

Further, as an example of changing the display mode of a predetermined display area on the display screen (correspondingly) with the movement of the moving display body, for example, a brush-shaped moving display body moves on the display screen in a predetermined moving mode. It is possible to exemplify an aspect of moving and changing the display mode of the display area on the display screen of the moved portion in response to the movement.

[Special development production]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 80 to 82, the production mode of the special development effect (stop position development effect, stop order development effect), which is the game effect of the pachinko gaming machine of the fifth embodiment, will be described. In FIG. 80 (a), three first effect hold 9a (pictures of “◯”) are displayed in the first effect hold display area 9c (first effect hold display unit) at the lower left of the display screen 7a. .. It is shown that there are three undigested information (information such as a special symbol hit / miss determination random number) that is acquired and stored based on the ball entering the first starting port 20. Further, in the variable pattern display area 9e at the lower center of the display screen 7a, one variable pattern 9f is displayed with a pattern of "〇" which is slightly larger than the first effect hold 9a. In the variable pattern display area 9e, a variable pattern 9f indicating that the variable display is currently being executed is displayed. Then, depending on the display mode of the variable pattern 9f, the result of the variable display currently being executed may indicate the possibility of becoming a big hit (stop display with the big hit symbol).

FIG. 80 (b) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 80 (a) in the same variation display as in FIG. 80 (a). On the display screen 7a, the effect symbol that fluctuates at high speed decreases the fluctuation speed and shifts to medium speed fluctuation. Further, on the left side of the display screen 7a, the effect symbols of the left symbol array 281L are variably displayed from the upper side to the lower side. In the central portion of the display screen 7a, the effect symbols of the middle symbol array 281C are variably displayed from the upper side to the lower side. On the right side of the display screen 7a, the effect symbols of the right symbol array 281R are variablely displayed from the upper side to the lower side. Further, a background pattern imitating a star is displayed in a substantially central portion of the display screen 7a, indicating that the special development effect 325 described later has been executed. Further, the effect at the start of this special development effect 325 (stop position development effect, stop order development effect) is also referred to as a variable start effect 321 (previous stage effect).

Further, in the special development effect 325 (stop position development effect, stop order development effect), after the start of the game effect, the first (first) stop symbol of the changing effect symbol is displayed at a different stop display position (first area). , 2nd area, or 3rd area). On the other hand, the display mode of the fluctuation start effect 321 is a common display mode regardless of the stop display position (first area, second area, or third area). Just by looking at the variable start effect 321 immediately after the start of the special development effect 325, the person can see which stop display position (first area, second area, etc.) of the first (first) stop symbol of the changing effect symbol is. Alternatively, it is not possible (difficult) to grasp (recognize) whether to stop and display in the third area).

FIG. 80 (c) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 80 (b) in the same variation display as in FIG. 80 (b). Further, in FIG. 80 (c), the special development effect 325 is continuously executed. In FIG. 80 (c), the first zero symbol 282a is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped and displayed) as the left effect symbol 8L in the first region 322 (first stop position) on the left side of the display screen 7a, and the middle effect symbol is displayed. 8C and the right effect symbol 8R show a scene in which the variable display is continued. That is, in FIG. 80 (c), the stop display is performed in the stop mode (stop order, first stop order) in which the left effect symbol 8L is stopped and displayed in the first (first, specific order) among the three effect symbols. The pattern (stop order pattern) is shown.

FIG. 80 (d) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 80 (b) in the same variation display as in FIG. 80 (b). Further, in FIG. 80 (d), the special development effect 325 is continuously executed. In FIG. 80 (d), the first zero symbol 282a is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped and displayed) as the middle effect symbol 8C in the second region 323 (second stop position) in the central portion of the display screen 7a, and the left effect symbol is displayed. 8L and the right effect symbol 8R show a scene in which the variable display is continued. That is, in FIG. 80 (d), the stop display is performed in the stop mode (stop order, second stop order) in which the middle effect symbol 8C is stopped and displayed in the first (first, specific order) among the three effect symbols. The pattern (stop order pattern) is shown.

FIG. 80 (e) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 80 (b) in the same variation display as in FIG. 80 (b). Further, in FIG. 80 (e), the special development effect 325 is continuously executed. In FIG. 80 (e), the third zero symbol 282c is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped and displayed) as the right effect symbol 8R in the third region 324 (third stop position) on the right side of the display screen 7a, and the left effect symbol is displayed. 8L and the medium effect symbol 8C show a scene in which the variable display is continued. That is, in FIG. 80 (e), the right effect symbol 8R is stopped and displayed in the first (first, specific order) stop mode (stop order, third stop order) among the three effect symbols. The pattern (stop order pattern) is shown.

In the special development effect 325 (stop position development effect, stop order development effect), which is the game effect of this embodiment, the stop order of the effect symbol 8 (which effect symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific order) and the first (specific). Depending on which stop position (stop area) the effect symbol 8 to be stopped and displayed in the order) is stopped and displayed, a game effect having a different display mode is subsequently executed (shifted to). FIG. 80 (f) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 80 (c) in the same variation display as in FIG. 80 (c). Further, in FIG. 80 (f), the special development effect 325 of FIG. 80 (c) is continuously executed, and the left effect symbol 8L is the first (specific order) in the first region 322 (first stop position). Shows a scene in which the reach availability effect 326 (first game effect) corresponding to the stop position (stop order) is executed based on the stop display. That is, as the special development effect 325, the reach availability effect 326 is executed corresponding to the stop position (stop order).

Here, the reach possibility effect 326 is whether or not the reach effect is executed (whether the stop symbol becomes the reach symbol), that is, the effect symbol that is stopped and displayed second is the effect symbol that is stopped and displayed first. It is an effect (fanning effect) indicating whether or not it matches (1st zero symbol 282a). In this reach availability effect, if the first stop-displayed effect symbol and the second stop-displayed effect symbol match and the stop symbol is in the reach mode, then a predetermined reach effect is performed. Is executed. As the reach effect that can be executed, a plurality of reach effects having different jackpot reliability and display mode are prepared. In addition, if the first stop-displayed effect symbol and the second stop-displayed effect symbol do not match in the reach availability effect, the reach effect is not executed and the combination of the missed symbols is displayed. And end the variable display.

In FIG. 80 (f), as the right effect symbol 8R which is the second stop symbol, the first zero symbol 282a which matches the left effect symbol 8L which is the first stop display and the non-matching "8" symbol are pressed against each other. Shows a scene in which an effect is performed and an effect that suggests that one of them is stopped and displayed is executed. The player enhances the interest of the game by expecting that the first zero symbol 282a is stopped and displayed as the right effect symbol 8R and the reach effect is executed to become a big hit.

FIG. 81 (g) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 80 (f) in the same variation display as in FIG. 80 (f). Further, in FIG. 81 (g), the special development effect 325 of FIG. 80 (f) is continuously executed, and the right effect symbol 8R that is stopped and displayed second is the left effect symbol 8L that is stopped and displayed first. The first zero symbol 282a, which matches the above, is obtained, and the reach mode is set to show a scene in which the execution of the reach effect is confirmed. Here, the middle effect symbol 8C, which is stopped and displayed at the third (last), continues the variable display.

FIG. 81 (h) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 80 (f) in the same variation display as in FIG. 80 (f). Further, in FIG. 81 (g), as a result of the reach availability effect 326 (first game effect) of FIG. 80 (f), the right effect symbol 8R that was stopped and displayed second was the left effect symbol 8L that was stopped and displayed first. It becomes an "8" symbol that does not match with, and shows a scene in which the out-of-design symbol (out-of-sign symbol arrangement) is stopped and displayed without executing the reach effect. In the reach availability effect, the case of the “0” symbol is illustrated as the effect symbol constituting the reach mode, but the effect symbols other than the “0” symbol 282 (“1”, “2”, etc., non-specific symbols) are used. Even if there is, there may be a case where it becomes a reach mode in the reach possibility production. Of course, the effect symbol that is the reach mode in the reach availability effect may be limited to the "0" symbol. Further, the reach mode in this case includes a case where the "0" symbol in a different display mode is stopped and displayed.

FIG. 81 (i) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 80 (d) in the same variation display as in FIG. 80 (d). Further, in FIG. 81 (i), the special development effect 325 of FIG. 80 (d) is continuously executed, and the middle effect symbol 8C is ranked first (specific order) in the second region 322 (first stop position). Based on the stop display, the scene in which the pseudo-variation effect 327 (second game effect) corresponding to the stop position (stop order) is executed is shown. That is, as the special development effect 325, the pseudo variation effect 327 is executed corresponding to the stop position (stop order).

Here, the pseudo-variation effect 327 is a variation display of one effect symbol, in which one or a plurality (all) of the effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in a variable manner during the variation display, thereby displaying the variation a plurality of times. It is a game production that makes it look as if the variable display of is executed. As a result, the player feels that the variable display is executed more times than the originally executed variable display number, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the big hit. Further, in the pseudo-variation effect 327 of the present embodiment, the effect symbol (temporary stop symbol) displayed (temporarily stop display) in the pseudo-variation effect is displayed in a stop display mode (for example, "333") composed of three effect symbols. ) Is a production symbol (stop symbol).

Therefore, when the temporary stop display is executed a plurality of times in the pseudo-variation effect, if two of the temporarily stop-displayed effect symbols match, the reach mode is set, and if three of them match, the stop is performed. The display mode may be the hit symbol array 284 or the transition symbol array 285 described above. As a result, a predetermined game privilege is given to the player, so such a stop display mode is also referred to as a privilege-giving symbol array. Here, "matching" includes a case where the exact same effect symbol is stopped and displayed (for example, "555" or a zero symbol having the same display mode) and a case where the zero symbol in a different display mode is stopped and displayed.

Further, in this pseudo-variation effect, the effect symbols constituting the privilege symbol array by temporarily stopping and displaying may be limited to the above-mentioned "0" symbol 282 (specific symbol), or other than the "0" symbol 282. It is also possible to configure the privilege symbol arrangement by temporarily stopping and displaying the effect symbols (non-specific symbols such as "1" and "2").

FIG. 81 (i) shows the temporary stop display in the pseudo-variation effect 327 executed based on the first stop display of the middle effect symbol 8C (the effect symbol is the first stop display in the second area). The first zero symbol 282a shows a scene in which the first zero symbol 282a is moved and displayed toward the upper left portion of the display screen. FIG. 81 (j) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 81 (i) in the same variation display as in FIG. 81 (i). Further, in FIG. 81 (j), the pseudo-variation effect 327 (second game effect) of FIG. 81 (i) is continuously executed. In FIG. 81 (j), the first zero symbol 282a of the first temporarily stopped symbol moved and displayed in FIG. 81 (i) is displayed on the sub-symbol display section on the upper left of the display screen (“0 ↓↓”). In the main symbol display section in the center of the display screen, the pseudo-variation effect 327 is continuously displayed, and the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all varied and displayed, and the effect symbol is started to be displayed again. Is shown.

The sub-symbol display unit is provided in a relatively small size at the upper left of the display screen as compared with the main symbol display unit in the center of the display screen. Further, the effect symbol displayed on the sub-symbol display unit becomes an effect symbol displayed on the main symbol display unit after the pseudo-variation display. Further, as shown in the sub-symbol display unit of FIG. 81 (j), the first temporary stop symbol in the pseudo-variation effect 327 is the left effect symbol 8L.

FIG. 81 (k) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 81 (j) in the same variation display as in FIG. 81 (j). Further, in FIG. 81 (k), the pseudo-variation effect 327 (second game effect) of FIG. 81 (j) is continuously executed, and after the variation is displayed again, the second zero symbol as the middle effect symbol 8C is executed. 282b shows a scene in which the temporary stop is displayed in the second area 323. After the start of the change of the effect symbol, the middle effect symbol 8C is stopped and displayed in the second area 323 (second stop position) as the first stop display symbol, and the pseudo variation effect 327 (second game effect) is executed. In that case, during the execution of the pseudo-variation effect 327, the middle effect symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with a predetermined effect symbol.

FIG. 81 (l) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 80 (k) in the same variation display as in FIG. 81 (k). Further, in FIG. 81 (l), the pseudo-variation effect 327 of FIG. 81 (k) is continuously executed, and in FIG. 81 (k), the middle effect symbol 8C is again in the first (specific order) second region. Based on the temporary stop display at 322 (first stop position), a scene is shown in which the temporary stop symbol is moved and displayed on the sub symbol display unit. The second zero symbol 282b of the temporary stop symbol shown in FIG. 81 (l) is the second temporary stop symbol in the pseudo-variation effect 327 (second game effect).

FIG. 82 (m) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 81 (l) in the same variation display as in FIG. 81 (l). Further, in FIG. 82 (m), the pseudo-variation effect 327 (second game effect) of FIG. 81 (l) is continuously executed. In FIG. 82 (m), the second zero symbol 282a of the second temporarily stopped symbol moved and displayed in FIG. 81 (l) is displayed on the sub symbol display section on the upper left of the display screen (“0 ↓ 0”). In the main symbol display section in the center of the display screen, the pseudo-variation effect 327 is continuously displayed, and the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all varied and displayed, and the effect symbol is repeatedly (repeatedly) changed and displayed. Shows the scene where

On the sub-symbol display unit, the first zero symbol, which is the first temporary stop symbol in the pseudo-variation effect 327, is stopped and displayed as the left effect symbol, and the second zero symbol, which is the second temporary stop symbol, is displayed on the right. The stop display is performed as a symbol, and these temporary stop symbols form a part of the stop display mode of the effect symbol of the sub symbol display unit. Further, as shown in the sub-symbol display unit of FIG. 82 (m), the second temporary stop symbol in the pseudo-variation effect 327 is the right effect symbol 8L. In this way, among the three effect symbols constituting the stop display mode, it differs depending on the number of temporary stop symbols of the pseudo-variation effect 327 (depending on the time of the temporary stop display of the pseudo-variation effect). It is considered to be a position effect symbol (the first is the left effect symbol, the second is the right effect symbol, and the third time, which will be described later, is the middle effect symbol).

FIG. 82 (n) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 82 (m) in the same variation display as in FIG. 82 (m). Further, in FIG. 82 (n), the pseudo-variation effect 327 (second game effect) of FIG. 82 (m) is continuously executed, and after the variation is displayed again, the third zero symbol as the middle effect symbol 8C is executed. 282c shows a scene in which the temporary stop is displayed in the second area 323. At this time, the first zero symbol is stopped and displayed as the left effect symbol and the second zero symbol is stopped and displayed as the right effect symbol on the sub symbol display unit (the middle effect symbol is being displayed in a variable manner), as shown in FIG. 82 (n). By the temporary stop display of the third zero symbol 282c in the pseudo-variation effect 327, the player can determine that the stop display modes of the effect symbols displayed on the sub-symbol display unit are all the same effect symbols (transition symbol array 285). Becomes recognizable. This enhances the interest of the game. The third zero symbol 282c of the temporary stop symbol shown in FIG. 82 (n) is the third temporary stop symbol in the pseudo-variation effect 327 (second game effect).

FIG. 82 (o) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 82 (n) in the same variation display as in FIG. 82 (n). Further, in FIG. 82 (o), the pseudo-variation effect 327 (second game effect) of FIG. 82 (n) is continuously executed, and the third zero symbol 282c temporarily stopped and displayed in FIG. 82 (n) is displayed. After moving and displaying on the sub-symbol display unit, the stop display mode of the effect symbol displayed on the sub-symbol display unit is moved and displayed in the center of the display screen to show a magnified display. Further, the third temporary stop symbol of the pseudo-variation effect shown in FIG. 82 (n) is the middle effect symbol 8C among the three effect symbols constituting the stop display mode.

FIG. 82 (o) shows a stop display mode composed of a temporary stop symbol (temporary stop display symbol) of the pseudo-variation effect 327 (second game effect), and the left effect symbol is the first temporary stop symbol. The first zero symbol 282a, the right effect symbol is the second temporary stop symbol 282b, and the middle effect symbol is the third zero symbol 282c, which is the third temporary stop symbol. Further, the stop display mode is composed of "0" symbols 282 having different display modes, and has a transition symbol array 285 (specific stop mode, second specific stop mode).

FIG. 82 (p) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 82 (o) in the same variation display as in FIG. 82 (o). In FIG. 82 (p), three “0” symbols 282 having different display modes are used as other effect symbols based on the transition symbol array 285 being stopped (temporarily stopped displayed) in FIG. 82 (o). A scene in which the changing symbol change effect 288 is being executed is shown. Since the execution mode of the symbol change effect 288 is the same as the mode shown in FIG. 65 (i) and the like, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In this way, in the case of the stop order in which the first stop-displayed effect symbol becomes the middle effect symbol after the start of the variable display of the effect symbol (when the first stop-displayed effect symbol is stopped-displayed in the second area). Is executed with the above-mentioned pseudo-variation effect (second game effect).

FIG. 82 (q) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 80 (e) in the same variation display as in FIG. 80 (e). Further, in FIG. 82 (q), the special development effect 325 of FIG. 80 (d) is continuously executed, and the right effect symbol 8R is the first (specific order) in the third region 324 (third stop position). Based on the stop display, the scene in which the SP reach effect 328 (third game effect, battle reach effect) corresponding to the stop position (stop order) is executed is shown. That is, as the special development effect 325, the SP reach effect 328 is executed corresponding to the stop position (stop order). In addition, this SP reach production (third game production) is considered to be a game production with high jackpot reliability as compared with the reach availability production (first game production) and pseudo-variation production (second game production) described above. There is. Further, the pseudo-variable effect (second game effect) is said to be a game effect with higher hit reliability than the reach availability effect (first game effect).

Here, the SP reach production 328 is called a special reach production, and is considered to be a game production with particularly high reliability among the reach productions, and when this SP reach production is executed, the player is a big hit. Not only does it raise expectations for the game, but it also raises the interest in playing games. Since the execution of the SP reach effect was confirmed based on the fact that the right effect symbol 8R stopped and displayed in the third area 324 (third stop position) in the first (specific order), the left effect symbol is shown in FIG. 82 (q). It shows a scene in which the (same) third zero symbol 282c that matches the right effect symbol 8R that has already been stopped and displayed as 8L is stopped and displayed, and the reach mode is such that the third zero symbol 282c is the reach symbol.

FIG. 82 (r) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 82 (q) in the same variation display as in FIG. 82 (q). Further, in FIG. 82 (r), the SP reach effect 328 (third game effect) started in FIG. 82 (q) is continuously executed, and the ally character and the enemy character are displayed in the center of the display screen. It is displayed, and 5 ★ are displayed at the bottom of the display screen to indicate that it is a game production with high jackpot reliability, and in the upper right of the display screen, the production design of the reach mode with the 3rd zero symbol as the reach symbol ("" 0 ↓ 0 ") is displayed small, and the characters" SP reach "are displayed in the upper left of the display screen.

As described above, in the special development effect (stop position development effect, stop order development effect) of the present embodiment, the effect symbol (specific symbol or non-specific symbol) of a predetermined (specific order) after the start of the variable display of the effect symbol Depending on the stop position and the stop order, game effects having different display modes are executed (first game effect, second game effect, third game effect). As a result, attention is paid to which identification symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed at which position in which order, and the interest of the game is enhanced. In addition, the new game production makes it possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Next, with reference to FIG. 83, another execution mode of the above-mentioned special development effect will be described. In this execution mode, an effect of inciting which effect symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific order (first) after the start of the variable display of the effect symbol is added. As a result, the player's desired effect symbol (left effect symbol, middle effect symbol, or right effect symbol) is expected to be stopped and displayed.

In FIG. 83 (a), the effect symbol that fluctuates at high speed decreases the fluctuation speed and shifts to medium speed fluctuation. Further, on the left side of the display screen 7a, the effect symbols of the left symbol array 281L are variably displayed from the upper side to the lower side. In the central portion of the display screen 7a, the effect symbols of the middle symbol array 281C are variably displayed from the upper side to the lower side. On the right side of the display screen 7a, the effect symbols of the right symbol array 281R are variablely displayed from the upper side to the lower side. Further, a background pattern imitating a star is displayed in a substantially central portion of the display screen 7a, indicating that the special development effect 325 described later has been executed. Further, the effect at the start of this special development effect 325 (stop position development effect, stop order development effect) is also referred to as a variable start effect 321 (previous stage effect).

FIG. 83 (b) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 83 (a) in the same variation display as in FIG. 83 (a). In FIG. 83 (b), the first zero symbol 282a is temporarily stopped and displayed in the first area 322 as the left effect symbol 8L as a semi-transparent (indicated by a broken line), and the third zero symbol as the middle effect symbol 8C is displayed in the second area 323. 282c is temporarily stopped and displayed semi-transparently (indicated by a broken line), and the second zero symbol 282b is temporarily stopped and displayed as a right effect symbol 8R in the third area 324 (indicated by a broken line). In addition, it is shown that the first stop symbol has not been determined by shaking and fluctuating the effect symbol that is semi-transparent (indicated by the broken line) and temporarily stopped and displayed.

Further, by indicating (displaying) these "0" symbols 282 in a semi-transparent manner (indicated by a broken line), any of the effect symbols (left effect symbol, middle effect symbol, or right effect symbol) is the first (specific order). ) Indicates the execution scene of the first stop notice effect 331 (first stop symbol notice effect) indicating whether to display the stop. The first stop notice effect 331 is a game effect (notice effect) in which the player is shown in a stepwise effect which effect symbol is stopped and displayed in the first (specific order). As a result, the player raises the expectation that the desired effect symbol (left effect symbol, middle effect symbol, or right effect symbol) is stopped and displayed first.

FIG. 83 (c) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 83 (b) in the same variation display as in FIG. 83 (b). In FIG. 83 (c), the first stop notice effect 331 shown in FIG. 83 (b) is continuously executed, the right effect symbol 8R changes from translucent to the display state, the variable display is restarted, and the left The effect symbol 8L and the medium effect symbol 8C show a scene in which the state of translucency (indicated by a broken line) and the state of shaking fluctuation is maintained. This is because, in the first stop notice effect 331, the right effect symbol 8R is excluded from the target of the first stop display, and the effect symbols that may be the first stop display are the left effect symbol 8L and the middle effect symbol 8C. It shows that there is.

FIG. 83 (d) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 83 (c) in the same variation display as in FIG. 83 (c). In FIG. 83 (d), the first stop notice effect 331 shown in FIG. 83 (c) is continuously executed, and in addition to the right effect symbol 8R, the middle effect symbol 8C changes from translucent to the display state. The fluctuation display is restarted, and the left effect symbol 8L shows a scene in which the state of translucent (indicated by a broken line) and shaking fluctuation is maintained. This is because, in the first stop notice effect 331, the right effect symbol 8R and the middle effect symbol 8C are excluded from the target of the first stop display, and the effect symbol that may be the first stop display is the left effect symbol 8L. It shows that there is. Further, at this point, the player can recognize that the effect symbol that is first stopped and displayed is the left effect symbol 8L.

FIG. 83 (e) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 83 (d) in the same variation display as in FIG. 83 (d). FIG. 83 (e) continuously executes the first stop notice effect 331 shown in FIG. 83 (d), and the left effect symbol 8L is stopped and displayed in the first area 322 (first stop position). Is shown. As a result, it was confirmed that the first effect symbol to be stopped and displayed out of the three effect symbols 8 is the left effect symbol 8L. Further, since the left effect symbol 8L is stopped and displayed first, the reach enablement effect 326 (first game effect) described above is executed thereafter. Since the execution mode of the reachability effect 326 has been described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, in the first stop notice effect 331, when the middle effect symbol 8C is confirmed as the effect symbol to be stopped and displayed first, the above-mentioned pseudo-variation effect 327 (second game effect) is executed, and the right effect symbol 8R is executed. Is determined as the first stop-displayed effect symbol, the SP reach effect 328 (third game effect) described above is executed.

As described above, the first stop notice effect makes it possible to perform an effect of expecting which effect symbol is to be stopped and displayed in the first (specific order), and to enhance the game effect. Further, in the above-described execution mode, which effect symbol (left effect symbol, middle effect symbol, or right effect symbol) is the first stop-displayed effect symbol, and which stop is the first stop-displayed effect symbol. It was decided to execute a game effect having a different display mode depending on whether the display is stopped at the position. In addition to or changing to such an aspect, which effect symbol (left effect symbol, middle effect symbol, or right effect symbol) is displayed as the second stop display, or the second stop display is performed. Depending on which stop position the effect symbol is stopped and displayed, a game effect having a different display mode may be executed. In addition, which effect symbol (left effect symbol, middle effect symbol, or right effect symbol) is the effect symbol that is stopped and displayed at the third (last), and which stop is the effect symbol that is stopped and displayed at the third (last). Depending on whether the display is stopped at a position, a game effect having a different display mode may be executed.

In the fifth embodiment, a game production (design change production, blinking stock production, countdown reach production, push joint reach production, special development production, first stop) different from the notice production (conversation notice, step-up notice, etc.) described in the first embodiment. Notice production) will be explained. Similar to the first embodiment, the game effect of the fifth embodiment can be a notice effect of the determination target (executable) in both the low load state and the high load state. As a result, it is possible to reduce only the number of advance notice effects belonging to the advance notice effect type while maintaining the number and types of the advance notice effect species as much as possible (without reducing as much as possible).

Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the advance notice determination table for the high load state (game effect determination table) is compared with the advance notice determination table for the low load state (game effect determination table), and the determination target is set. While maintaining the number and types of advance notice effect types (game effect types), only the number of advance notice effects belonging to the advance notice effect type is reduced. Therefore, the above-mentioned game effect can be executed in any of the low load state and the high load state, but the number of execution modes differs depending on the state. As a result, it is better to perform the advance notice effect determination process using the high load state advance notice determination table than to perform the advance notice effect determination process using the low load state advance notice determination table. The amount of processing was decided to be reduced.

Specifically, in the low load state, all the patterns of the game effect described above may be executed, and in the high load state, some patterns of the game effect described above may be executed. For example, in a low load state, all execution modes of the game effect can be executed. On the other hand, in a high load state, only a part of the display modes of the game effect can be executed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the execution frequency of a predetermined game effect and display the execution mode of the game effect with high reliability, reduce the control load in a high load state, and prevent the deterioration of the game interest as much as possible. It becomes possible to do. Further, in the above-described execution mode, more execution modes may be executed in the low load state than in the high load state.

Further, instead of such an aspect, the game effect of this embodiment is set as a notice effect that can be determined in the notice determination table for the low load state as a notice effect that can be executed in the low load state, and cannot be executed in the high load state. As a notice effect, it may be a notice effect that cannot be determined at the notice determination table for a high load state. As a result, it is possible to change the advance notice effect to be determined according to the control processing amount of the game effect control unit, diversify the execution mode of the advance notice effect, and optimize the control process applied to the game effect control unit. Become.

Further, instead of such an aspect, the game effect of this embodiment is set as a notice effect that can be determined in the notice determination table for the high load state as a notice effect that can be executed in the high load state, and cannot be executed in the low load state. As a notice effect, it may be a notice effect that cannot be determined at the notice determination table for a low load state. Even in such an aspect, the advance notice effect to be determined is changed according to the control processing amount of the game effect control unit, the execution mode of the advance notice effect is diversified, and the control process applied to the game effect control unit is optimized. It becomes possible.

[Other Aspect 1]
In the above-described first embodiment, the advance notice determination table for the high load state is compared with the advance notice determination table for the low load state, and the advance notice effect is maintained while maintaining the number and types of the advance notice effect types to be determined. Only the number of notice effects belonging to the species is reduced. As a result, it is better to perform the advance notice effect determination process using the high load state advance notice determination table than to perform the advance notice effect determination process using the low load state advance notice determination table. The amount of processing was decided to be reduced. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, as shown in FIG. 60, in the advance notice determination table for the high load state, the advance notice effect species that can be executed while reducing the number of advance notice effects to be determined as compared with the advance notice determination table for the low load state. You may change the type of.

Specifically, in the notice determination table for the low load state shown in FIG. 52, four types of notice effects such as conversation notice effect, step-up notice effect, cut-in notice effect, and movable part notice effect can be executed. .. On the other hand, in the notice determination table for the low load state of the other aspect 1 shown in FIG. There is. According to this aspect, in a low load state, a total of 15 types of advance notice effects belonging to 4 types of advance notice effect types are targeted for determination, and 0 to a maximum of 4 advance notice effects can be executed. Further, in a high load state, a total of 6 types of advance notice effects belonging to 4 types of advance notice effect types are targeted for determination, and 0 to a maximum of 4 advance notice effects can be executed. The step-up notice effect and the cut-in notice effect are the notice effect type (notice effect) dedicated to the low load state, and the pattern notice effect and the background notice effect are the notice effect type (notice effect) dedicated to the high load state. Will be done.

As a result, the advance notice effect dedicated to the low load state is provided even in the low load state, and the advance notice effect dedicated to the high load state is provided even in the high load state. Therefore, the control load of the sub control unit becomes an issue. While preventing it, it is possible to diversify the game production in both states. Further, in the other aspect 1, although some of the advance notice effect types are different, all the feasible advance notice effect types may be changed to different advance notice effect types. Further, in the advance notice effect species to be determined in the advance notice determination table for the high load state, the number of advance notice effects belonging to at least one advance notice effect type is reduced. Regarding the advance notice production type, the number of advance notice effects to which the notice effect belongs may be reduced. Further, for all the advance notice effect types, the number of advance notice effects to which they belong may be fixed to one advance notice effect.

Here, the pattern notice effect is a possibility of becoming a big hit by displaying a pattern such as a predetermined character, a pattern, or a background displayed on the display screen 7a in a pattern different from the normal pattern (special game). It is a notice production showing the feasibility of. For example, the moon character displayed in the background is usually displayed in yellow, but is made into a polka dot pattern at a predetermined timing. As a result, the player is notified that the result of the variable display of the effect symbol having the polka dot pattern is a predetermined degree (for example, 10%) of the possibility of becoming a big hit. In addition, by displaying the moon character in a tiger pattern, it is notified that the possibility of a big hit is higher than that of a polka dot and the possibility of a big hit is high (for example, 50%).

Further, the background notice effect indicates the feasibility of the special game by displaying a specific character on the display screen 7a at a predetermined timing during the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol). In this example, when a "rainbow" is displayed on the display screen 7a, it is assumed that the possibility of executing the special game is relatively high (for example, 33%).

[Other Aspect 2]
In the above-described second embodiment, the advance notice effect type to be determined in the notice determination table for the high load state is one of the advance notice effect types (4 types) to be determined in the advance notice determination table for the low load state. By fixing to the type (cut-in notice effect), the amount of processing related to the advance notice effect determination process is reduced. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. In the advance notice determination table for the high load state of the second embodiment, one of the advance notice effect types to be determined in the advance notice determination table for the low load state is used as it is (with the same number and types of advance notice effects to which it belongs). ) It is supposed to be used. In this other aspect, instead of this, the content of the advance notice effect type to be determined in the advance notice determination table for the high load state shall be partially changed.

Specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 61 (A), as the advance notice determination table for the high load state, the advance notice effect is determined by fixing to the cut-in advance notice effect type included in the low load state, but the cut-in advance notice is determined. As the advance notice effect belonging to the effect type, it is possible to execute a advance notice effect different from the advance notice effect belonging to the cut-in advance notice effect type to be determined in the advance notice determination table for the low load state. In addition, the number of notice effects belonging to the cut-in notice effect species is increasing. As a result, in the high load state, the number of advance notice effects to be determined is significantly reduced as compared with the low load state, but the number of advance notice effects to which the determination target is specified is increasing. , It is possible to diversify the production mode of the advance notice production type.

Therefore, in the other aspect 2, in the high load state, the number of advance notice effect species to be determined and the number of advance notice effects are reduced (fixed) as compared with the low load state, but the advance notice effect to be determined is determined. Regarding the number of advance notice effects belonging to the species, the high load state is characterized in that it is larger than the low load state. As a result, it is possible to diversify the game production in a high load state and enhance the game entertainment.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 61B, the advance notice determination table for the high load state is fixed to the cut-in advance notice effect type included in the advance notice determination table for the low load state, and the advance notice effect type (cut-in) is further fixed. The mode in which the determinable notice effect belonging to the notice effect type) is also fixed is shown. That is, in this aspect, it is determined whether or not to execute the advance notice effect in the advance notice effect determination process, and when it is determined that the advance notice effect is to be executed, a specific advance notice effect (in this example, the cut-in related to the character C) is always performed. Notice production) is executed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the amount of processing for the advance notice effect determination process in a high load state as much as possible, and it is possible to prevent the control related to the game effect of the sub control unit from becoming excessive.

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 61 (C-1) and 61 (C-2), the number of advance notice effect species to be determined by the advance notice determination table for the high load state is determined by the advance notice determination table for the low load state. Although the number is smaller than the number of the target advance notice production species, the mode in which the number is set to a plurality of advance notice effect species is shown. Specifically, the cut-in notice production type and the pattern notice production type are to be determined. That is, it is possible to determine and execute up to two types of advance notice effects (notice effects). In addition, some of the notice effect types to be decided in the notice determination table for the high load state are different from the notice effect types to be decided in the notice decision table for the low load state, and some of them are the same rehearsal effect species. However, instead of this, all may be different notice production types, or all may be the same notice production type.

[Other Aspect 3]
Further, as another aspect, it is also possible to set a high load state and a low load state according to the gaming state. Specifically, the first control is a state in which the number of controls related to the game effect (pieces / second) is large, which is obtained by dividing the number of controls related to the game effect that needs to be executed during the variable display of the effect symbol by the average fluctuation time. It is also possible to set a state and a state less than the first control state as a second control state. As an example of this, it is possible to set the second control state as a time-saving state in which the average fluctuation time is short, and the first control state as a non-time-saving state (normal state) in which the average fluctuation time is longer than the time-saving state. Therefore, in the non-time saving state (normal state) in which the first control state (specific flag OFF state) is set, the number of advance notice effects (game effects) to be determined by the advance notice effect determination process (game effect determination process) is secondly controlled. It is possible to execute various game effects by increasing the number of states, and in the time-saving state in which the second control state (specific flag ON state) is set, the advance notice effect (game effect) to be determined by the advance notice effect determination process. It is possible to prevent the control load of the sub-control unit from becoming an issue by reducing the number of

[Other Aspect 4]
Further, as another aspect, a game effect involving input to the effect button (first effect button 63a or second effect button 63b) may be executed in a high load state. Further, a high load state may be set when the display control amount of the board lamp, the frame lamp, or the like becomes abnormal by a predetermined amount. Further, a high load state may be set when a game effect accompanied by motion control of a movable portion is executed, or when a game effect accompanied by motion control of a movable portion and a particularly large amount of control processing related to motion control is performed. In either case, the specific flag shall be turned ON when the load is high.

[Other Aspect 5]
Further, as another aspect, when the low load state is set during the big hit game, the notice effect is determined during the big hit game based on a notice effect determination table or the like different from that during the non-big hit game. Then, the variable display to be determined such as the advance notice effect may be the variable display related to the pending information for which the variable start condition is not satisfied. That is, during the big hit game in which the load on the control processing of the sub control unit is low, the advance notice effect of the execution schedule related to the hold information is determined using the advance notice determination table for the low load state in which various advance notice effects can be determined. By doing so, it becomes possible to execute various game effects even in a high load state after that.

In addition, during the low load state (during the big hit game), a predetermined number of notice effect execution patterns that can execute one or more notice effects are created and stored, and the variation display of each effect symbol after the end of the big hit is displayed. It is also possible to select from the advance notice effect execution pattern and execute it each time it starts. This notice effect execution pattern can be updated each time a low load state (big hit game) occurs.

[Other Aspect 6]
It should be noted that, among the first, third, and fourth embodiments, two or more configurations may be combined to set a state in which a high load state is determined, that is, a state in which the specific flag is turned ON. For example, the specific flag may be turned ON at both times during the execution of the effect start process at the time of entering the ball and the execution of the variable effect start process, and the specific flag may be turned OFF at other times. Further, when the effect start process at the time of entering the ball and the variable effect start process are executed in duplicate, it may be regarded as a high load state and the specific flag may be turned ON. Further, the application patterns of the notice determination table for the low load state and the notice determination table for the high load state described in the examples and other embodiments can be applied to other embodiments or other embodiments. .. All of these combinations are included in the present invention.

[Other Aspect 7]
Further, in the present embodiment, the value "M" of the effect mode counter is set to a different value depending on the type of hit, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. As another aspect, the effect mode set according to the type of hit may be continued until the gaming state changes. Changes in the game state include, for example, the execution of the next big hit game, the change from the high probability state to the low probability state, the change from the open extension state to the non-open extension state, and the time saving state. It may change to a non-time saving state. It also includes the opposite of these aspects.

[Other Aspect 8]
Next, another aspect 3 of Example 1 and Reference Example described above will be described. In the third aspect of the present invention, in the second prize-winning device 36 of the first embodiment and the reference example, a shutter member (also referred to as an “acting member”) that allows or blocks the passage of the game ball into the specific area 39 inside. ) Can be provided. That is, when the second prize-winning device 36 is provided with the shutter member and the shutter member is in the first state of obstructing (preventing) the passage of the game ball into the specific area 39, the ball enters the second prize-winning opening 35. The game ball has passed through a non-specific area other than the specific area 39, and when the shutter member is in the second state of allowing the game ball to pass through the specific area 39, the game ball has entered the second large winning opening 35. May be configured to pass through a specific area 39 instead of a non-specific area. The solenoid that drives the shutter member is connected to the main control board 80. When such a shutter member is provided, the shutter member may be controlled to the first state to close the specific area 39 during 1R and 2R when the second big winning opening 35 is opened in the 15R second big hit. ..

In this way, even if the game ball enters the second large winning opening 35 during the opening for a very short time of 0.1 seconds, the game ball is surely prevented from passing through the specific area 39. be able to. Further, in 1R and 2R in the 15R second jackpot, the shutter member is closed when the shutter member is in the second state, and the second prize opening 35 is opened when the shutter member is in the first state. If the opening and closing control of the large winning opening 35 is performed, even if the maximum opening time of the second large winning opening 35 is set to a length that allows the game ball to enter sufficiently (for example, 28 seconds), the game can be played in the specific area 39. It is possible to prevent the ball from passing through. When it is desired to pass the game ball through the specific area 39 in the 15R first big hit or the like, the shutter member may be controlled to the second state while the second big winning opening 35 is open. That is, the shutter member may be controlled to the second state during the above-mentioned V effective period (first period). Further, in the first embodiment, it is possible to pass through a specific area even if it is a small hit, but by setting the shutter member in the first state during the small hit game, the game ball is specified during the small hit game. It can be prevented from passing through the area. Further, in addition to this configuration, whether or not the game ball that has entered the second special winning opening 35 has passed through the specific area 39 due to the installation location of the specific area 39 and the covering portion provided in front of the player side of the specific area 39. May be a mode that is difficult for the player to see.

[Other Aspect 9]
Whether or not the processing amount of the control related to the game effect is larger than the predetermined amount can be determined by whether or not the processing amount of the control related to the game effect excluding the game effect determining process is larger than the predetermined amount. When the amount of control related to the game effect excluding the game effect determination process is small, a large amount of processing is performed as the game effect determination process, and the amount of control related to the game effect excluding the game effect determination process is large. In this case, a determination process with a small amount of processing is performed as a game effect determination process. As a result, it is possible to balance the control load related to the game effect control unit by changing the processing amount of the game effect determination process according to the control processing amount (processing state) related to the game effect excluding the game effect determination process. .. In addition, it is possible to perform various game effects by controlling appropriate game effects without imposing an excessive load on the game effect control unit.

Further, in the above-described configuration of the gaming machine, the "game effect" refers to an effect performed using a predetermined character or an effect performed using identification information (effect symbol, special symbol, etc.), for example, a notice effect, Character production and reach production can be mentioned. Further, the game production is considered to belong to any one of the plurality of game production types. Further, as a notice effect, a pseudo-variation notice effect may be provided. The pseudo-variation notice effect is a notice effect that indicates that the result of the special symbol winning / failing judgment may be a big hit. It is a production that makes it appear as if it is displayed in a pseudo manner multiple times. For example, "pseudo 1 (pseudo-variation 1)" means that after the start of the variation display of the effect symbol, the temporary stop display and the re-variation display are performed once to make it appear that the variation display is performed twice. It is a production, and as the number of pseudo 2 and pseudo 3 increases, the number of pseudo fluctuation displays increases, and at the same time, the jackpot reliability also increases.

Further, in the above-described configuration of the gaming machine, a variable entry port that can be changed into a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which a game ball cannot enter, and a first hit / fail determination or It is possible to provide a special game execution unit capable of executing a special game in which the variable entry port (large winning opening) is in a state where the ball can be entered when the result of the second hit / fail determination is successful. Further, the "starting port" may be a variable starting port that can be changed into the first aspect and the second aspect in which the possibility of entering the game ball is higher than that of the first aspect, and the "starting port" is The variable start port may be provided separately. In addition, there are a first game state in which the frequency of entering the game ball into the variable start port is a predetermined frequency, and a second game state in which the frequency of entry of the game ball into the variable start port is higher than in the first game state. It can be provided with a game state setting unit to be set to. Here, it is assumed that 0 is included in the "predetermined frequency".

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the number of times the first large winning opening or the second large winning opening is opened in one round is set to one, but the number of times the first large winning opening or the second large winning opening is opened in one round is set. It may be multiple times or may have different open times.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the control process of preferentially digesting the second special figure hold over the first special figure hold, the so-called special figure 2 priority control process, is not limited to this, and the first special figure hold is not limited to this. May be a control process that gives priority to the second special figure hold, that is, a so-called special figure 1 priority control process. In addition, no priority is set for the digestion of the first special figure hold and the digestion of the second special figure hold, and the oldest memorized one of the first special figure hold and the second special figure hold is digested in order. It may be a control treatment, that is, a control process of so-called entry order (memory order) digestion.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine having a specific region 39 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special symbol winning / failing determination is made without having the specific region 39 in the large winning opening. It can also be applied to a type of gaming machine in which it is determined whether or not a high probability state is given after the end of the jackpot game based only on the result (type of jackpot symbol displayed stopped). Needless to say, "based on the fact that the special symbol is a big hit in the hit / fail judgment (the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed at the big hit symbol)", this type of gaming machine is also implemented. The pachinko gaming machine of Example 1 and other types of gaming machines are also included. In addition, it is a type of pachinko game machine that does not have a probability setting unit (no high probability state), has a specific area inside, and is in a ball-entry state in which a game ball can enter and a game ball can enter. It is equipped with a large winning opening that can be changed to an impossible entry impossible state, and the large winning opening is in a state where it is possible to enter the ball for a predetermined time when the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the entry to the starting opening is a small hit. When a game ball enters a large winning opening that is ready for a ball and the game ball passes through a specific area, it becomes a big hit and a big hit game is executed, which is also applied to a pachinko gaming machine to which a predetermined privilege is given. This pachinko game machine is a so-called type 1 type 2 mixer, and when the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the entry into the starting port becomes a big hit, the big hit game is executed without requiring passage to a specific area. In addition, as a privilege, it is possible to generate a high base state in which the frequency of entering the game ball into the starting port is increased. Further, it is possible to have a first starting port and a second starting port, and to generate a high base state in which the frequency of entering the ball into the second starting port is increased. The present invention can be applied to all these types of gaming machines.

[others]
(Reference Invention 1)
In a gaming machine that has a plurality of effect modes and executes different game effects depending on the effect mode to be executed as in a conventional game machine, the burden of control processing when executing the game effect increases, and the game machine It could not be said that it was the optimum control process, and there was room for improvement. The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine having various gaming effects, which performs optimal effect control processing and enhances the interest of the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1 is
An identification information display unit that fluctuates and displays identification information based on the establishment of predetermined conditions,
A variable entry port that can be changed to a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which a game ball cannot enter.
A game production control unit that executes control related to game production,
A gaming machine including a special game execution unit that executes a special game that enables the variable entry port to enter a ball when the result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific result.
The game state includes a first control state in which the control processing amount of the game effect control unit is a predetermined amount, and a second control state in which the control processing amount of the game effect control unit is larger than that of the first control state. ,
The game effect control unit includes a advance notice effect storage unit that stores a plurality of advance notice effects having different execution modes, a advance notice effect determination unit that determines a advance notice effect to be executed from the advance notice effect stored by the advance notice effect storage unit, and the advance notice effect. It has a notice effect execution unit that executes the advance notice effect determined by the effect determination unit.
The advance notice effect execution unit indicates the feasibility of the special game by executing the advance notice effect in a predetermined execution mode in accordance with the variable display of the identification information.
As the advance notice effect to be decided by the advance notice effect determination unit in the first control state, the advance notice effect is not determined by the advance notice effect determination unit in the second control state. Is.

According to such a gaming machine, in the first control state in which the control processing amount of the game effect control unit is small, it is possible to determine the advance notice effect which is not the determination target in the second control state in which the control processing amount is large. As a result, it is possible to optimize the control processing applied to the game effect control unit by changing the advance notice effect to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit according to the control processing amount of the game effect control unit. In addition, since the advance notice effect that can be determined only in the first control state is provided, it is possible to enhance the game entertainment in the first control state, and to diversify the game effect as a whole and enhance the game interest. Is possible.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1.
At least a part of the advance notice effect that the advance notice effect determination unit determines in the first control state and the advance notice effect that the advance notice effect determination unit determines in the second control state are different. It is characterized by that.

According to such a gaming machine, the advance notice effect executed in the first control state and the advance notice effect executed in the second control state are different, that is, either the first control state or the second control state. Also provided a notice effect that is not executed by each other. As a result, it is possible to enhance the game interest in the first control state and the second control state, and it is possible to diversify the game production as a whole and enhance the game interest.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1 or Reference Invention 1-2.
The number of advance notice effects that can be executed in the first control state is larger than the number of advance notice effects that can be executed in the second control state.

According to such a gaming machine, in the first control state where the control processing amount of the game effect control unit is small, it is possible to determine the advance notice effect which is not the determination target in the second control state where the control processing amount is large. , It is possible to determine a number of advance notice effects larger than those in the second control state as the determination target of the advance notice effect determination unit. As a result, the number of advance notice effects and the number of advance notice effects to be decided by the advance notice effect determination unit are changed according to the control processing amount (control burden) of the game effect control unit to diversify the advance notice effects and promote the game. It becomes possible to increase. In addition, it is possible to prevent the control load applied to the game effect control unit from becoming excessive. Further, in the second control state in which the amount of processing of the effect control processing executed by the game effect control unit is large, the number of advance notice effects to be determined by the advance performance determination unit is smaller than that in the first control state in which the amount of processing is small. It is possible to prevent an excessive load from being applied to the game production control unit as much as possible.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 1-4 are the gaming machines of Reference Invention 1-1 to Reference Invention 1-3.
Equipped with a start port that allows game balls to enter
The predetermined condition is satisfied based on the entry of the ball into the starting port.
As the control processing controlled by the game effect control unit, the ball entry advance notice effect control process executed when the ball enters the start port, and the change start advance notice effect control process executed at the start of the variation display of the identification information. Have,
The second control state is set to a predetermined time when the advance notice effect control process at the time of entering the ball is being executed.
The first control state is characterized in that it is set to a predetermined time when the advance notice effect control process at the time of entering the ball is not executed.

According to such a gaming machine, the second control state is set to a predetermined time when the advance notice effect control process at the time of entering the ball is executed when the ball enters the starting port, and the first control state is set to the entering ball. Time notice This is a predetermined time when the effect control process is not being executed. Then, when the advance notice effect determination process is performed when the advance notice effect control process at the time of entry is not executed, the advance notice effect that is not determined when the advance notice effect determination process is performed during the execution of the advance notice effect control process at the time of entry is performed. It becomes possible to make a decision target. As a result, it is possible to change the advance notice effect that can be determined according to the control state (control load), enhance the game interest, and optimize the control process (game effect control process) of the game effect control unit.

The notice effect at the time of entry is executed on the condition that the ball enters the starting port, and the change display of the identification information based on the entry is started. Not a condition. Therefore, the advance notice effect at the time of entering the ball may start before the start of the variable display of the identification information based on the entry, and such a advance notice effect may be performed as a pre-reading advance notice effect (pre-reading notice) or a prior advance notice effect (advance notice). Notice). Further, the variation start advance notice effect executed by the variation start advance notice effect control process is a advance notice effect executed on condition that the variation display of the identification information based on the entry is started. Therefore, the notice effect at the start of the change is a notice effect executed during the execution of the change display of the identification information based on the entry.

Further, when the number of the advance notice effects to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit in the second control state is smaller than that in the first control state, whether or not the advance notice effect control process at the time of entering the ball is being executed, that is, the game effect control. Depending on the amount of processing, the number of advance notice effects to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit can be changed, and it is possible to prevent the control load applied to the game effect control unit from becoming excessive. In addition, when the advance notice effect control process at the time of entering the ball is not being executed and the amount of processing of the game effect control process is small, the advance notice effect decision unit increases the number of advance notice effects to be determined, which is excessive for the game effect control unit. It is possible to diversify the advance notice production (game production) without imposing a load and enhance the game interest.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 1-5 are the gaming machines of Reference Invention 1-1 to Reference Invention 1-3.
Equipped with a start port that allows game balls to enter
The predetermined condition is satisfied based on the entry of the ball into the starting port.
As the control processing controlled by the game effect control unit, the ball entry control process executed when the ball enters the start port, the change start notice effect control process executed when the variation display of the identification information is started, and the change start advance notice effect control process. Have,
The second control state is set to a predetermined time when the advance notice effect control process at the start of fluctuation is being executed.
The first control state is characterized in that it is set to a predetermined time when the advance notice effect control process at the start of fluctuation is not executed.

According to such a gaming machine, the second control state is set to a predetermined time when the change start advance notice effect control process is executed at the start of the change display of the identification information, and the first control state is set to the change start time. It is a predetermined time when the advance notice effect control process is not executed. Then, when the advance notice effect determination process is performed when the change start advance notice effect control process is not executed, the advance notice effect that is not determined when the advance notice effect determination process is performed during the execution of the change start advance notice effect control process is performed. It becomes possible to make a decision target. As a result, it is possible to change the advance notice effect that can be determined according to the control state (control burden of the game effect control unit), enhance the game interest, and optimize the effect control process.

Further, when the number of the advance notice effects to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit in the second control state is smaller than that in the first control state, whether or not the advance notice effect control process at the start of fluctuation is being executed, that is, the game effect control. It is possible to change the number of advance notice effects to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit depending on the processing amount of the effect control process of the unit, and prevent the control load applied to the game effect control unit from becoming excessive. Further, when the advance notice effect control process at the start of fluctuation is not being executed and the processing amount of the effect control process is small, the advance notice effect determined by the advance notice effect determination unit increases the amount of the advance notice effect, which causes an excessive load on the game effect control unit. It is possible to diversify the notice production and enhance the game entertainment without spending time.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 1-6 are the gaming machines of Reference Invention 1-1 to Reference Invention 1-3.
The first control state is a predetermined time when the special game is being executed.
The second control state is characterized in that it is set to a predetermined time when the special game is not being executed.

According to such a gaming machine, the first control state in which the processing amount of the effect control processing of the game effect control unit is small is set to a predetermined time during the execution of the special game, and the processing amount of the effect control process of the game effect control unit is large. The second control state, which is often used, is a predetermined time when the special game is not executed (for example, a predetermined time during the variable display of the identification information, a predetermined time during the control process related to the variable display of the identification information, etc.). As a result, during the execution of the special game, it is possible to execute a notice effect different from that when the special game is not executed, and it is possible to enhance the game interest during the special game. For example, the advance notice effect that can be executed during the special game is different from the advance notice effect that can be executed during the variable display of the identification information, and the advance notice effect can be diversified.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 1-7 are the gaming machines of Reference Invention 1-1 to Reference Invention 1-3.
A first time state in which a predetermined time is set as the variation display time of the identification information and a second time state in which a variation display time shorter than the first time state can be set as the variation display time of the identification information are set. Equipped with a possible variable display time setting unit
The first control state is set to a predetermined time in the first time state.
The second control state is characterized in that it is set to a predetermined time in the second time state.

According to such a gaming machine, the second control state is a predetermined time in the second time state that can take a short fluctuation display time, and the first control state is a predetermined time in the first time state that can take a long fluctuation display time. It is the time. Then, when the advance notice effect determination process is performed in the first time state in which the long variable display time is likely to be selected, when the advance notice effect determination process is performed in the second time state in which the short variable display time is easy to be selected. It is possible to make a decision target for a notice effect that is not decided. As a result, it is possible to change the advance notice effect that can be determined according to the control state (control burden of the game effect control unit), enhance the game interest, and optimize the effect control process.

Further, the second control state may be the first time state, and the first control state may be the second time state. As a result, it is possible to optimize the control processing applied to the game effect control unit by changing the advance notice effect (game effect) to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit according to the control processing amount of the game effect control unit.

Further, a probability setting unit that can be set to a predetermined probability (first probability) or a higher probability (second probability) higher than the predetermined probability as the probability that the result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific result is provided, and the second control is provided. The state may have a high probability, and the first control state may have a predetermined probability. Further, the first control state may have a high probability, and the second control state may have a predetermined probability. As a result, it is possible to optimize the control processing applied to the game effect control unit by changing the advance notice effect (game effect) to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit according to the control processing amount of the game effect control unit.

In addition, a ball entry port (variable start port) that can be changed to the first aspect and the second aspect in which the possibility of entering the game ball is higher than that of the first aspect, and the first frequency state (low). A frequency state (low base state) and a second frequency state (high frequency state, high base state) in which the ball enters the ball entry port (variable start port) more frequently than the first frequency state can be set. A ball frequency setting unit may be provided, the second control state may be the second frequency state, and the first control state may be the first frequency state. Further, the first control state may be the first frequency state, and the first control state may be the second frequency state. This also makes it possible to optimize the control processing applied to the game effect control unit by changing the advance notice effect (game effect) to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit depending on the control processing amount of the game effect control unit. ..

Moreover, you may combine some or all of these. Specifically, the second control state may be the second time state and the high probability and the second frequency state, and the first control state may be the first time state and the predetermined probability and the first frequency state. Further, the first control state may be the second time state and the high probability and the second frequency state, and the second control state may be the first time state and the predetermined probability and the first frequency state. Further, the second control state may be set to the second time state and the second frequency state, and the first control state may be set to the first time state and the first frequency state. Further, the first control state may be set to the second time state and the second frequency state, and the second control state may be set to the first time state and the first frequency state. Further, the second control state may be set to the high probability and first frequency state, and the first control state may be set to the predetermined probability and first frequency state. Further, the first control state may be set to the high probability and second frequency state, and the second control state may be set to the predetermined probability and first frequency state. Also with these, it is possible to optimize the control processing applied to the game effect control unit by changing the advance notice effect (game effect) to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit depending on the control processing amount of the game effect control unit. ..

(Reference Invention 2)
Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 is
An identification information display unit that fluctuates and displays identification information based on the establishment of predetermined conditions,
A game production control unit that performs a predetermined production control process,
A gaming machine including a special game execution unit that executes a special game that is advantageous to the player when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode.
The game effect control unit has a advance notice effect determination unit that determines the advance notice effect to be executed, and a advance notice effect execution unit that executes the advance notice effect determined by the advance notice effect determination unit.
The advance notice effect execution unit can execute the advance notice effect along with the variable display of the identification information.
At least, there are a first control state in which the processing amount of the effect control process is a predetermined amount, and a second control state in which the processing amount of the effect control process is larger than the predetermined amount.
The number of advance notice effects to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit in the second control state is smaller than the number of advance notice effects to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit in the first control state. It is characterized by.

According to such a gaming machine, in the second control state in which the processing amount of the effect control processing executed by the game effect control unit is large, the processing amount of the effect control processing is smaller than in the second control state. , It is possible to reduce the number of advance notice effects to be decided by the advance notice effect determination unit of the game effect control unit.

As a result, it is possible to change the number of advance notice effects to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit depending on the processing amount of the effect control process, and to prevent the control load applied to the game effect control unit from becoming excessive. In addition, when the processing amount of the effect control process is small, the advance notice effect that the advance notice effect determination unit determines is increased to diversify the advance notice effect without imposing an excessive load on the game effect control unit. It is possible to enhance the interest.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1.
The number of advance notice effects to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit in the first control state is set to the first predetermined number.
The number of advance notice effects to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit in the second control state is a second predetermined number smaller than the first predetermined number.

According to such a gaming machine, the number of advance notice effects to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit in the first control state is set to the first predetermined number, and the advance notice to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit in the second control state. It is possible to set the number of effects to a second predetermined number, which is smaller than the first predetermined number. As a result, the number of advance notice effects to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit is reduced in the second control state where the processing amount of the effect control process is large, and the advance notice effect determination unit is in the first control state where the processing amount of the effect control process is small. It is possible to increase the number of advance notice effects to be decided, and it is possible to diversify the game effects without imposing an excessive load on the game effect control unit and enhance the game interest.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 or Reference Invention 2-2.
The number of advance notice effects that can be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit is the same in the first control state and the second control state.

According to such a gaming machine, the number of game effects that can be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit, that is, the number of playable game effects can be the same in both the first control state and the second control state. It will be possible. As a result, when the processing amount of the effect control process is large (second control state), even if the number of game effects to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit is reduced, the number of determinable advance notice effects is not reduced. , It is possible to prevent the deterioration of the game entertainment as much as possible.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 2-4 are the gaming machines of Reference Invention 2-1 to Reference Invention 2-3.
The maximum number of advance notice effects that can be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit is the same in the first control state and the second control state.

According to such a gaming machine, the maximum number of advance notice effects that can be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit, that is, the maximum number of playable game effects that can be determined is the same in both the first control state and the second control state. It becomes possible. As a result, when the amount of effect control processing is large (second control state), even if the number of advance notice effects to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit is reduced, the maximum number of game effects that can be determined is not reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the game entertainment as much as possible.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 2-5 are the gaming machines of Reference Invention 2-1 to Reference Invention 2-4.
The game effect control unit is characterized in that the advance notice effect determination unit performs the advance notice effect determination process based on the start of the variable display of the identification information.

According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to execute the advance notice effect determination process by the advance notice effect determination unit at least based on the start of the variable display of the identification information. As a result, it is possible to change the advance notice effect to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit depending on the amount of processing of the effect control process when starting the variable display of the identification information. Here, "execution based on the start of the variable display of the identification information" is executed based on the start of the variable display of the identification information, and even if it is performed before the start of the variable display of the identification information. It may be performed after the start, or at the same time as the start.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 2-6 are the gaming machines of Reference Invention 2-1 to Reference Invention 2-5.
Equipped with a start port that allows game balls to enter
As the effect control process, there is a ball entry control process that is executed based on the ball entry into the start port.
The second control state is a state in which the ball entry control process is being executed, and the first control state is a state in which the ball entry control process is not being executed.

According to such a gaming machine, a state in which the ball entry control process is executed based on the ball entering the starting port is set as a second control state, and a state in which the ball entry control process is not executed is defined as a state in which the ball entry control process is not executed. The first control state is set. When the advance notice effect determination process is performed during the execution of the ball entry control process, the number of advance notice effects to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit is reduced, and the ball entry control process is not executed. Occasionally, when the advance notice effect determination process is performed, it is possible to increase the number of advance notice effects to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit.

As a result, the number of advance notice effects to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit is changed depending on whether or not the effect control process at the time of entering the ball is being executed, that is, the processing amount of the effect control process, and the control load applied to the game effect control unit. Can be prevented from becoming excessive. In addition, when the effect control process is not being executed at the time of entering the ball and the amount of the effect control process is small, the advance notice effect decision unit increases the advance notice effect to be determined, thereby putting an excessive load on the game effect control unit. It is possible to diversify the advance notice production without making a call and enhance the entertainment of the game.

(Reference Invention 3)
Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 is
An identification information display unit that fluctuates and displays identification information based on the establishment of predetermined conditions,
A game production control unit that performs a predetermined production control process,
A gaming machine including a special game execution unit that executes a special game that is advantageous to the player when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode.
The game effect control unit has a advance notice effect determination unit that determines the advance notice effect to be executed, and a advance notice effect execution unit that executes the advance notice effect determined by the advance notice effect determination unit.
The advance notice effect is composed of a plurality of advance notice effect types having different production modes, and each of the advance notice effect types is composed of one or a plurality of advance notice effects.
The advance notice effect execution unit can execute the advance notice effect along with the variable display of the identification information.
At least, there are a first control state in which the processing amount of the effect control process is a predetermined amount, and a second control state in which the processing amount of the effect control process is larger than the predetermined amount.
The number of the advance notice effect species to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit in the second control state is the number of the advance notice effect species to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit in the first control state. It is characterized by being less than.

According to such a gaming machine, in the second control state in which the processing amount of the effect control processing executed by the game effect control unit is large, compared to the first control state in which the processing amount of the effect control processing is smaller than in the second control state. , It is possible to reduce the number of advance notice production types to be decided by the advance notice effect determination unit of the game effect control unit.

As a result, it is possible to change the number of advance notice effect types to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit depending on the processing amount of the effect control process, and prevent the control load applied to the game effect control unit from becoming excessive. .. In addition, when the processing amount of the effect control process is small, the advance notice effect determination unit increases the number of advance notice effect types to be determined, thereby diversifying the advance notice effect without imposing an excessive load on the game effect control unit. It is possible to enhance the entertainment of the game.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1.
The number of the advance notice effect species to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit in the first control state is set to the first predetermined number.
The number of the advance notice effect species to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit in the second control state is a second predetermined number smaller than the first predetermined number. ..

According to such a gaming machine, the number of advance notice effect types to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit in the first control state is set to the first predetermined number, and the advance notice effect determination unit is determined in the second control state. It is possible to set the number of advance notice production species to a second predetermined number, which is smaller than the first predetermined number. As a result, the number of advance notice effect types to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit is reduced in the second control state where the processing amount of the effect control process is large, and the advance notice effect is determined in the first control state where the processing amount of the effect control process is small. It is possible to increase the number of advance notice production types to be decided by the department, and it is possible to diversify the advance notice production without imposing an excessive load on the game production control unit and enhance the game interest. Here, the "first predetermined number" is 2 or more, and the "second predetermined number" is 1 or more.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 or Reference Invention 3-2.
When the game effect is determined by the advance notice effect determination unit in the second control state, a predetermined specific advance notice effect type is determined.
The advance notice effect execution unit is characterized in that it executes a advance notice effect belonging to the specific advance notice effect type.

According to such a gaming machine, in the second control state in which the amount of processing of the effect control process is large, the advance notice effect type that can be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit can be set as a specific advance notice effect type. As a result, in the first control state where the processing amount of the effect control process is small, it is possible to execute a plurality of advance notice effects having different notice effect types, and in the second control state, the advance notice effects belonging to a specific advance notice effect type are executed. Make it possible. Further, when the processing amount of the effect control process is large, it is possible to fix the advance notice effect type to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit and prevent the control load applied to the game effect control unit from becoming excessive. Become.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 3-4 are the gaming machines of Reference Invention 3-1 to Reference Invention 3-3.
The number of advance notice effects belonging to the advance notice effect type to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit in the second control state is the advance notice to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit in the first control state. It is characterized in that it is less than the number of advance notice productions belonging to the production type.

According to such a gaming machine, in the second control state in which the processing amount of the effect control process is large, the advance notice effect determination unit reduces the number of determinable advance notice effect types and belongs to the determinable advance notice effect species. It is also possible to reduce the number of advance notices. Further, in the first control state in which the processing amount of the effect control process is small, it is possible to determine the advance notice effect to be executed from the plurality of advance notice effect types and the plurality of advance notice effects belonging to the advance notice effect type, while the second control state. In some cases, even if the number of advance notice effects is less than that of the first control state, the number of advance notice effects belonging to the advance notice effect type is also smaller than that of the first control state, and the advance notice effect to be executed is determined.

As a result, when the amount of processing of the effect control process is large, the game effect control unit is affected by reducing both the advance notice effect type to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit and the advance notice effect belonging to the advance notice effect type. It is possible to prevent the control load from becoming excessive. Here, it is sufficient that the advance notice effect type to be determined in the second control state has at least one advance notice effect type in which the number of the advance notice effects to which the number belongs is reduced.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 3-5 are the gaming machines of Reference Inventions 3-1 to 3-4.
When the advance notice effect determination unit determines to execute the predetermined advance notice effect type in the first control state, the predetermined advance notice effect is determined from a plurality of advance notice effects belonging to the advance notice effect type.
When the advance notice effect determination unit determines to execute the predetermined advance notice effect type in the second control state, it is characterized in that a predetermined specific advance notice effect is determined.

According to such a gaming machine, in the second control state in which the processing amount of the effect control process is large, the number of the advance notice effect types that can be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit is reduced, and the notice effect type belongs to the determinable notice effect type. It is possible to fix the advance notice effect. As a result, when the amount of processing of the effect control process is large, if the advance notice effect determination unit determines the advance notice effect type, the advance notice effect to be executed is determined accordingly, and the control load applied to the game effect control unit is increased. It is possible to prevent it from becoming excessive.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 3-6 are the gaming machines of Reference Inventions 3-1 to 3-5.
The game effect control unit is characterized in that the advance notice effect determination unit performs the advance notice effect determination process based on the start of the variable display of the identification information.

According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to execute the advance notice effect determination process by the advance notice effect determination unit at least based on the start of the variable display of the identification information. As a result, it is possible to change the advance notice effect to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit depending on the amount of processing of the effect control process when starting the variable display of the identification information. Here, "execution based on the start of the variable display of the identification information" is executed based on the start of the variable display of the identification information, and even if it is performed before the start of the variable display of the identification information. It may be performed after the start, or at the same time as the start.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 3-7 are the gaming machines of Reference Inventions 3-1 to 3-6.
Equipped with a start port that allows game balls to enter
As the effect control process, there is a ball entry control process that is executed based on the ball entry into the start port.
The second control state is a state in which the ball entry control process is being executed, and the first control state is a state in which the ball entry control process is not being executed.

According to such a gaming machine, a state in which the ball entry control process is executed based on the ball entering the starting port is set as a second control state, and a state in which the ball entry control process is not executed is defined as a state in which the ball entry control process is not executed. The first control state is set. When the advance notice effect determination process is performed during the execution of the ball entry control process, the number of advance notice effects to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit is reduced, and the ball entry control process is not executed. Occasionally, when the advance notice effect determination process is performed, it is possible to increase the number of advance notice effects to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit.

As a result, the number of advance notice effects to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit is changed depending on whether or not the effect control process at the time of entering the ball is being executed, that is, the processing amount of the effect control process, and the control load applied to the game effect control unit. Can be prevented from becoming excessive. In addition, when the effect control process is not being executed at the time of entering the ball and the amount of the effect control process is small, the advance notice effect decision unit increases the advance notice effect to be determined, thereby putting an excessive load on the game effect control unit. It is possible to diversify the advance notice production without making a call and enhance the entertainment of the game.

(Reference Invention 4)
Further, the gaming machine of the reference invention 4-1 invention is
A symbol display means that displays a plurality of symbol arrays composed of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and stops and displays the symbols selected from the plurality of symbol arrays in a predetermined stop mode.
It is provided with a privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege when the symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop mode.
A plurality of specific symbols are included as the symbols constituting the symbol array, and the plurality of specific symbols are symbols that show common information and have different display modes (zero symbol).
As the specific stop mode,
A first specific stop mode in which the stop mode is composed of a plurality of the specific symbols and the specific symbols constituting the stop mode are composed of the specific symbols having the same display mode.
A second specification in which the stop mode is composed of a plurality of the specific symbols, and at least one of the specific symbols constituting the stop mode is composed of the specific symbol having a display mode different from the display mode of the other specific symbols. Has a stop mode and
It is characterized in that different benefits (SP reach, jackpot) are given depending on whether the first specific stop mode displays a stop display or the second specific stop mode displays a stop display.

According to such a gaming machine, a stop mode is configured by a plurality of symbols, and a plurality of symbol arrangements are variably displayed according to the number of symbols constituting the stop mode. Further, a plurality of specific symbols are included in one symbol array, and the plurality of specific symbols display common information, although at least a part of the display mode is different from each other. Further, when the stop mode of the symbol becomes the specific stop mode, a predetermined privilege is given, and the first specific stop mode is composed of the specific symbols having the same display mode as the symbols constituting the stop mode. In the second specific stop mode, at least one of the symbols constituting the stop mode is composed of a specific symbol having a display mode different from the others. Then, different benefits are granted depending on whether the stop mode of the symbol is the first specific stop mode or the second specific stop mode. As a result, if a plurality of specific symbols existing in each symbol array are in the specific stop mode, the privilege is given even if the display mode is different, so that the player feels that the possibility of granting the privilege has increased, and the game Increase the interest.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1.
Equipped with a game production execution means capable of executing a predetermined game production,
As the game production
A first stop effect indicating whether or not the stop mode is a stop mode that can constitute the first specific stop mode, and
A second stop effect indicating whether or not the stop mode is a stop mode that can constitute the second specific stop mode, and
A continuous stop effect in which the first stop effect and the second stop effect are sequentially executed in a predetermined order while maintaining the stop display of at least one of the specific symbols constituting the stop mode.
It is characterized by having.

According to such a gaming machine, as the game effect, is there a first stop effect indicating whether or not the first specific stop mode can be configured and a stop mode that can configure the second specific stop mode? It has a first stop effect indicating whether or not, and a continuous stop effect in which the first stop effect and the second stop effect are executed in a predetermined order while maintaining at least one specific symbol. As a result, when the continuous stop effect is executed, even when the stop mode that can configure the first specific stop mode (or the second specific stop mode) that can give the privilege is not obtained, the privilege is subsequently given. Since the effect of whether or not the stop mode can form the second specific stop mode (or the first specific stop mode) is executed, it is possible to maintain the expectation for the privilege grant for a long period of time. ..

The "stop mode that can form the first specific stop mode" includes the first specific stop mode itself ("000") and the components before the completion of the first specific stop mode ("0 ↓ 0"). including. For example, in the reach mode of "0 ↓ 0" (the display mode is the same for the left and right "0" symbols and the middle symbol is changing) as the "first stop effect indicating whether or not the first specific stop mode itself is obtained". , An effect (fanning effect) indicating whether or not the middle symbol is stopped and displayed with the “0” symbol having the same display mode as the left and right “0” symbols can be exemplified. In addition, as the "first stop effect indicating whether or not the first specific stop mode is a component of the stage before completion", the mode of "0 ↓↓" (the left is the "0" symbol and the middle right symbol is changing. ), It is possible to exemplify an effect (fanning effect) indicating whether or not the right symbol is stopped and displayed with the “0” symbol having the same display mode as the left symbol.

Similarly, the "stop mode that can constitute the second specific stop mode" includes the second specific stop mode itself ("000" (at least one of the "0" symbols is displayed differently from the others)). And the components of the stage before the second specific stop mode is completed (“0 ↓ 0” (the display mode of the left and right “0” symbols may be the same or different)). For example, in the reach mode of "0 ↓ 0" (the display mode is the same for the left and right "0" symbols and the middle symbol is changing) as the "second stop effect indicating whether or not the second specific stop mode itself is obtained". , An effect (fanning effect) indicating whether or not the middle symbol is stopped and displayed with the “0” symbol having a display mode different from the left and right “0” symbols can be exemplified. In addition, as a "second stop effect indicating whether or not the second specific stop mode is a component of the stage before completion", the mode of "0 ↓↓" (the left is the "0" symbol and the middle right symbol is changing. ), It is possible to exemplify an effect (fanning effect) indicating whether or not the right symbol is stopped and displayed with a “0” symbol having a display mode different from that of the left symbol.

Further, "a continuous stop effect in which the first stop effect and the second stop effect are sequentially executed in a predetermined order while maintaining the stop display of at least one of the specific symbols constituting the stop mode". The above-mentioned "first stop effect indicating whether or not the first specific stop mode itself is achieved" and "second stop effect indicating whether or not the second specific stop mode itself is achieved" are executed in order in a predetermined order. The effect to be performed, "the first stop effect indicating whether or not the first specific stop mode is a component of the pre-completion stage", and "whether or not the second specific stop mode is a component of the pre-completion stage". Includes an effect of executing the "second stop effect" in order in a predetermined order.

For example, "a first stop effect indicating whether or not the first specific stop mode itself is obtained" and "a second specific stop mode itself while maintaining the stop display of at least one of the specific symbols constituting the stop mode". The reach mode of "0 ↓ 0" (the left and right "0" symbols have the same display mode and the middle symbol is changing as an effect of executing the "second stop effect" indicating whether or not ), As a result of performing an effect (fanning effect) indicating whether or not the middle symbol is stopped and displayed at the "0" symbol in the same display mode as the left and right "0" symbols, the middle symbol is the same as the left and right "0" symbols. The "0" symbol in the display mode does not stop and display, and subsequently, while maintaining the reach mode of "0 ↓ 0" (the display mode is the same for the left and right "0" symbols), the middle symbol is left and right "0". It is possible to exemplify an aspect of performing an effect (fanning effect) indicating whether or not to stop and display with a “0” symbol having a display mode different from that of the symbol. Although the continuous stop effect to be executed in the order of the first stop effect and the second stop effect is illustrated, the second stop effect and the first stop effect may be executed in this order, or the first stop effect may be executed in the continuous stop effect. The effect and / or the second stop effect may be executed a plurality of times. In addition, as a result of the reach mode of "0 ↓ 0" in the stop effect in the subsequent stage, there are cases where the first specific stop mode (or the second specific stop mode) is achieved and cases where the reach mode is not (for example, "020"). May be good.

In addition, "a first stop effect indicating whether or not the first specific stop mode is a component of a stage before completion" while maintaining the stop display of at least one of the specific symbols constituting the stop mode. The mode of "0 ↓↓" (the left is "0") as the "effect of executing the second stop effect indicating whether or not the second specific stop mode is a component of the stage before completion" in a predetermined order. In (the middle right symbol is changing in the symbol), as a result of performing an effect (fanning effect) indicating whether the right symbol is stopped and displayed with the "0" symbol in the same display mode as the left symbol, the left symbol is displayed as the right symbol. The "0" symbol in the same display mode is not stopped and displayed, and then the right symbol is the left symbol while maintaining the "0 ↓↓" mode (the left is the "0" symbol and the middle right symbol is changing). It is possible to exemplify an aspect of performing an effect (fanning effect) indicating whether or not to stop and display with a “0” symbol having a display mode different from that of the above. Although the continuous stop effect to be executed in the order of the first stop effect and the second stop effect is illustrated, the second stop effect and the first stop effect may be executed in this order, or the first stop effect may be executed in the continuous stop effect. The effect and / or the second stop effect may be executed a plurality of times. Further, as a result of the display mode of "0 ↓↓" in the stop effect of the latter stage, it becomes a component of the stage before the first specific stop mode is completed (or a component of the stage before the second specific stop mode is completed). There may be cases where it does not (for example, "0 ↓ 2").

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-2.
The continuous stop effect is characterized in that, of the first stop effect and the second stop effect, the stop effect executed first does not have a specific stop mode, and the next stop effect is executed. be.

According to such a gaming machine, the continuous stop effect is the stop effect (first stop effect or second stop effect) of the first stop effect and the second stop effect that are executed in order, whichever is executed first. ) Does not result in the specific stop mode (first specific stop mode or second specific stop mode), and the next stop effect (second stop effect or first stop effect) is executed. As a result, when the continuous stop effect is executed, there are a plurality of opportunities for the specific stop mode to be obtained, so that the player can maintain the expectation for the privilege grant for a long period of time.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-2 or Reference Invention 4-3.
Equipped with a pass / fail judgment means that executes a pass / fail judgment based on the establishment of a predetermined condition,
The game effect includes a first game effect and a second game effect that suggests a higher possibility than the first game effect as a possibility that the result of the hit / fail determination will be a hit.
It has a second specific symbol that is not included in the symbol array,
It is characterized in that the specific symbol is changed to the second specific symbol at a predetermined timing after the start of the variation display of the symbol, and the second game effect is executed.

According to such a gaming machine, the gaming effects include a first gaming effect and a second gaming effect that suggests a higher hit possibility than the first gaming effect. Then, at a predetermined timing during the variable display, the specific symbol included in the symbol array is changed to the second specific symbol not included in the symbol array, and the second game effect is executed. As a result, it is possible to increase the possibility of hitting when the specific symbol is changed to the second specific symbol, and to enhance the interest of the game. Further, since a plurality of specific symbols that can be changed to the second specific symbol are included in the symbol arrangement, the expectation that the second game effect is executed is raised, and the game interest is enhanced.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-4.
When the specific symbol is changed to the second specific symbol and the second game effect is executed, and the result of the hit / fail determination is different, the second specific symbol is returned to the specific symbol and the said. It is characterized in that the stop display is performed in an out-of-stop mode including a specific symbol.

According to such a gaming machine, when the specific symbol is changed to the second specific symbol and the second game effect is executed, and the hit / fail determination result is incorrect, after the second game effect is executed. , The second specific symbol is returned to the specific symbol, and the stop display is performed in the detached stop mode including the specific symbol. As a result, the player can surely recognize which specific symbol becomes the second specific symbol and the second game effect is executed. Further, this makes it possible to re-recognize that the specific symbol is an opportunity to execute the second game effect, and to raise the expectation for the specific symbol.

(Reference Invention 5)
Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1 is
Identification symbol display means for variable display of identification symbols based on the establishment of predetermined conditions,
A game production execution means for executing a predetermined game production, and
A gaming machine provided with a special game execution means for executing a special game when the result of the variation display of the identification symbol becomes a specific result.
As the game effect, there is a reach effect in which one of the plurality of the identification symbols is displayed in a variable manner, and the other identification symbols are stopped and displayed at the reach symbols corresponding to each other.
As the reach effect, there is a special reach effect in which the reach pattern is changed during the execution of the reach effect to perform the reach effect a plurality of times.
As a result of executing the special reach effect, when a plurality of the identification symbols are stopped and displayed with the identification symbols corresponding to each other, the specific result is obtained and the special game is executed.

According to such a gaming machine, as a game effect, one of a plurality of identification symbols is displayed in a variable manner, and the other identification symbols are stopped and displayed at a reach symbol which is an identification symbol corresponding to each other. Has a reach effect. Further, as the reach effect, there is a special reach effect in which the reach symbols constituting the reach effect are changed a predetermined number of times during the execution of the reach effect, and the reach effect is performed a plurality of times. Then, as a result of executing the special reach effect, when all the plurality of identification symbols are stopped and displayed with the identification symbols corresponding to each other, the special game is executed. As a result, when the special reach effect is executed, the reach effect is executed multiple times while changing the reach pattern, and it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the special game when the special reach effect is executed. It becomes.

In addition, when the variable entry port that can be changed to the enterable state in which the game ball can enter and the inaccessible state in which the game ball cannot enter, and the result of the variable display of the identification symbol become a specific result. It may be provided with a special game execution means for executing a special game in which the variable ball entry port is in a state where the ball can be entered. Further, the reach effect may be displayed as a reach symbol in which two of the three identification symbols match, and the remaining one may be displayed in a variable manner.

The "identifying symbols corresponding to each other" means that a plurality of identification symbols are a combination of predetermined identification symbols, and when a plurality of identification symbols are a combination of the same identification symbols (for example, "333"). , "777", etc.) and the case where a plurality of identification symbols are a combination of different predetermined identification symbols (for example, "135", "268", "337", etc.).

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1.
Having a specific symbol as the identification symbol,
In the special reach effect, when the reach symbol is an identification symbol other than the specific symbol,
When one identification symbol to be variablely displayed is stopped and displayed at the specific symbol, the reach symbol is changed and the variable display is performed again.
When one identification symbol to be variablely displayed is stopped and displayed at an identification symbol corresponding to the reach symbol, a plurality of the identification symbols become identification symbols corresponding to each other, the specific result is obtained, and the special game is executed. It is characterized by.

According to such a gaming machine, it has a specific symbol as an identification symbol. Then, in the special reach effect, when the identification symbol other than the specific symbol becomes the reach symbol and the reach effect is performed, if one identification symbol in the variable display is stopped and displayed at the specific symbol, the reach symbol is changed and the reach symbol is changed again. Variable display. Further, in the special reach effect, when an identification symbol other than the specific symbol becomes a reach symbol and the reach effect is performed, if one identification symbol in the variable display is stopped and displayed at a symbol corresponding to the reach symbol, a special game is played. Run. As a result, in the special reach effect, the player can increase the expectation for the special game even if the specific symbol is stopped or the symbols corresponding to the reach symbol are stopped.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1 or Reference Invention 5-2.
Having a specific symbol as the identification symbol,
The special reach effect starts with an identification symbol other than the specific symbol as the reach symbol.
When the special reach effect is executed and the reach symbol is an identification symbol other than the specific symbol,
When one identification symbol to be variablely displayed is stopped and displayed at the specific symbol, the reach symbol is changed and the variable display is performed again.
When the reach symbol is changed to the specific symbol and one identification symbol to be variablely displayed is stopped and displayed at the specific symbol, the plurality of the identification symbols become identification symbols corresponding to each other in the specific symbol and are specified. As a result, the special game is executed.

According to such a gaming machine, the identification symbol has a specific symbol, and the special reach effect is started with the identification symbol other than the specific symbol as the reach symbol. Then, in the special reach effect, when the identification symbol other than the specific symbol becomes the reach symbol and the reach effect is performed, if one identification symbol in the variable display is stopped and displayed at the specific symbol, the reach symbol is changed and the reach symbol is changed again. Variable display. Further, in the special reach effect, when the reach symbol is changed to a specific symbol and the reach effect is performed, if one identification symbol in the variable display is stopped and displayed at the specific symbol, a specific result is obtained and the special game is executed. .. As a result, depending on the reach symbol when the specific symbol is stopped, the variable display may be performed again or the specific result may be obtained, and it is possible to make the game effect a mode and enhance the game interest.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-3.
It is characterized in that the number of changes of the reach symbol in the special reach effect is equal to or more than a specific number of times, and the reach symbol becomes the specific symbol.

According to such a gaming machine, in the special reach effect, when the number of changes of the reach symbol becomes a specific number or more, the reach symbol changes to the specific symbol. As a result, the player can pay attention to the number of changes in the reach symbol when the special reach effect is executed, and can enhance the interest of the game.

As a result of executing the special reach effect, if at least one of the three identification symbols is displayed as a fixed stop display with an identification symbol that does not match the others, it will be off and the special game will not be executed. Also, in the special reach effect, when the reach symbol is an identification symbol other than the specific symbol, the remaining one identification symbol is stopped and displayed with the same identification symbol as the reach symbol, and when the reach symbol is the specific symbol, the remaining one remains. Different benefits may be given depending on whether one identification symbol is stopped and displayed as a specific symbol. In addition, when the reach symbol is an identification symbol other than the specific symbol, if the remaining one identification symbol is stopped and displayed with the same identification symbol as the reach symbol, the first special privilege is given and the reach symbol is the specific symbol. , When the remaining one identification symbol is stopped and displayed at the specific symbol, the second special privilege may be granted. Further, the second special privilege may be a privilege having a higher profit for the player than the first special privilege.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 5-5 are the gaming machines of Reference Invention 5-1 to Reference Invention 5-4.
In the special reach production
When the number of changes of the reach symbol is less than a specific number and the plurality of the identification symbols are stopped and displayed at the identification symbols corresponding to each other, the first special privilege is given.
When the number of changes of the reach symbol is equal to or greater than the specific number of times and the plurality of the identification symbols are stopped and displayed with the identification symbols corresponding to each other, the second special privilege is given.

According to such a gaming machine, in a special reach effect, when the number of changes of the reach symbol is less than a specific number and all of the plurality of identification symbols are stopped and displayed with the identification symbols corresponding to each other, the first special privilege is given and the reach symbol is given. When the number of changes of is greater than or equal to a specific number and all of the plurality of identification symbols are stopped and displayed with the identification symbols corresponding to each other, the second special privilege is given. As a result, it is possible to pay attention to the number of changes in the reach pattern when the special reach effect is executed, and to enhance the interest of the game. The first special privilege and the second special privilege may be a special game in which the game profits that can be obtained are different, or a privilege in which the game state after the special game is completed may be different. It suffices if the benefits are different.

Further, "In the special reach effect, when the number of changes of the reach symbol is less than a specific number of times and the three identification symbols are stopped and displayed at the matching symbol, the first special privilege is given and the change of the reach symbol is performed. When the number of times is equal to or greater than the specified number of times and the three identification symbols are stopped and displayed at the matching identification symbols, the second special privilege is granted. " When the reach symbol (identification symbol) has a plurality of display modes as the reach symbol (identification symbol), the reach symbol changes in the special reach effect, and the reach symbol (identification symbol) of any display mode is used. In addition, different special benefits may be given depending on whether the three identification symbols are stopped and displayed at the matching identification symbols. For example, in the special reach effect, when the reach symbol is the first display mode (red symbol) and the three identification symbols are stopped and displayed at the matching identification symbol, the first special privilege is given and the reach symbol is the second display mode. When the (blue symbol) is displayed, the 3 identification symbols match when the identification symbol is stopped and displayed, the second special privilege is given, and when the reach symbol is the 3rd display mode (black symbol), the 3 identification symbols match. The third special privilege may be given when the identification symbol is stopped and displayed.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-6 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-5.
The second special benefit is characterized in that it is more likely to be a benefit that is more profitable for the player than the first special benefit.

According to such a gaming machine, it is highly likely that the second special privilege is a privilege that is more profitable for the player than the first special privilege. According to such a gaming machine, the player expects that when the special reach effect is executed, the number of changes in the reach symbol becomes a specific number or more, and the second special privilege is executed, and the game is played. It is possible to enhance the interest.

(Reference Invention 6)
Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1 is
An identification symbol display means for varyingly displaying the identification symbol based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and stopping and displaying the plurality of the identification symbols to form a stop display mode.
A game production execution means for executing a predetermined game production, and
A gaming machine provided with a special game execution means for executing a special game when the result of the variable display of the identification symbol becomes a specific result.
It has a symbol array composed of the plurality of identification symbols, and has a symbol array.
As the game effect, there is a reach effect in which one of the plurality of the identification symbols is displayed in a variable manner, and the other identification symbols are stopped and displayed at the reach symbols corresponding to each other.
The symbol array is variablely displayed as the one identification symbol to be variablely displayed in the reach effect.
When the reach effect is executed,
The specific display area is divided into a first display area and a second display area.
Among the identification symbols constituting the symbol array, the identification symbols corresponding to the reach symbols are displayed in the first display area, and among the identification symbols constituting the symbol array, the identification symbols not corresponding to the reach symbols are displayed in the first display area. 2 Display in the display area,
A predetermined game effect is performed in the first display area and the second display area, and the identification symbol displayed in the display area satisfying the predetermined condition is stopped and displayed as the one identification symbol, and the stop is performed. It is characterized in that it constitutes a display mode.

According to such a gaming machine, one of a plurality of identification symbols is displayed in a variable manner, and the other identification symbols are stopped and displayed at a reach symbol which is an identification symbol corresponding to each other. .. Further, when the reach effect is executed, the specific display area on the display screen is divided into the first display area and the second display area, and among the identification symbols constituting the symbol array to be variablely displayed, the reach symbol and each other The corresponding identification symbol is displayed in the first display area, and the identification symbol that does not correspond to the reach symbol is displayed in the second display area. Then, a predetermined game effect is executed in the first display area (identification symbol displayed in) and the second display area (identification symbol displayed in), and the identification selected from the display area satisfying the predetermined conditions. The stop display mode is configured as one identification symbol for which the symbol is finally stopped and displayed. As a result, in the reach effect, when a predetermined game effect is executed in the first display area and the second display area, it is expected that the first display area satisfies the predetermined condition, and the game interest is enhanced. In addition, a new game production will enhance the game's interest.

In addition, when the variable entry port that can be changed to the enterable state in which the game ball can enter and the inaccessible state in which the game ball cannot enter, and the result of the variable display of the identification symbol become a specific result. It may be provided with a special game execution means for executing a special game in which the variable ball entry port is in a state where the ball can be entered. Further, the reach effect may be displayed as a reach symbol in which two of the three identification symbols match, and the remaining one may be displayed in a variable manner. In addition, the reach effect is displayed as the reach symbols of the identification symbols corresponding to (matching) the two identification symbols, and the symbol arrangement composed of a plurality of identification symbols is changed as the remaining one identification symbol. It may be an effect to be displayed. Further, the two identification symbols may be displayed as reach symbols with matching identification symbols, and may have a reach effect of varyingly displaying a predetermined symbol arrangement as the remaining one identification symbol.

The "identifying symbols corresponding to each other" means that a plurality of identification symbols are a combination of predetermined identification symbols, and when a plurality of identification symbols are a combination of the same identification symbols (for example, "333"). , "777", etc.) and the case where a plurality of identification symbols are a combination of different predetermined identification symbols (for example, "135", "268", "337", etc.).

If the first display area satisfies the predetermined conditions, a game privilege (special game, development effect, etc.) is given, and if the second display area satisfies the predetermined conditions, it is excluded. In addition, it is equipped with a variable entry port that can be changed between a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which the game ball cannot enter, and the variable entry port is in a state in which the ball can enter. You may perform a special game. Further, the identification symbol constituting the symbol arrangement may include an identification symbol that matches the reach symbol that constitutes the reach mode and an identification symbol that does not match the reach symbol.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1.
Of the first display area and the second display area, the larger display area satisfies the predetermined condition.

According to such a gaming machine, a predetermined game effect is performed in the first display area and the second display area, and a large display area is formed, that is, a display area occupying a large area in the specific display area is a predetermined condition. Will be satisfied. As a result, in the reach effect, when a predetermined game effect is executed in the first display area and the second display area, it is expected that the first display area becomes a large display area, and the game interest is enhanced. In addition, a new game production will enhance the game's interest.

The specific display area is divided into a first display area and a second display area, and as a result of the display area acquisition effect, most of the specific display area is displayed in the acquired display area (first display area or second display area). The identification symbol is a stop symbol (the remaining one identification symbol).

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-2.
It is characterized in that a specific character is displayed in at least one of the first display area and the second display area, and an effect of assisting the specific character to become a large display area is performed.

According to such a gaming machine, a specific character that assists in becoming a large display area is displayed in at least one display area of the first display area and the second display area in which a predetermined game effect is performed. As a result, the player expects that the specific character is displayed in the first display area and that the first display area satisfies a predetermined condition by the auxiliary effect of the specific character, and enhances the interest of the game. In addition, a new game production will enhance the game's interest.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 6-4 are the gaming machines of Reference Invention 6-1 to Reference Invention 6-3.
The identification symbols constituting the symbol array include a plurality of specific symbols, and the plurality of specific symbols are considered to show common information and have different display modes.
In the reach effect, when the reach symbol is displayed with the predetermined specific symbol and the symbol arrangement is variablely displayed.
A plurality of the specific symbols having different display modes are displayed in the first display area, and identification symbols other than the specific symbol are displayed in the second display area.
When the first display area satisfies a predetermined condition, a game privilege is given.

According to such a gaming machine, the identification symbols constituting the symbol arrangement include a plurality of specific symbols. Then, the plurality of specific symbols are designated as symbols that display common information (for example, the same numerical information) and have different display modes (for example, different colors). Further, in the reach effect, when the reach symbol is displayed as a predetermined specific symbol and the symbol arrangement is variablely displayed as the remaining one identification symbol, a plurality of specific symbols having different display modes are displayed in the first display area. It is displayed, and the identification symbol excluding the specific symbol is displayed in the second display area. Then, when the first display area satisfies the predetermined condition, the game privilege is given even if any specific symbol in the first display area is stopped and displayed. As a result, the player feels that there is a high possibility that the privilege will be given, and enhances the interest of the game. In addition, a new game production will enhance the game's interest.

In addition, it may have a privilege giving means for giving a predetermined privilege (special game, development effect). Further, in the reach effect, when the reach symbol in which the two identification symbols match is a specific symbol, the number of identification symbols displayed in the first display area is larger than in the case where the reach symbol is an identification symbol other than the specific symbol. ..

(Reference Invention 7)
Further, the gaming machine of the reference invention 7-1 invention is
Identification symbol display means for variable display of identification symbols based on the establishment of predetermined conditions,
A game effect execution means for executing a predetermined game effect on the display screen, and
A gaming machine provided with a special game execution means for executing a special game when the result of the variable display of the identification symbol becomes a specific result.
As the game production, it has a specific production,
It has a moving display unit that moves in a predetermined direction on the display screen.
In the specific effect, it is possible to execute a display area change effect that changes the display mode of the display area of the portion passed by the move display unit on the display screen in response to the movement of the move display unit. Is to be.

According to such a gaming machine, it has a moving display unit that moves on the display screen, and when the moving display unit moves in a specific effect, the display area of the portion that the moving display unit on the display screen has passed through. It is assumed that the display area change effect for changing the display mode is executed. As a result, when the movement display unit moves in the specific effect, the display area on the display screen changes the display mode in response to the movement of the movement display unit, and it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-1.
The specific effect has a first execution mode in which the display area change effect is executed and a second execution mode in which the display area change effect is not executed.
The first execution mode is characterized in that the special game is more likely to be executed than the second execution mode.

According to such a gaming machine, as an execution mode of the specific effect, there is a first execution mode in which the display area change effect is executed and a second execution mode in which the display area change effect is not executed. The first execution mode is a game production in which the special game is more likely to be executed than the second execution mode. As a result, the player can enhance the interest of the game in anticipation of the occurrence of the display area change effect when the specific effect is executed.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-1 or Reference Invention 7-2.
The display mode of the moving display unit can be changed to a plurality of different colors.
The display mode of the display area of the portion passed by the moving display unit can be changed to a different color corresponding to the color of the moving display unit.
When the display area change effect is executed, the feasibility of the special game differs depending on the change color of the movement display unit and the change color of the display area of the portion where the movement display unit has passed. It is a thing.

According to such a gaming machine, the moving display unit has a plurality of colors (display mode) as a changing display mode, and a plurality of colors (display mode) are displayed as a display mode of a display area that changes as the moving display unit passes through. The color of the display area, which has the above and changes with the passage of the moving display unit, is determined based on the color of the moving display unit. Further, when the display area change effect is executed, the feasibility of the special game differs depending on the change color of the moving display unit and the change color of the display area. As a result, the player expects that when the display area change effect is executed in the specific effect, the moving display unit changes to a color indicating that the special game is more likely to be executed, and enhances the game interest. Is possible.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 7-4 are the gaming machines of Reference Invention 7-1 to Reference Invention 7-3.
A movable member capable of operating on the display screen in a predetermined operation mode is provided.
The movement display unit is characterized in that it is composed of the movable member.

According to such a gaming machine, a movable member capable of operating on a display screen in a predetermined operation mode is used as a moving display unit. As a result, since the moving display unit is a movable member, it is possible to easily recognize the occurrence of a specific effect. Further, as a result, the player can raise the expectation for the special game and enhance the interest of the game when the specific effect is executed and the movable member operates.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 7-5 are the gaming machines of Reference Inventions 7-1 to 7-4.
The display area change effect is characterized in that the display mode of the display area of the portion passed by the moving display unit on the display screen is sequentially changed in response to the movement of the moving display unit.

According to such a gaming machine, the color change of the display mode of the display area on the display screen in the display area change effect is sequentially executed by the moving display unit in response to the movement on the display screen. As a result, the changing mode of the moving display unit is diversified, and it is possible to diversify the execution mode of the display area change effect. This makes it possible to enhance the interest in the game.

(Reference Invention 8)
Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-1 is
An identification symbol display means that variablely displays the identification symbol based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and stops and displays the identification symbol.
A game production execution means that can execute a game production, and
A gaming machine provided with a special game execution means for executing a special game when the combination of the identification symbols displayed as stopped is in a specific stop mode.
The identification symbol includes a specific symbol and a non-specific symbol.
The game effect includes a first game effect and a second game effect having a display mode different from that of the first game effect.
As the stop position on the display screen of the identification symbol, it has a first stop position and a second stop position different from the first stop position.
The game production execution means
When the specific symbol is stopped and displayed at the first stop position, the first game effect can be executed, and when the specific symbol is stopped and displayed at the second stop position, the stop position development effect for executing the second game effect can be executed. It is characterized by that.

According to such a gaming machine, it has a first game effect and a second game effect as game effects, and has a specific symbol and a non-specific symbol as identification symbols. Further, it has a first stop position and a second stop position as a stop position (stop display position) of the identification symbol. Then, at a predetermined time during the variable display of the identification symbol, when the specific symbol is stopped and displayed at the first stop position, the first game effect is executed, and when the specific symbol is stopped and displayed at the second stop position, the second game effect is executed. The stop position development effect shall be executed. As a result, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game by paying attention to whether the specific symbol is stopped and displayed at the first stop position or the second stop position during the variable display of the identification symbol. In addition, since the game effect to be executed differs depending on the stop position of the specific symbol, it is possible to diversify the game effect.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-1.
When the non-specific symbol is stopped and displayed at the first stop position, the first game effect is not executed, and when the non-specific symbol is stopped and displayed at the second stop position, the second game effect is performed. It is characterized by not executing.

According to such a gaming machine, when the non-specific symbol is stopped and displayed at the first stop position, the first game effect is not executed, and when the non-specific symbol is stopped and displayed at the second stop position, the second game effect is not executed. As a result, the player pays attention to whether the stop display at the first stop position or the second stop position is a specific symbol or a non-specific symbol, and enhances the interest of the game. In addition, it is expected that the specific symbol will be stopped and displayed at the first stop position or the second stop position to execute the stop position development effect, and the game will be enhanced.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-1 or Reference Invention 8-2.
As the game production, it has a pre-stage production,
A case where the identification symbol is stopped and displayed at the first stop position to execute the first game effect, and a case where the identification symbol is stopped and displayed at the second stop position and the second game effect is executed. , The common pre-stage effect is executed, and the stop position development effect is executed following the pre-stage effect.

According to such a gaming machine, as a gaming effect, a pre-stage effect is provided. Then, the identification symbol (specific symbol) is stopped and displayed at the first stop position to execute the first game effect, and the identification symbol (specific symbol) is stopped and displayed at the second stop position to execute the second game effect. In some cases, the common pre-stage effect is executed, and the stop position development effect is executed following the execution of the pre-stage effect. As a result, at the stage of the previous stage effect, the identification symbol is stopped and displayed at the first stop position to execute the first game effect, or the identification symbol (specific symbol) is stopped and displayed at the second stop position to display the second game effect. It is not possible to recognize whether or not to execute the game, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game by paying attention to which stop position the identification symbol (specific symbol) is stopped and displayed.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 8-4 are the gaming machines of Reference Invention 8-1 to Reference Invention 8-3.
The first game effect and the second game effect are game effects that indicate the feasibility of the special game.
The first game effect is characterized in that it exhibits a higher feasibility of the special game than the second game effect.

According to such a gaming machine, both the first game effect and the second game effect are game effects that indicate the feasibility of the special game, and the first game effect is a special game rather than the second game effect. Shows high feasibility as feasibility. As a result, attention is paid to which stop position the identification symbol (specific symbol) is stopped and displayed, and the player expects to stop and display the stop display at the first stop position where the first game effect is executed. Increase the interest.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-5 is
An identification symbol display means that variablely displays the identification symbol based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and stops and displays the identification symbol.
A game production execution means that can execute a game production, and
A gaming machine provided with a special game execution means for executing a special game when the combination of the identification symbols displayed as stopped is in a specific stop mode.
As the identification symbol, a specific symbol is provided.
The game effect includes a first game effect and a second game effect having a display mode different from that of the first game effect.
As the stop position on the display screen of the identification symbol, it has a first stop position and a second stop position different from the first stop position.
The game production execution means
When the specific symbol is stopped and displayed at the first stop position, the first game effect can be executed, and when the specific symbol is stopped and displayed at the second stop position, the stop position development effect for executing the second game effect can be executed. It is characterized by that.

According to such a gaming machine, it has a first game effect and a second game effect as a game effect, and has a specific symbol as an identification symbol. Further, it has a first stop position and a second stop position as a stop position (stop display position) of the identification symbol. Then, at a predetermined time during the variable display of the identification symbol, when the specific symbol is stopped and displayed at the first stop position, the first game effect is executed, and when the specific symbol is stopped and displayed at the second stop position, the second game effect is executed. The stop position development effect shall be executed. As a result, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game by paying attention to whether the specific symbol is stopped and displayed at the first stop position or the second stop position during the variable display of the identification symbol. In addition, since the game effect to be executed differs depending on the stop position of the specific symbol, it is possible to diversify the game effect.

(Reference Invention 9)
Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-1 is
Identification symbol display means that displays the identification symbols in a variable manner based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition and stops and displays a plurality of the identification symbols in a predetermined order.
A game production execution means that can execute a game production, and
A gaming machine provided with a special game execution means for executing a special game when the stop display mode of the plurality of identification symbols becomes the specific stop display mode.
As the game effect, a plurality of game effects having different display modes are provided.
The identification symbol has a first stop order and a second stop order different from the first stop order.
The game production execution means
It is characterized in that different game effects are executed depending on whether the identification symbol is stopped and displayed in the first stop order and the identification symbol is stopped and displayed in the second stop order.

According to such a gaming machine, it has a plurality of gaming effects having different display modes as game effects, and has a first stop order and a second stop order as stop orders (stop display orders) of identification symbols. Then, different game effects are executed depending on whether the identification symbol is stopped and displayed in the first stop order or stopped in the second stop order. As a result, it is possible to pay attention to the stop order of the identification symbols during the variable display of the identification symbols, and to enhance the interest of the game. Further, since the game effect to be executed differs depending on the stop order of the predetermined identification symbol, it is possible to diversify the game effect.

Further, as a game effect, the first game effect and the first game effect have a second game effect having a different display mode, and the predetermined identification symbols are in the first stop order at a predetermined time during the variable display of the identification symbol. When the stop display is displayed, the first game effect may be executed, and when the stop display is performed in the second stop order, the second game effect may be executed. Here, "the stop order is different" means, for example, when the three identification symbols on the left, middle, and right are stopped and displayed in a predetermined order, (1) the stop order of stopping and displaying in the order of left → middle → right. Pattern, (2) Stop order pattern to stop and display in the order of left → right → middle, (3) Stop order pattern to stop and display in the order of right → middle → left, (4) Stop in the order of middle → left → right The stop order pattern to be displayed can be mentioned. That is, it has a plurality of stop order patterns, and stops are displayed in any of the stop order patterns (stop order).

Further, when the three identification symbols on the left, middle, and right are stopped and displayed in a predetermined order, the first stop symbol may have a different stop order. For example, (1) a stop order pattern in which the left identification symbol (first identification symbol) is first stopped and displayed, (2) a stop order pattern in which the middle identification symbol (second identification symbol) is first stopped and displayed, and (3) right. An example is a stop order pattern in which the identification symbol (third identification symbol) first stops and displays. In this way, as the stop display order of the identification symbol, at least one of the stop order patterns in which the stop order is different is defined as "the stop order of the identification symbol is different".

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-1.
The identification symbol includes a specific symbol and a non-specific symbol.
Different game effects are executed depending on whether the specific symbol is stopped and displayed in the first stop order and the specific symbol is stopped and displayed in the second stop order.
It is characterized in that different game effects are not executed depending on whether the non-specific symbol is stopped and displayed in the first stop order and the non-specific symbol is stopped and displayed in the second stop order.

According to such a gaming machine, it has a specific symbol and a non-specific symbol as identification symbols. Then, different game effects are executed depending on whether the specific symbol is stopped and displayed in the first stop order and the stop is displayed in the second stop order. Further, when the non-specific symbol is stopped and displayed at the first stop position and when the non-specific symbol is stopped and displayed at the second stop position, different game effects are not executed. As a result, the player pays attention to whether the stop display at the first stop position or the second stop position is a specific symbol or a non-specific symbol, and enhances the interest of the game. In addition, it is expected that the specific symbol will be stopped and displayed at the first stop position or the second stop position to execute the stop position development effect, and the game will be enhanced.

Further, a game effect in which the first game effect is executed when the specific symbol is stopped and displayed in the first stop order and the second game effect is executed when the specific symbol is stopped and displayed in the second stop order is called "stop order development effect". .. As a result, the player pays attention to whether the stop display in the first stop order or the second stop order is a specific symbol or a non-specific symbol, and enhances the interest of the game. In addition, it is expected that the specific symbol will be stopped and displayed in the first stop order or the second stop order, and the stop order development effect will be executed, and the game interest will be enhanced.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-1 or Reference Invention 9-2.
As the game production, it has a pre-stage production,
The common pre-stage effect is executed in the case where the identification symbol is stopped and displayed in the first stop order and the case where the identification symbol is stopped and displayed in the second stop order, and the stop order is followed by the pre-stage effect. It is characterized by executing a game production based on.

According to such a gaming machine, as a gaming effect, a pre-stage effect is provided. Then, a common pre-stage effect is executed depending on whether the identification symbol (specific symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first stop order and the identification symbol (specific symbol) is stopped and displayed in the second stop order. Following the execution of the first stage effect, the game effect based on the stop order shall be executed. As a result, at the stage of the pre-stage effect, it is not possible to recognize whether the identification symbol is stopped and displayed in the first stop order or the identification symbol (specific symbol) is stopped and displayed in the second stop order, and the identification symbol (specific symbol) is displayed. It is possible to enhance the interest of the game by paying attention to which stop order the stop display is performed.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 9-4 are the gaming machines of Reference Invention 9-1 to Reference Invention 9-3.
The different game effects executed based on the first stop order and the second stop order are game effects indicating the feasibility of the special game.
The different game effects are characterized in that they show different possibilities as the feasibility of the special game.

According to such a gaming machine, the different gaming effects executed based on the first stop order and the second stop order are both game effects indicating the feasibility of the special game, and the games having these different display modes. The rendition shows different feasibility as the feasibility of the special game. As a result, attention is paid to which stop order the identification symbol (specific symbol) is stopped and displayed, and the player executes a game effect in which the identification symbol (specific symbol) indicates the feasibility of a higher special game. Expecting to stop and display in the order of stop, enhance the interest of the game.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-1.
The three identification symbols of the first identification symbol, the second identification symbol, and the third identification symbol are stopped and displayed in a predetermined order, and the first identification symbol, the second identification symbol, and the third identification symbol are stopped and displayed. The combination of the three identification symbols of the above constitutes the stop display mode.
It is characterized in that different game effects can be executed depending on which of the first identification symbol, the second identification symbol, and the third identification symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific order. Is.

According to such a gaming machine, the first identification symbol, the second identification symbol, and the third identification symbol are stopped and displayed in a predetermined stop order, so that the first identification symbol and the third identification symbol can be displayed. The stop display mode is configured by the combination of the two identification symbols and the three identification symbols of the third identification symbol. Further, when this stop display mode becomes the specific stop display mode, a special game is executed. Then, a different game effect is executed based on which of the first identification symbol, the second identification symbol, and the third identification symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific order. As a result, attention is paid to the stop order of the three identification symbols of the first identification symbol, the second identification symbol, and the third identification symbol, and the interest of the game is enhanced.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-6 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-5.
The specific order is the first.

According to such a gaming machine, different gaming effects are executed based on which of the first identification symbol, the second identification symbol, and the third identification symbol is stopped and displayed first. .. As a result, it is noticed which of the three identification symbols, the first identification symbol, the second identification symbol, and the third identification symbol, is stopped and displayed first, and the game is enhanced.

As a game effect, it has a special development effect that is executed when the identification symbol is stopped and displayed in the first stop order or the second stop order.
When a specific symbol is stopped and displayed in the first stop order or the second stop order, a special development effect is executed.
When the non-specific symbol is stopped and displayed in the first stop order or the second stop order, the special development effect may not be executed.

As a game effect, it has a plurality of game effects with different display modes.
It has a plurality of different stop orders as the stop order of the identification symbol.
The game effect executing means is characterized in that different game effects can be executed depending on the stop order in which the identification symbol is stopped and displayed.
Further, the game effect may include a first game effect and a second game effect having a display mode different from that of the first game effect.

(Reference Invention 10)
Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-1 is
An identification symbol display means that fluctuates and displays the identification symbol based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, stops and displays a plurality of the identification symbols at a predetermined stop display position, and constitutes a stop display mode.
A game production execution means for executing a predetermined game production, and
A gaming machine provided with a special game execution means for executing a special game when the result of the variable display of the identification symbol becomes a specific result.
As the game effect, it is possible to execute a plurality of pseudo-variation displays by temporarily stopping and then displaying the identification symbols again during the period from the start of the variation display to the finalization of the stop display. Has a pseudo-variable effect
The identification symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the pseudo-variation effect is used as the identification symbol that constitutes the stop display mode.
Depending on the number of times the pseudo-variation display in the pseudo-variation effect is the identification symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the pseudo-variation effect, the identification symbol at a different stop display position is used. It is a feature.

According to such a game, as a game effect, the identification symbol is temporarily stopped and then displayed in a variable manner during the period of one variable display in which the identification symbol starts the variable display and is displayed as a fixed stop. It has a pseudo-variation effect that executes pseudo-variation display multiple times. Further, in this pseudo-variation effect, an effect is performed in which the identification symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed is one of the identification symbols that constitute the stop display mode. Then, depending on how many times the pseudo-variation display in the pseudo-variation effect is the identification symbol for which the temporary stop display is displayed, the identification symbol for the different stop display position in the stop display mode is used. As a result, in the pseudo-variation effect, attention is paid to which identification symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number of times of the pseudo-variation display, and the interest of the game is enhanced. In addition, the new game production makes it possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Further, an identification symbol display means that fluctuates and displays the identification symbol based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, stops and displays a plurality of the identification symbols at a predetermined stop display position, and constitutes a stop display mode.
A game production execution means for executing a predetermined game production, and
A gaming machine provided with a special game execution means for executing a special game when the result of the variable display of the identification symbol becomes a specific result.
As the game effect, there is a pseudo-variation effect that allows the identification symbol to be temporarily stopped and then displayed in a variable manner during the period from the start of the variable display to the finalization of the stop display.
The identification symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the pseudo-variation effect is used as the identification symbol that constitutes the stop display mode.
The identification symbol at the stop display position having a different stop display mode may be used as the identification symbol depending on when the identification symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed is the identification symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the pseudo-variation effect.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-1.
The three identification symbols of the first identification symbol, the second identification symbol, and the third identification symbol are stopped and displayed in a predetermined order, and the first identification symbol, the second identification symbol, and the third identification symbol are stopped and displayed. The combination of the three identification symbols of the above constitutes the stop display mode.
Depending on the number of times the pseudo-variation display in the pseudo-variation effect is the identification symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the pseudo-variation effect, the first identification symbol, the second identification symbol, Further, it is characterized in that it is the identification symbol of any one of the third identification symbols.

According to such a gaming machine, the first identification symbol, the second identification symbol, and the third identification symbol are stopped and displayed in a predetermined stop order, so that the first identification symbol and the third identification symbol can be displayed. The stop display mode is configured by the combination of the two identification symbols and the three identification symbols of the third identification symbol. Further, when this stop display mode becomes the specific stop display mode, a special game is executed. Then, depending on how many times the pseudo-variation display in the pseudo-variation effect is the identification symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the pseudo-variation effect, the first identification symbol, the second identification symbol, and the second identification symbol are used. 3 It shall be one of the identification symbols. As a result, in the pseudo-variation effect, attention is paid to which identification symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number of times of the pseudo-variation display, and the interest of the game is enhanced. In addition, the new game production makes it possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-1 or Reference Invention 10-2.
The identification symbol includes a specific symbol and a non-specific symbol.
In the pseudo-variation effect, the pseudo-variation display is executed a plurality of times by temporarily stopping and displaying the specific symbol and then displaying the variation again.
The specific symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the pseudo-variation effect is used as the identification symbol that constitutes the stop display mode.
Depending on the number of times the pseudo-variation display in the pseudo-variation effect is the specified symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the pseudo-variation effect, the identification symbol at a different stop display position is used. It is a feature.

According to such a gaming machine, it has a specific symbol and a non-specific symbol as identification symbols. Further, in the pseudo-variation effect, after the specific symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, the variation is displayed again, and the pseudo-variation display is executed a plurality of times. Further, in this pseudo-variation effect, an effect is performed in which the temporarily stop-displayed specific symbol is used as one of the identification symbols constituting the stop display mode. Then, the identification symbol of the different stop display position in the stop display mode is used depending on the number of times the temporary stop display is the specific symbol displayed in the pseudo change effect in the pseudo change effect. As a result, in the pseudo-variation effect, attention is paid to whether or not the specific symbol is temporarily stopped at the number of times the pseudo-variation display is displayed, and the interest of the game is enhanced. In addition, the new game production makes it possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-3.
When the identification symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the pseudo-variation effect is the non-specific symbol, the stop differs depending on the number of times the pseudo-variation display in the pseudo-variation effect is the non-specific symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed. It is characterized in that it is not used as the identification symbol of the display position.

According to such a gaming machine, when the identification symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the pseudo-variation effect is a non-specific symbol, how many times the pseudo-variation display in the pseudo-variation effect is the non-specific symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed? Does not change the stop display position. As a result, in the pseudo-variation effect, attention is paid to whether or not the specific symbol is temporarily stopped at the number of times the pseudo-variation display is displayed, and the interest of the game is enhanced.

(Reference Invention 11)
Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-1 is
Identification symbol display means that displays the identification symbols in a variable manner based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition and stops and displays a plurality of the identification symbols (in a predetermined order).
A game production execution means that can execute a game production, and
When the stop display mode composed of a combination of the plurality of identification symbols becomes the specific stop display mode, the gaming machine includes a special game execution means for executing a special game.
The identification symbol includes a specific symbol and a non-specific symbol.
As the game effect, a plurality of game effects having different display modes are provided.
When a plurality of the identification symbols are stopped and displayed, different game effects are executed depending on which of the plurality of identification symbols is stopped and displayed in the specific symbol and in a specific order. It is a thing.

According to such a gaming machine, as a gaming effect, there are a plurality of gaming effects having different display modes. Further, as the identification symbol, there are a specific symbol and a non-specific symbol. Then, different game effects are executed depending on which of the plurality of identification symbols constituting the stop display mode is stopped and displayed in a specific order. As a result, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game by paying attention to which identification symbol is stopped and displayed in the specific order and which identification symbol is stopped and displayed in the specific symbol during the variable display of the identification symbol. In addition, since the game effect to be executed differs depending on the stop mode of the identification symbol, it is possible to diversify the game effect.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-1.
The three identification symbols of the first identification symbol, the second identification symbol, and the third identification symbol are stopped and displayed in a predetermined order, and the first identification symbol, the second identification symbol, and the third identification symbol are stopped and displayed. The combination of the three identification symbols of the above constitutes the stop display mode.
Different game effects can be executed depending on which of the first identification symbol, the second identification symbol, and the third identification symbol is the specific symbol and is stopped and displayed in a specific order. It is characterized by that.

According to such a gaming machine, the first identification symbol, the second identification symbol, and the third identification symbol are stopped and displayed in a predetermined stop order, so that the first identification symbol and the third identification symbol can be displayed. The stop display mode is configured by the combination of the two identification symbols and the three identification symbols of the third identification symbol. Further, when this stop display mode becomes the specific stop display mode, a special game is executed. Then, a different game effect is executed depending on which of the first identification symbol, the second identification symbol, and the third identification symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific symbol and in a specific order. For example, the first identification symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific order with a specific symbol, the second identification symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific order with a specific symbol, and the third identification symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific order with a specific symbol. Depending on the case, a game effect having a different display mode is executed. As a result, the stop order of the three identification symbols of the first identification symbol, the second identification symbol, and the third identification symbol (which one is stopped and displayed in a specific order) and the identification symbol are stopped and displayed at the specific symbol. Make people pay attention to the crab and enhance the interest of the game.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-2.
The specific order is the first.

According to such a gaming machine, different gaming effects are executed based on which of the first identification symbol, the second identification symbol, and the third identification symbol is stopped and displayed first. .. As a result, among the three identification symbols of the first identification symbol, the second identification symbol, and the third identification symbol, attention is paid to which identification symbol is the specific symbol and is first stopped and displayed, and the game is enhanced. ..

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 11-4 are the gaming machines of Reference Inventions 11-1 to 11-3.
When the identification symbol to be stopped and displayed in the specific order is the non-specific symbol,
It is characterized in that, which of the plurality of identification symbols is stopped and displayed in the specific order, different game effects are not executed.

According to such a gaming machine, when the identification symbols to be stopped and displayed in a specific order are non-specific symbols, the game differs depending on which of the plurality of the identification symbols is stopped and displayed in the specific order. Do not perform the production. As a result, the player pays attention to whether the stop display in the specific order is a specific symbol or a non-specific symbol, and enhances the interest of the game.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 11-5 are the gaming machines of Reference Inventions 11-1 to 11-4.
As the game production, it has a pre-stage production,
When different identification symbols among the plurality of identification symbols are the specific symbols and are stopped and displayed in the specific order, the common pre-stage effect is executed, and the specific symbol follows the pre-stage effect and the specific symbol has the specific order. It is characterized by executing a game effect based on the stop display.

According to such a gaming machine, as a gaming effect, a pre-stage effect is provided. Then, when any of the identification symbols constituting the stop display mode is stopped and displayed with a specific symbol and in a specific order, the common pre-stage effect is executed, and the execution of the pre-stage effect is followed. , The game effect is executed based on which identification symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific order. As a result, at the stage of the first stage production, it is not possible to recognize which identification symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific order (and in a specific symbol), and it is possible to pay attention to the stop mode of the identification symbol and enhance the game interest.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 11-6 are the gaming machines of Reference Inventions 11-1 to 11-5.
The plurality of game effects that can be executed based on the specific symbol being stopped and displayed in the specific order are game effects that indicate the feasibility of the special game.
The plurality of game effects are characterized in that they show different possibilities as the feasibility of the special game.

According to such a gaming machine, different game effects executed depending on which identification symbol constituting the stop display mode is the specific symbol to be stopped and displayed in a specific order, all of which indicate the feasibility of the special game. It is an effect, and the game effects of these different display modes show different feasibility as the feasibility of the special game. As a result, attention is paid to which identification symbol is a specific symbol and the stop display is performed in a specific order, and the player expects that a game effect indicating a higher feasibility of the special game is executed. Enhance the interest of games.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-7 is
Identification symbol display means that variablely displays the identification symbol based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and stops and displays a plurality of the identification symbols.
A game production execution means that can execute a game production, and
When the stop display mode composed of a combination of the plurality of identification symbols becomes the specific stop display mode, the gaming machine includes a special game execution means for executing a special game.
As the identification symbol, a specific symbol is provided.
As the game effect, a plurality of game effects having different display modes are provided.
When a plurality of the identification symbols are stopped and displayed, different game effects are executed depending on which of the plurality of identification symbols is stopped and displayed in the specific symbol and in a specific order. It is a thing.

According to such a gaming machine, as a gaming effect, there are a plurality of gaming effects having different display modes. In addition, it has a specific symbol as an identification symbol. Then, different game effects are executed depending on which of the plurality of identification symbols constituting the stop display mode is stopped and displayed in a specific order. As a result, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game by paying attention to which identification symbol is stopped and displayed in the specific order and which identification symbol is stopped and displayed in the specific symbol during the variable display of the identification symbol. In addition, since the game effect to be executed differs depending on the stop mode of the identification symbol, it is possible to diversify the game effect.

The invention may be configured by combining one or a plurality of the above-mentioned Reference Inventions 1 to 11.

1 Pachinko game machine, 7b Production symbol display area (Production symbol display area), 8 Production symbol, 20 1st start port, 21 2nd start port, 30 1st big prize opening, 35 2nd big prize opening, 39 Specific area , 41a 1st special symbol display (1st special symbol display), 41b 2nd special symbol display (2nd special symbol display), 80 main control board (main control unit), 90 sub control board (sub control) Part), 100 image control board (image control unit), 103a effect 1st special figure hold indicator, 103b effect 2nd special figure hold indicator

Claims (5)

A symbol display means that displays a plurality of symbol arrays composed of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and stops and displays the symbols selected from the plurality of symbol arrays in a predetermined stop mode.
It is provided with a privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege when the symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop mode.
A plurality of specific symbols are included as the symbols constituting the symbol arrangement, and the plurality of specific symbols are symbols that show common information and have different display modes.
As the specific stop mode,
A first specific stop mode in which the stop mode is composed of a plurality of the specific symbols and the specific symbols constituting the stop mode are composed of the specific symbols having the same display mode.
A second specification in which the stop mode is composed of a plurality of the specific symbols, and at least one of the specific symbols constituting the stop mode is composed of the specific symbol having a display mode different from the display mode of the other specific symbols. Has a stop mode and
A gaming machine characterized in that different benefits are given depending on whether the first specific stop mode displays a stop display or the second specific stop mode displays a stop display. Equipped with a game production execution means capable of executing a predetermined game production,
As the game production
A first stop effect indicating whether or not the stop mode is a stop mode that can constitute the first specific stop mode, and
A second stop effect indicating whether or not the stop mode is a stop mode that can constitute the second specific stop mode, and
A continuous stop effect in which the first stop effect and the second stop effect are sequentially executed in a predetermined order while maintaining the stop display of at least one of the specific symbols constituting the stop mode.
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is characterized by having. A claim that the continuous stop effect is characterized in that, of the first stop effect and the second stop effect, the stop effect executed first does not have a specific stop mode, and the next stop effect is executed. The gaming machine according to 2. Equipped with a pass / fail judgment means that executes a pass / fail judgment based on the establishment of a predetermined condition,
The game effect includes a first game effect and a second game effect that suggests a higher possibility than the first game effect as a possibility that the result of the hit / fail determination will be a hit.
It has a second specific symbol that is not included in the symbol array,
The second or third aspect of the present invention, wherein the specific symbol is changed to the second specific symbol and the second game effect is executed at a predetermined timing after the start of the variation display of the symbol. Gaming machine. When the specific symbol is changed to the second specific symbol and the second game effect is executed, and the result of the hit / fail determination is incorrect, the second specific symbol is returned to the specific symbol, and the above-mentioned The gaming machine according to claim 4, wherein the stop display is performed in an out-of-stop mode including a specific symbol.

Images